Home

MicroLogix™ 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers

1. Instruction Description Page Instruction Description Page ABL Test Buffer for Line 20 14 MCR Master Control Reset 16 5 ACB Number of Characters in Buffer 20 15 MEQ Mask Compare for Equal 9 6 ACI String to Integer 20 16 MOV Move 13 1 ACL ASCII Clear Buffers 20 7 MSG Message 21 3 ACN String Concatenate 20 18 MUL Multiply 10 5 ADD Add 10 4 MVM Masked Move 13 3 AEX String Extract 20 19 NEG Negate 10 6 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines 20 20 NEO Not Equal 9 3 AIC ASCII Integer to String 20 8 NOT Logical NOT 12 6 AND Bit Wise AND 12 3 ONS One Shot 1 5 ARD ASCII Read Characters 20 22 OR Logical OR 12 4 ARL ASCII Read Line 20 23 OSF One Shot Falling 7 6 ASC String Search 20 25 OSR One Shot Rising 7 6 ASR ASCII String Compare 20 26 OTE Output Energize 7 3 AWA ASCII Write with Append 20 9 OTL Output Latch 7 4 AWT ASCII Write 20 11 OTU Output Unlatch 7 4 BSL Bit Shift Left 14 4 PID Proportional Integral Derivative 19 3 BSR Bit Shift Right 14 6 PTO Pulse Train Output 6 1 CLR Clear 10 6 PWM Pulse Width Modulation 6 18 COP Copy File 14 2 RAC Reset Accumulated Value 5 27 CTD Count Down 8 9 REF I O Refresh 7 4 CTU Count Up 8 9 RES Reset 8 10 DCD Decode 4 to
2. Source Bit I 22 12 Data block is shifted one bit at a time from bit 16 to bit 73 3130 29 128 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 119 118 17 16 4 47 46 45 44 43 42 141 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 58 Bit Array B3 1 RESERVED 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 Unload Bit R6 0 10 File Instructions 14 5 If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions This instruction uses the following operands File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated Control The control operand is the address of the BSL s control element The control element consists of 3 words Word0 JEN Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word 2 not used 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position 3 ER Error Bit when set indicates that the instruction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid using the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set Bit Address The source is the address of the bit to be
3. I1 MOV MOVE Source N7 2 de 0001 0010 0011 0100 4660 Dest S 13 4660 CLR CLEAR Dest S 14 0 FRD FROM BCD S 13 and S 14 are Source 13 IM at displayed in BCD format Dest N7 0 1224 as 0000 0100 1101 0010 When the input condition I 0 1 is set 1 a BCD value transferred from a 4 digit thumbwheel switch for example is moved from word N7 2 into the math register Status word S 14 is then cleared to make certain that unwanted data is not present when the FRD instruction is executed Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 11 8 Conversion Instructions TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD Instruction Type output TOD ToBCD Table 11 10 Execution Time for the TOD Instructions Source N7 0 0 lt Controller When Rung Is Dest N7 1 0000h True False MicroLogix 1200 17 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 14 3 us 0 0 us The TOD instruction is used to convert the integer source value to BCD and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 11 11 TOD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Modell Level a Parameter E 2 g
4. a Address Address ion Files e Data Files Function Files c Mode Level a 5 Parameter E 8 2 E e m3 z S z ojo d zu E n a E E gt E e o t N e les len fie f os S SE B le S SE 18 8 ale la l la l S la Operand Bit elelelelelje elelelelelele e e e e e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type input Table 7 8 Execution Time for the ONS Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1500 2 2 us 1 7 us NOTE The ONS instruction for the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 provides the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers The ONS instruction is a retentive input instruction that triggers an event to occur one time After the false to true rung transition the ONS instruction remains true for one program scan The output then turns OFF and remains OFF until the logic preceding the ONS instruction is false this re activates the ONS instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 7 6 R
5. below Table 11 3 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Source Bits Destination Bits 15to04 03 02 01 00 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 X 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x not used Publication 1762 RM001C EN P ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Table 11 5 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Source Dest 0000000000000000 N71 0000h Instruction Type output Table 11 4 Execution Time for the ENC Instruction Conversion Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 12 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 6 8 us 0 0 us 11 3 The ENC instruction searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit looking for the first bit set The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an inte
6. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 Word upper byte lower byte 0 String Length number of characters range is from 0 to 82 1 character 0 character 1 2 character 2 character 3 l l l 40 character 78 character 79 41 character 80 character 81 Addressing String Files The addressing scheme for the string data file is shown below Format Explanation ST Stringfile STf e s f File number The valid file number range is from 3 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Each element is 42 words in length as shown in Table 20 1 Subelement delimiter s Subelement number The valid subelement number range is from Oto 41 You can also specify LEN for word 0 The subelement represents a word address Examples ST9 2 String File 9 Element 2 ST17 1 LEN String File 17 Element 1 LEN Variable Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 6 ASCII Instructions Control Data File Format Explanation R Control file File Description The control data element is used by ASCII instructions to store control information required to operate the instruction The control data element for ASCII instructions includes status and control bits an error code byte and two character words as shown below Table 20 2 ASCII Instructions Control Data File Elements Control Element Word 15 14 13 312 1d1 310 09 08 07 06 05 04
7. Error Eror Code Hex 0 Description No errors In this example the controller reads 10 elements from the target s Local Node 2 N7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If five seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types QU 1 BNL lt gt read write 0 1 8 B NL T lt gt read write jq C lt gt read write C R lt gt read write R RTC gt write N RTC 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages 2 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only Communications Instructions 21 31 Example 2 Local Read from a 485CIF Message Instruction Setup za MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 General This Controller Communication Command Data Table Address N70 Size in Elements 5 Channel 0 485CIF Read Ignore if timed out TO r Control Bits Awaiting Execution Ew o Target Device Message Timeout 15 Data Table Offset 27 Local Node Addr dec 2 octal
8. Data Memory Consumed Formatted String Size delimiter 0 bytes 1 character word 2 bytes 6 characters long word 4 bytes 11 characters date 2 bytes 10 characters time 2 bytes 8 characters For queue 0 the formatted string length is 59 characters as shown below Data Date Time N7 11 L14 0 T4 5 ACC 11 3 0 112 1 Characters 10 1 8 1 16 1 111 1 J6 1 16 1 J6 104 1 84 14 6 14 11 1 6 1 6 1 6 59 characters Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 22 4 Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Number of Records Using Queue 0 as an example each record consumes Record Field Memory Consumption Date 2 bytes Time 2 bytes N7 11 2 bytes L14 0 4 bytes T4 5 ACC 2 bytes 11 3 0 2 bytes B3 2 2 bytes Integrity Check 2 bytes Total 18 bytes In this example each record consumes 18 bytes So if one queue was configured the maximum number of records that could be stored would be 2730 The maximum number of records is calculated by Maximum Number of Records Data Log File Size Record Size 48K bytes 18 bytes 48 1024 18 2730 records Example Queue 5 Table 22 2 Queue 5 Time w Delimiter TAB Time N7 11 11 3 0 11 2 1 Record 0 20 00 00 TAB 2315 TAB 8190 TAB 4465 Record 1 20 30 00 TAB 2400 TAB 82
9. The major software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance e number of nodes on the network addresses of those nodes baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed Refer to your programming software s documentation for more information Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P E 4 Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The valid range for the MicroLogix controllers is 1 to 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller Com
10. Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 0 to 2 Reserved Word read only 3 bits 07 00 CMD code bits 15 08 FNC code derived Word read only 4 Reserved Word read only 5 MG11 0 RBL Remote Bridge Link ID Y Word read only 6 MG11 0 LBN Local Bridge Node Address Y Word read only 7 MG11 0 RBN Remote Bridge Node Address Y Word read only 8 MG11 0 CHN Channel 0 channel 0 Y Word read only Always 0 for MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Processors 8 MG11 0 CHN Channel 0 channel 0 or 1 channel 1 Y Word read write MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processors 9 MG11 0 NOD Target Node Number Y Word read write 10 MG11 0 MTO Message timeout setting or preset in seconds Y Word read write 1 Reserved Word read only 2 Target Location information See tables on page 21 5 for options M Word read only 3 MG11 0 TFN Y Word read write 4 MG11 0 ELE Y Word read write 15 Y Word read only 16 Control bits See Control Bits table on page 21 5 for details N 16 bits read write 7 Status bits and Range parameter See table on page 21 6 for details Mixed 16 bits read only 8 MG11 0 ERR Error code See Error Codes on page 21 21 N Word read only 9 Time since message started in seconds N Word read only 20 Reserved Word read only 21 Internal message start time in seconds N Word read only 22 to 24 Reserved N Word read only W 1 User access refers to user program access MSG File word or bi
11. Masked Equal Table 9 8 Execution Time for the MEQ Instructions Source N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Mask N7 1 0000h lt True False Compare T MicroLogix 1200 word TS us TBs long word 3 9 us 3 1 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 7 us 1 7 us long word 3 5 us 2 9 us The MEQ instruction is used to compare whether one value source is equal to a second value compare through a mask The source and the compare are logically ANDed with the mask Then these results are compared to each other If the resulting values are equal the rung state is true If the resulting values are not equal the rung state is false For example Source Compare 111 11 11 41 J0 11 JO JO JO JO JO 1 1 JO JO 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 Mask Mask 111 0 10 1 1 11 41 J1 JO JO JO JO 1 1 1 11 JO JO 1 11 1 1 Intermediate Result Intermediate Result 1 11 JO JO 1 JO 1 10 0 JO JO JO JO JO 0 1 1 JO JO 1 1 1 1 Comparison of the Intermediate Results not equal Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The source mask and compare values must all be of the same data size either word or long word The data ranges for mask and compare are e 32768 to 32767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 to FFFF FFFF Compare Instructions 9 7 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 9 9 MEQ Instruction Valid Addres
12. AB Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers Bulletins 1762 and 1764 Instruction Set Reference Manual Automation Important User Information Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements including any applicable laws regulations codes and standards The illustrations charts sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell International Corporation does not assume responsibility or liability to include intellectual property liability for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication Rockwell Automation publication SGI 1 1 Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control available from your local Rockwell Automation office describes some important differences between solid state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication Reproduction of the contents of this copyrighted publication in whole or part without writt
13. PWM Idle Status IS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access IS PWM Idle Status PWM 0 IS_ bit Oor1 status read only The PWM IS idle Status is controlled by the PWM sub system and represents no PWM activity It can be used in the control program by an input instruction e Set 1 PWM sub system is in an idle state Cleared 0 PWM sub system is not in an idle state Cit is running PWM Error Detected ED Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access ED PWM Error Detection PWM 0 ED bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM ED Error Detected bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PWM instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PWM 0 ED e Set 1 Whenever a PWM instruction is in an error state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instruction is not in an error state Using High Speed Outputs 6 23 PWM Normal Operation NS Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access NS PWM Normal Operation PWM 0 NS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM NS Normal Operation bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any r
14. STI Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected STEO ED binary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the STI sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set the user should look at the error code in parameter STI 0 ER This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller STI Set Point Milliseconds Between Interrupts SPM Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access SPM Set Point STEO SPM word INT 0 to control read write Msec 65 535 When the controller transitions to an executing mode the SPM set point in milliseconds value is loaded into the STI If the STI is configured correctly and enabled the program file identified in the STI variable PEN is scanned at this interval This value can be changed from the control program by using the STS instruction NOTE The minimum value cannot be less than the time required to scan the STI program file STI 0 PFN plus the Interrupt Latency Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File Using Interrupts 18 17 The EII event input interrupt is a feature that allows the user to scan a specific program file subroutine when an input con
15. m PWM a s Ell o RTC 04 to 255 Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 22 3 Example Queue 0 This queue is used to show how to calculate the string length of each record and maximum number of records Table 22 1 Queue 0 Date v Time v Delimiter Date Time N7 11 L14 0 T4 5 ACC 11 3 0 B3 2 Record 0 01 10 2000 20 00 00 2315 03457 200 18190 4465 Record 1 01 10 2000 20 30 00 2400 03456 250 18210 4375 Record 2 01 10 2000 21 00 00 2275 03455 225 8150 4335 Record 3 01 10 2000 21 30 00 2380 03455 1223 18195 4360 Record 4 01 10 2000 22 00 00 2293 03456 1218 8390 4375 Record 5 01 10 2000 22 30 00 2301 03455 231 8400 4405 Record 6 01 10 2000 23 00 00 2308 03456 215 8100 4395 Record 7 01 10 2000 23 30 00 2350 03457 208 8120 4415 Record 8 01 11 2000 00 00 00 2295 03457 209 8145 4505 Record 9 01 11 2000 00 30 00 2395 03456 1211 8190 4305 Record 10 01 11 2000 01 00 00 2310 03455 224 8195 4455 Record 11 01 11 2000 01 30 00 2295 03456 233 8190 4495 String Length of Record The size of a record is limited so that the length of the maximum formatted string does not exceed 80 characters The following table can be used to determine the formatted string length
16. Compare Instructions Chapter 9 Use these input instructions when you want to compare values of data Instruction Used To Page EQU Equal Test whether two values are equal 9 3 NEQ Not Equal Test whether one value is not equal to a 9 3 second value LES Less Than Test whether one value is less than a second 9 4 value LEQ Less Than or Equal To Test whether one value is less than or equal 9 5 to a second value x GRT Greater Than Test whether one value is greater than a 9 4 second value gt GEO Greater Than or Equal To Test whether one value is greater than or 9 5 equal to a second value 2 MEO Mask Compare for Equal Test portions of two values to see whether 9 6 they are equal LIM Limit Test Test whether one value is within the range of 9 7 two other values Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 9 2 Compare Instructions Using the Compare Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Most of the compare instructions use two parameters Source A and Source B MEQ and LIM have an additional parameter and are described later in this chapter Both sources cannot be immediate values The valid data ranges for these instructions are 32768 to 32767 word 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator CHSC ACC IMPORTANT for Source A in GRT LES GEQ and LEQ instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used
17. SUS Suspend Suspend ID 1 TND Temporary End CTND gt Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output The SUS instruction is used to trap and identify specific conditions for program debugging and system troubleshooting This instruction causes the processor to enter the suspend idle mode causing all outputs to be de energized The suspend ID and the suspend file program file number or subroutine file number identifying where the suspend instruction resides are placed in the status file S 7 and S 8 The immediate data range for the suspend ID is from 32768 to 32767 Instruction Type output Table 16 6 Execution Time for the TND Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 0 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 0 0 us The TND instruction is used to denote a premature end of ladder program execution The TND instruction cannot be executed from a STI subroutine HSC subroutine EII subroutine or a user fault subroutine This instruction may appear more than once in a ladder program On a true rung TND stops the processor from scanning the rest of the program file In addition this instruction performs the output scan input scan and housekeeping aspects of the processor scan cycle prior to resuming scanning at rung 0 of the main program file 2 If this instruction is executed in a nested subroutine it terminates execution of all nested subroutines
18. The ACL instruction clears the Receive and or Transmit buffer s This instruction also removes instructions from ASCII queue This instruction executes immediately upon the rung transitioning to a true state Any ASCII transmissions in progress are terminated when the ACL instruction executes NOTE The ASCII queue may contain up to 16 instructions that are waiting to run Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 Receive Buffer clears the Receive buffer when set to Yes and removes the Receive ASCII port control instructions ARL and ARD from the ASCII queue Transmit Buffer clears the Transmit buffer when set to Yes and removes the Transmit ASCII port control instructions AWA and AWT from the ASCII queue Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 8 ASCII Instructions AIC ASCII Integer to String AIC Integer to String Source Dest ST14 1 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 4 ACL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files Address Address iine Mode Level a Ej sg Parameter z E alg E Ju S S o zi ale E
19. 6 resumes normal execution from the point where the controller program was interrupted When Can the Controller Operation be Interrupted The Micrologix 1200 and 1500 controllers only allow interrupts to be serviced during certain periods of a program scan They are At the start of a ladder rung e Anytime during End of Scan Between data words in an expansion I O scan The interrupt is only serviced by the controller at these opportunities If the interrupt is disabled the pending bit is set at the next occurrence of one of the three occasions listed above Waid l you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction OTL OTE or UIE must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 4 Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Priority of User Interrupts When multiple interrupts occur the interrupts are serviced based upon their individual priority When an interrupt occurs and another interrupt s has already occurred but has not been serviced the new interrupt is scheduled for execution based on its priority relative to the other pending interrupts At the next point in time when an interrupt can be serviced all the interrupts are executed in the sequence of highest priority to lowest priority If an interrupt occurs while a lower prio
20. Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 9 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 27 See Active Node Table Block on page 3 17 for more information Active Nodes Nodes 16 to 31 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 10 word 0 to FFFF status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 28 See Active Node Table Block on page 3 17 for more information Publication 1762 RM001C EN P System Status File C 15 Math Register Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 13 word 32 768 to status read write low byte 432 767 8 14 word 32 768 to status read write high byte 132 767 These two words are used in conjunction with the MUL DIV FRD and TOD math instructions The math register value is assessed upon execution of the instruction and remains valid until the next MUL DIV FRD or TOD instruction is executed in the user program Node Address Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 15 low byte byte 0 t
21. E ssl s I ISIEI zz o lo lale l2 Ele 2 E 5 la la E s F 2 ES Source eje e e e e e e Destination elelelelele 2 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 See TOD Instruction Destination Operand below IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files TOD Instruction Destination Operand The destination can be either a word address or math register The maximum values permissible once converted to BCD are e 9999 if the destination is a word address allowing only a 4 digit BCD value e 32768 if the destination is the math register allowing a 5 digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in S 13 and the high order digit in S 14 If the destination is the math register it must be directly addressed as 8 13 8 13 is the only status file element that can be used Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Conversion Instructions 11 9 Updates to Math Status Bits Table 11 12 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S0 0 Cary lalwaysrests S 0 1 Overflow sets if BCD result is larger than 9999 On overflow the minor error flag is also set S 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets S 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the source word is negative otherwise resets Changes to the Math Register Contains the 5 digit BCD result of the conversion This result is valid at overflow NO
22. Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program Address Data Format Range Type 1 10 binary 0 or 1 control User Program Access read only For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit it set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module program when the control program is corrupt or a default program exists in the controller NOTE If you clear the controller memory the controller loads the default program The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also LE Load on Error on pa ge3 8 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 6 System Status File Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Load Memory Module Always Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 81 11 binary 0 or 1 control read only For this option to work you must set 1 this bit in the control program before downloading the program to a memory module When this bit is set in the memory module and power is applied the controller downloads the memory module program The mode of the controller after the transfer takes place is determined by the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S
23. T E E gg gBEzZzIEE amp o9 5 zs m z 5 S E o x a S 5 8 S a 2 ia 2 S in Channel Receive Buffer e e Transmit Buffer e e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation When Clear Receive Buffer and Clear Transmit Buffer are both set to Yes all Receive and Transmit instructions CARL ARD AWA and AWT are removed from the ASCII queue When instructions are removed from the ASCII queue the following bits are set ER 1 RN 0 EU 0 and ERR Instruction Type output Table 20 5 Execution Time for the AIC Instruction OxOE Controller Data Size When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 29 3 us 52 us character 0 0 us long word 82 0 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later word 25 us 4 3 us character 0 0 us long word 68 7 us 0 0 us The AIC instruction converts an integer or long word value source to an ASCII string destination The source can be a constant or an address The source data range is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 ASCII Instructions 20 9 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 6 AIC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Typ
24. The memory module function file programming screen is shown below 7 4 Function Files HSC PTO PwM sti Jen ATC TRI Address NOTE MMI Data values are a reflection of what is stored in the memory module not your program Lit nnn a ee HE CN 4 Catalog Number Integer L SAS Series a L REV Revision L FT Functionality Type 0 H MP Module Present LWP Write Protect Indicator H FO Fault Override H LPC Load Program Compare LE Load On Error F L Load Always L MB Mode Behavior The parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below Table 3 7 MMI Function File Parameters Feature Address Data Format Type UserProgram Access MP Module Present MMI 0 MP binary bit status read only WP Write Protect MMI 0 WP binary bit control read only FO Fault Override MMI 0 FO binary bit control read only LPC Program Compare MMI O LPC binary bit control read only LE Load On Error MMI O LE binary bit control read only LA Load Always MMI 0 LA binary bit control read only MB Mode Behavior MMI 0 MB binary bit control read only FT Functionality Type The LSB of this word identifies the type of module installed Memory Module 2 Real Time Clock Module 3 Memory and Real Time Clock Module Function Files 3 7 MP Module Present The MP Module Present bit can be used in the user program to
25. This bit applies to the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series B Controllers Major Error Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 6 word 0 to FFFF status read write This register displays a value which can be used to determine what caused a fault to occur See Identifying Controller Faults on page D 1 to learn more about troubleshooting faults Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 14 System Status File Suspend Code Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 87 word 32 768 to status read write 132 767 When the controller executes an Suspend SUS instruction the SUS code is written to this location S 7 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors Suspend File Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 word 0 to 255 status read write When the controller executes an Suspend SUS instruction the SUS file is written to this location S 8 This pinpoints the conditions in the application that caused the Suspend mode The controller does not clear this value Use the SUS instruction with startup troubleshooting or as runtime diagnostics for detection of system errors Active Nodes Nodes 0 to 15
26. DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks The illustration below shows a DeviceNet network using DeviceNet Interfaces 1761 NET DND connected to an Ethernet network using an SLC 5 05 In this configuration controllers on the DeviceNet network can reply to requests from devices on the Ethernet network but cannot initiate communications to devices on Ethernet Figure 21 2 DeviceNet and Ethernet Networks DNI DNI SLC 5 03 DeviceNet Network IE SLC 5 05 MicroLogix 1500 MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 Ethernet Network SLC 5 05 PLC 5E Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 18 Communications Instructions Configuring a Remote Message Publication 1762 RM001C EN P You configure for remote capability in the RSLogix 500 Message Setup screen Example Configuration Screen and Network The message configuration shown below is for the MicroLogix 1500 at node 12 on the DH 485 network This message reads five elements of data from the SLC 5 04 node 51 on the DH network starting at address N 50 0 The SLC 5 04 at Node 23 of the DH network is configured for passthru operation NOTE The MicroLogix 1200 capabilities are the same as the MicroLogix 1500 in this example 7a MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 This Controller Communication Command 500CPU Read Data Table Address 7 0 Size in Elements 5 Channel 0 Targe
27. END Program End CEND gt MCR Master Control Reset CMCR Program Control Instructions 16 5 Instruction Type output The END instruction must appear at the end of every ladder program For the main program file file 2 this instruction ends the program scan For a subroutine interrupt or user fault file the END instruction causes a return from subroutine Instruction Type output Table 16 7 Execution Time for the MCR Instructions Controller Instruction When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 MCR Start 1 2 us 1 2 us MCR End 1 6 us 1 6 us MicroLogix 1500 MCR Start 0 8 us 0 8 us MCR End 1 0 us 1 0 us The MCR instruction works in pairs to control the ladder logic found between those pairs Rungs within the MCR zone are still scanned but scan time is reduced due to the false state of non retentive outputs Non retentive outputs are reset when the rung goes false This instruction defines the boundaries of an MCR Zone An MCR Zone is the set of ladder logic instructions bounded by an MCR instruction pair The start of an MCR zone is defined to be the rung that contains an MCR instruction preceded by conditional logic The end of an MCR zone is defined to be the first rung containing just an MCR instruction following a start MCR zone rung as shown below 30 31 32 33 1 AE CMCR gt 0 Ladder Logic within MCR Zone CMCR gt Publication 1762
28. Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Chapter 15 Sequencer Instructions Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines or processes that have a consistent and repeatable operation They are typically time based or event driven Instruction Used To Page SQC Sequencer Compare Compare 16 bit data with stored data 15 2 S00 Sequencer Output Transfer 16 bit data to word addresses 15 5 SQL Sequencer Load Load 16 bit data into a file 15 8 Use the sequencer compare instruction to detect when a step is complete use the sequencer output instruction to set output conditions for each step Use the sequencer load instruction to load data into the sequencer file The primary advantage of sequencer instructions is to conserve program memory These instructions monitor and control 16 word or 32 long word discrete outputs at a time in a single rung You can use bit integer or double integer files with sequencer instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 15 2 Sequencer Instructions SQC Sequencer Compare Instruction Type output sac Table 15 1 Execution Time for the SOC Instruction Sequencer Compare CEN 5 F
29. Local Remote Local Eror ERE Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN 7 o Error Code Hex 0 No errors is Description In this example the controller reads five elements words from the target device s Local Node 2 CIF file starting at word 20 Cor byte 20 for non SLC 500 devices The five elements are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If 15 seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types oU t BNL lt gt read write 485CIF T lt gt read write A85CIF C lt gt read write 485CIF R lt gt read write A85CIF ST write 485CIF 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages 2 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 32 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Example 3 Local Read from a PLC 5 Message Instruction Setup za MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 Gener This Controller Communication Command Data Table Address N7 Size in Elements Ho Chann
30. Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Source if they are file data types It determines the next location in the stack to receive the current comparison data Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 for words and 0 to 127 for long words The position is incremented on each false to true transition Sequencer Instructions 15 5 Q0 Sequencer Output Sao Sequencer Output C EN 5 File B3 0 Mask N7 0 lt DN gt Dest N7 1 Control R6 0 Length 1 Position 0 lt Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 15 2 SQC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files UD psg Parameter 2 ec amp 8 sS E g sc E ol lulaleb ZEREB GEESE ISIE Ess ls 2 File ele e e e ele ele Mask ele e e e e e e e ele Source ele e e e e ele e Control 2 e e Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Table 15 3
31. See Data Table Address Offset on page 21 13 Local Bridge Address This variable defines the bridge address on the local network In the example DH 485 node 12 MicroLogix 1500 on Link ID 1 is writing data to node 51 SLC 5 04 on Link ID 100 The SLC 5 04 at node 17 is the bridge device This variable sends the message to local node 17 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 20 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Remote Bridge Address This variable defines the remote node address of the bridge device In this example the remote bridge address is set to zero because the target device SLC 5 04 at node 63 octal is a remote capable device If the target device is remote capable the remote bridge address is not required If the target device is not remote capable SLC 500 SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and MicroLogix 1000 Series A B and C the remote bridge address is required Remote Station Address This variable is the final destination address of the message instruction In this example integer file 50 elements 0 to 4 of the SLC 5 04 on Link ID 100 at node 63 octal receives data from the MicroLogix 1500 controller at node 12 on Link ID 1 Remote Bridge Link ID This variable is a user assigned value that defines the remote network as a number This number must be used by any device initiating remote messaging to that network In the example any controller on Link ID 1 sending data to a device on Link ID 1
32. Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OF Output Frequency Hz PTO O OF word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write The PTO OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during the RUN phase of the pulse profile This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the device components being moved Data less than zero and greater than 20 000 generates a PTO error Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 12 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P PTO Operating Frequency Status OFS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access OFS Operating PTO 0 0FS word INT 0to 20 000 status read only Frequency Status Hz The PTO OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PTO sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency being produced by the PTO sub system NOTE The value displayed may not exactly match the value entered in the PTO 0 OF This is because the PTO sub system may not be capable of reproducing an exact frequency at some of the higher frequencies For PTO applications this is typically not an issue because in all cases an exact number of pulses are produced PTO Total Output Pulses To Be Generated TOP Sub Element Address Data Range Type User De
33. ere MEE shown in this illustration To access this screen esc right mouse click on the desired data file Elements e Last v5 Attributes 1 1 c NOTE Statically protected files are not protected from MSG Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global local Ta File LAD 2 Z Protection Constant Lol C None T Memory Module Download Cancel Apply Help Publication 1762 RM001C EN P instruction writes Controller Memory and File Types 2 9 Password Protection MicroLogix controllers have a built in security system based on numeric passwords Controller passwords consist of up to 10 digits 0 9 Each controller program may contain two passwords the Password and the Master Password Passwords restrict access to the controller The Master Password takes precedence over the Password The idea is that all controllers in a project would have different Passwords but the same Master Password allowing access to all controllers for supervisory or maintenance purposes You can establish change or delete a password by using the Controller Properties dialog box It is not necessary to use passwords but if used a master password is ignored unless a password is also used Controller Properties Ed General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications r Password New Rence p Master Password New Fema Cancel Apply Hel
34. et Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level e Parameter E 2 E es E e E eo S zje S ri E E g E t E En doses i uU 9 3 s z s o _ lo e le SE ISIE I IG S S FS 9 B la lela S S la Filel2 e e e e e Source e e e e e e e e e e Control 3 e Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 File Direct and File Indirect addressing also applies 3 Control file only IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EH BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P JMP Jump to Label 02 0 C JMP gt Chapter 16 Program Control Instructions Use these instructions to change the order in which the processor scans a ladder program Typically these instructions are used to minimize scan time create a more efficient program and troubleshoot a ladder program LBL Label label instruction 62 JSR Jump to Subroutine Jump to a designated subroutine and return 16 2 SBR Subroutine Label 16 3 RET Return from Subroutine 163 SUS Suspend Debug or diagnose your user program 16 4 TND Temporary End Abort current ladder scan 16 4 END Program End End a program or subroutine 16 5 MCR Master Control Reset Enable or inhibit a master control zone in 16 5 your ladder program Instruction Type output Table 16 1 Execution Time for the J
35. 1 0 Status File 10S This file type contains information about the controller 1 0 See Input Output Status File on page 3 18 for the file structure Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Real Time Clock Function File Function Files 3 3 The real time clock provides year month day of month day of week hour minute and second information to the Real Time Clock RTC Function File in the controller The programming screen is shown below ma Function Files olx jeu mmi par rn cs Pw ios CE NN HYR Year H MON Month b DAY Day HHR Hour H MIN Minute L SEC Second H DOW Day Of The Week LDS Disabled L BL ATC Battery is Low Hsc Pro sm ell Day of Week Sunda DD MM YY oas o amp HH MM SS Time 0 p Set Date amp Time Disable Clock cOoOocoooococo The parameters and their valid ranges are shown in the table below Table 3 2 Real Time Clock Function File Feature Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access YR RTC Year RTC 0 YR word 1998 to 2097 status read only MON RTC Month RTC 0 MON word 1 to 12 status read only DAY RTC Day of Month RTC 0 DAY word 1 to 31 status read only HR RTC Hours RTC 0 HR word 0 to 23 military time status read only MIN RTC Minutes RTC 0 MIN word 0 to 59 status read only SEC RTC Seconds RTC 0 SEC word 0 to 59 status read only DOW RTC Day of Week RTC 0 DOW word 0 to 6 Sunday
36. ASCII Write AWT _ ASCII Write Channel Source Control String Length Characters Sent Error j CEN 2 CON gt CER gt ASCII Instructions 0 ST37 42 Example I1 AWA ASCII WRITE APPEND 10 Channel Source Control If input slot 1 bit 10 is set read 25 characters from ST37 42 and write it to the display device Then write a carriage return and line feed default In this example when the rung goes from false to true the control String Length Error Characters Sent R6 23 20 11 EN DN ER element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction The controller sends 25 characters from the start of string ST37 42 to the display device and then sends user configured append characters The Done bit DN is set and a value of 27 is present in POS word of the ASCII control data file When an error is detected the error code is written to the Error Code Byte and the Error Bit ER is set See ASCII Instruction Error Codes on page 20 30 for a list of the error codes and recommended action to take NOTE Instruction Type output Table 20 9 Execution Time for the AWT Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 268 us 12us character
37. Codes ASCII Instructions control data file The following error codes indicate why the Error bit ER is set in the Error Code Description Recommended Action decimal hexadecimal 0 0x00 No error The instruction completed successfully None Required 3 0x03 The transmission cannot be completed because the Check the modem and modem connections CTS signal was lost 5 0x05 While attempting to perform an ASCII transmission a Reconfigure the channel and retry operation conflict with the configured communications protocol was detected 7 0x07 The instruction cannot be executed because the Reconfigure the channel and retry operation communications channel has been shut down via the channel configuration menu 8 0x08 The instruction cannot be executed because another Resend the transmission ASCII transmission is already in progress 9 0x09 Type of ASCII communications operation requested is Reconfigure the channel and retry operation not supported by the current channel configuration 10 Ox0A The unload bit UL is set stopping instruction None required execution 11 0x0B The requested number of characters for the ASCII Enter a valid string length and retry operation read was too large or negative 12 0x0C The length of the Source string is invalid either a Enter a valid string length and retry operation negative number or a number greater than 82 13 0x0D The requested length in
38. DF1 Half Duplex 1 18 1 12 1 08 1 08 1 07 1 07 1 06 1 06 1 01 DH 485 N A 1 14 1 10 N A N A N A N A N A 1 06 at 19 2K 1 09 at 9 6K Modbus 171 T 12 T09 T08 T 08 T 08 T 08 T 08 T 00 ASCA T 52 133 124 120 T 19 T 18 T 18 T 17 T 00 Shut Down 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 Inactive is defined as No Messaging and No Data Monitoring For DH 485 protocol inactive means that the controller is not conne cted to a network 2 Applies to MicroLogix 1500 Series B Processors only Appendix C System Status File The status file lets you monitor how your controller works and lets you direct how you want it to work This is done by using the status file to set up control bits and monitor both hardware and programming device faults and other status information IMPORTANT Do not write to reserved words in the status file If you intend writing to status file data it is imperative that you first understand the function fully Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 2 System Status File Status File Overview Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The status file S contains the following words Address Function Page 8 0 Arithmetic Flags C 3 1 Controller Mode C 4 2 STI Mode C 9 2 9 Memory Module Program Compare C 9 2 15 Math Overflow Selection C 10 S 3H Watchdog Scan Time C 10 4 Free Running Clock C 10 5 Mino
39. Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 4 0 Configuration MicroLogix 1200 Expansion l 0 Memory Mapping Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Discrete I O Configuration 1762 IA8 and 1762 08 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to input terminals 0 through 7 Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 1709 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O0 X X X X OX X X X jr rt pr jr jr jr rr jr c Word r read only x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 1016 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to input terminals 0 through 15 Bit Position 15 14 113 12 J1 ho 9 8 7 le 5 4 B 2 1 Jo 0 f r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r read only 1762 0A8 1762 0B8 and 1762 OW8 Output Image For each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to output terminals 0 through 7 Bit Position 15 14 13 172 11 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r w r w Ir w Ir w r w r w r w ir w Word r w read and write 0 always at a 0 or OFF state 1762 0B16 and 1762 OW16 Output Image Fo
40. latching inputs and input interrupts Input filtering is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software To configure the filters using RSLogix 500 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration folder 3 Open slot 0 controller 4 Select the embedded I O configuration tab Latching Inputs 1 0 Configuration 1 15 The input groups are pre arranged Simply select the filter time you require for each input group You can apply a unique input filter setting to each of the input groups Controller MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 Input Groups e D and 1 e Oand1 e 2 and 3 e 2 and3 e 4and above e 4 and5 e 6and7 e 8 and above The minimum and maximum response times associated with each input filter setting can be found in your controller s User Manual The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers provide the ability to individually configure inputs to be latching inputs sometimes referred to as pulse catching inputs A latching input is an input that captures a very fast pulse and holds it for a single controller scan The pulse width that can be captured is dependent upon the input filtering selected for that input The following inputs can be configured as latching inputs Controller MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 DC Inputs 0 through 3 0 through 7 You enable this feature with RSLogix 500 programming software With an open project 1 Open the Controller folder Open th
41. m c zou i Help Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 4 Process Control Instruction Input Parameters The table below shows the input parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Input Parameter Descriptions Address Data Format Range Type User For More Program Information Access B SPS Setpoint PD10 0 SPS word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 19 4 PV Process Variable user defined word INT 0 to 16383 control read write 19 4 MAXS Setpoint Maximum PD10 0 MAXS word INT 32 768 to 432 767 control read write 19 5 MINS Setpoint Minimum PD10 0 MINS word INT 32 768 to 432 767 control read write 19 5 OSP Old Setpoint Value PD10 0 0SP word INT 32 768 to 432 767 status read only 19 5 OL Output Limit PD10 0 0L binary 1 enabled control read write 19 6 0 disabled CVH Control Variable High PD10 0 CVH word INT 0 to 10096 control read write 19 6 Limit CVL Control Variable Low Limit PD10 0 CVL word INT 0 to 10096 control read write 19 6 1 The range listed in the table is for when scaling is not enabled With scaling the range is from minimum scaled MINS to maximum scaled MAXS Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Setpoint SPS Input Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SPS Setpoint PD10 O SPS word I
42. 14 1 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 237 us 10 6 us character 12 8 us For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 20 28 Use the AWT instruction to write characters from a source string to an external device Programming AWT Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCIT instruction with conditional logic that either detects when new data needs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 12 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P ASCII Instructions to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater Tita Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode This instruction executes on a true rung Once started if the rung goes false the instruction continues to completion If you want to repeat this instruction the rung must transition from false to true When using this instruction you can also perform in line indirection See page 20 29 for more information Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 Source is
43. 2 5 4 T4 ACC 2 6 4 L8 5 2 B 1 2 20 4 T 1 ACC 2 204 L5 20 4 B 2 21 0 TE LACC 2 121 6 LH 20 1 B3 1 5 9 T41 5 9 T4 49 B3 1 6 5 T4 y 7 1 T 1 19 7 B 1 1 21 6 TAA 21 8 TIT 19 8 BH VES 22 3 THA 22 4 T4 ACC 5 1 L8 2 5 5 T41 ACC 16 0 T 1 ACC 19 9 L 1 2 20 4 T4 ACC 7 5 TF ACC 1205 L E 2 21 0 T 1 ACC 121 8 0 1 2 5 4 8 1 5 9 T ACC 22 9 01 0 2 12 8 L8 6 5 Execution Time Example Word Level Instruction Using an Indirect Address ADD Instruction Addressing ADD Instruction Times ADD Instruction 2 5 us Source A N7 Source A 4 8 us Source B T4 ACC Source B 5 1 us Destination N Destination 20 1 us Total 32 5 us Execution Time Example Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address XIC B3 e XIC 0 9 us 4 8 us 5 7 us True case e XIC 0 0 us 4 8 us 4 8 us False case Publication 1762 RMO001C EN P B 6 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1500 Scan Time Worksheet below Calculate the scan time for your control program using the worksheet Input Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 0 is used 53 us Expansion Input Words X 3 us or X 7 5 us if Forcing is used Number of modules with Input words X 10 us Input Scan Sub Total Program Scan Add execution times of all instruct
44. 7 each data file you want protected check the Type N Memory Module Download item within the Name INTEGER protection box in the Data File Properties Desc Elements e Attributes gt Debug Skip when Deleting Ufised Memory screen as shown in this illustration To access this screen right mouse click on the desired data file 2 label Tore usb Be Ad e Hone Cancel Apply Help User Program Transfer Requirements Data File Download Protection only operates when the following conditions are met during a User Program or Memory Module download to the controller The controller contains protected data files The program being downloaded has the same number of protected data files as the program currently in the controller All protected data file numbers types and sizes number of elements currently in the controller exactly match that of the program being downloaded to the controller If all of these conditions are met the controller will not write over any data file in the controller that is configured as Download Protected If any of these conditions are not met the entire User Program is transferred to the controller Additionally if the program in the controller contains protected files the Data Protection Lost indicator S 36 10 is set to indicate that protected data has been lost For example a control program with protected files is transferred to the controller The original p
45. FILE SPACE outside of the entire data file space point outside data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0033 BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL The length position parameter of a Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the LFU CROSSED DATA BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL or LFU length and position parameters do not FILE SPACE instruction references outside of the point outside of the data space entire data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0034 NEGATIVE VALUE IN A negative value was loaded toa Recoverable e f the program is moving values to the TIMER PRESET OR timer preset or accumulator accumulated or preset word of a timer ACCUMULATOR make certain these values are not negative e Reload the program and enter the Run mode 0035 ILLEGAL The program contains a Temporary Non Recoverable e Correct the program INSTRUCTION IN End TND Refresh REF or Service e Re compile reload the program and enter INTERRUPT FILE Communication instruction in an the Run mode interrupt subroutine STI Ell HSC or user fault routine 0036 INVALID PID An invalid value is being used fora Recoverable See page 19 1 Process Control Instruction for PARAMETER PID instruction parameter more information about the PID instruction 0037 HSC ERROR An error occurred in the HSC Recoverable See the Error Code in the HSC Function File configuration for the specific error 003B PTO ERROR
46. MSS bits the network communication requests from other nodes and whether previous message instructions are already in progress If the controller determines that it should not access the queue the message instruction remains as it was Either the EN and EW bits remain set 1 or only the EN bit is set 1 until the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction If the controller determines that it has an instruction in the queue it unloads the communications queue entries into the message buffers until all four message buffers are full If an invalid message is unloaded from the communications queue the ER bit in the MG file is set D and a code is placed in the MG file to inform you of an error When a valid message instruction is loaded into a message buffer the EN and EW bits for this message are set 1 The controller then exits the end of scan REF or SVC portion of the scan The controller s background communication function sends the messages to the target nodes specified in the message instruction Depending on the state of the CSS and MSS bits you can service up to four active message instructions per channel at any given time If the target node successfully receives the message it sends back an acknowledge ACK The ACK causes the processor to clear 0 the EW bit and set 1 the ST bit The target node has not yet examined the packet to see if it understands your request Once the ST bit is set 1 the controller waits for
47. N Long Word L String ST 12 Real Time Clock RTC 13 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only 2 485CIF write ST to 485CIF only 3 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Size in Elements This variable defines the amount of data in elements to exchange with the target device The maximum amount of data that can be transferred via a MSG instruction is 103 words 206 bytes and is determined by the destination data type The destination data type is defined by the type of message read or write For Read Messages When a read message is used the destination file is the data file in the local or originating processor NOTE Input output string and RTC file types are not valid for read messages For Write Messages When a write message is used the destination file is the data file in the target processor The maximum number of elements that can be transmitted or received are shown in the following table You cannot cross file types when sending messages For example you cannot read a timer into an integer file and you cannot write counters to a timer file The only exceptions to this rule are that long integer data can be read from or written to bit or integer files and RTC files can be written to integer files MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 12 Communications Instructio
48. PTO Enable Hard Stop EH Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access EH Enable Hard Stop PTO 0 EH bit Oor 1 control read write The PTO EH Enable Hard Stop bit is used to stop the PTO sub system immediately Once the PTO sub system starts a pulse sequence the only way to stop generating pulses is to set the enable hard stop bit The enable hard stop aborts any PTO sub system operation idle normal jog continuous or jog pulse and generates a PTO sub system error The EH bit operates as follows e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to stop generating pulses immediately output off 0 Cleared 0 Normal operation PTO Enable Status EN Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access EN Enable Status follows rung state PTO 0 EN bit Oor 1 status read only The PTO EN Enable Status is controlled by the PTO sub system When the rung preceding the PTO instruction is solved true the PTO instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set If the rung preceding the PTO instruction transitions to a false state before the pulse sequence completes its operation the enable status bit resets 0 The EN bit operates as follows e Set 1 PTO is enabled Cleared 0 PTO has completed or the rung preceding the PTO is false PTO Output Frequency OF
49. Programming Instructions Memory usage and Execution Time Appendix B MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1500 programming instructions The list shows the memory usage and instruction execution time for each instruction Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided The tables below lists the execution times and memory usage for the programming instructions These values depend on whether you are using word or long word as the data format Table B 1 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII Test Buffer for Line ABL 11 4 94 7 6 char 3 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply ASCII Number of Characters in ACB 11 0 842 3 3 Buffer ASCII String to Integer ACI 0 0 14 2 6 3 11 5 0 0 20 3 9 5 char 1 5 char ASCII Clear Buffer ACL 0 0 clear 1 2 Long Word addressing level does not apply both 203 9 receive 24 7 transmit 29 1 ASCII String Concatenate ACN 0 0 He 102 2 0 char Add ADD 0 0 2 5 3 3 0 0 10 4 3 5 ASCII String Extract AEX 0 0 12 4 26 25 Long Word addressing level does not apply
50. S fe eo la 2 a E lo S la E lS S eo S S ia Source A ejejojeoejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo eje Source B ejejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj jo eje Destination ej e e e eje e e e ej ej e ele ele ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files The terms used within the table are defined as follows Parameter The parameter is the information you supply to the instruction It can be an address a value or an instruction specific parameter such as a timebase Data Files See Data Files on page 2 5 e Function Files See Function Files on page 3 1 e CS See Communications Status File on page 3 13 OS See Input Output Status File on page 3 18 DLS See Data Log Status File on pag e22 9 Address Mode See Addressing Modes on page 4 3 Addressing Level Address levels describe the granularity at which an instruction allows an operand to be used For example relay type instructions CXIC XIO etc must be programmed to the bit level timer instructions TON TOF etc must be programmed to the element level timers have 3 words per element and math instructions ADD SUB etc must be programmed to the word or long word level Programming Instructions Overview
51. SUB MUL DIV NEG and SCP 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status Bits Math Instructions 10 3 After a math instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 in the processor status file S2 Table 10 2 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry sets if carry is generated otherwise resets 0 1 Overflow sets when the result of a math instruction does not fit into the destination otherwise resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets S 2 14 Math Overflow examines the state of this bit to determine the value of the Selected result when an overflow occurs 5 0 Overflow Trap sets if the Overflow Bit is set otherwise resets 1 Control bits Overflow Trap Bit S 5 0 Minor error bit S 5 0 is set upon detection of a mathematical overflow or division by zero If this bit is set upon execution of an END statement or a Temporary End TND instruction the recoverable major error code 0020 is declared In applications where a math overflow or divide by zero occurs you can avoid a controller fault by using an unlatch OTU instruction
52. Source N7 0 d m Controller Data Size When Rung Is en z True False MicroLogix 1200 word 14 0 6 us word 0 0 us long word 15 1 2 us long word 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 12 1 0 43 us word 0 0 us long word 12 3 0 8 us long word 0 0 us The FLL instruction loads elements of a file with either a constant or an address data value for a given length The following figure shows how file instruction data is manipulated The instruction fills the words of a file with a source value It uses no status bits If you need an enable bit program a parallel output that uses a storage address Destination Source Word to File This instruction uses the following operands e Source The source operand is the address of the value or constant used to fill the destination The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word NOTE A constant cannot be used as the source in a timer T counter C or control R file Destination The starting destination address where the data is written Length The length operand contains the number of elements The length can range from 1 to 128 word 1 to 64 long word or 1 to 42 3 word element such as counter NOTE The source and destination operands must be of the same file type unless they are bit B and integer N Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 14 4 File Instructions BSL Bit S
53. Timer and Counter The timer and counter instructions control operations based on time or the number of events 8 1 TON TOF RTO CTU CTD RES Compare The compare instructions compare values by using a specific compare operation 9 1 EQU NEO LES LEO GRT GEO MEQ LIM Math The math instructions perform arithmetic operations 10 1 ADD SUB MUL DIV NEG CLR SOR SCL SCP SWP Conversion The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform conversions between binary 1 1 and decimal values DCD ENC TOD FRD Logical The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on words 12 1 AND OR XOR NOT Move The move instructions modify and move words 13 1 MOV MVM File The file instructions perform operations on file data 14 1 COP FLL BSL BSR FFL FFU LFL LFU Sequencer Sequencer instructions are used to control automatic assembly machines that have consistent and 15 1 repeatable operations SOC SQO SOL Program Control The program flow instructions change the flow of ladder program execution 16 1 JMP LBL JSR SBR RET SUS TND MCR END Input and Output The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and 17 1 output scans IIM IOM REF User Interrupt The user interrupt instructions allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events 18 1 STS INT UID UIE UIF Process Control The process control instruction provides closed loop cont
54. and power is not applied to the expansion I O bank This is a self clearing error code When power is re applied to the expansion I O bank the fault is cleared See Important note below If this fault occurs while the system is in the RUN mode the controller faults When expansion l O power is restored the controller clears the fault and re enters the RUN mode If you change the mode switch while this fault is present the controller may not re enter the RUN mode when expansion I O power is restored If an EPF condition is present and expansion I O power is OK toggle the mode switch to PROGRAM and then to RUN The fault should clear and the controller enters the RUN mode B 002 WATCHDOG TIMER The program scan time exceeded the Non Recoverable e Determine if the program is caught in a EXPIRED SEE S 3 watchdog timeout value S 3H loop and correct the problem e Increase the watchdog timeout value in the status file i 0023 STI ERROR An error occurred in the STI Recoverable See the Error Code in the STI Function File for configuration the specific error Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Fault Messages and Error Codes D 5 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0028 INVALID OR e A fault routine number was Non User e Either clear the fault routine file number NONEXISTENT USER entered in the status file number S 29 in the
55. causes of a module error 0080 EXPANSION 1 0 The required expansion 0 Non User e Check expansion I O terminator on last 1 0 TERMINATOR terminator was removed module REMOVED e Cycle power MicroLogix 1500 only xxg1 EXPANSION 1 0 The controller cannot communicate Non User e Check connections HARDWARE ERROR with an expansion 1 0 module e Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used e Replace the module e Cycle power Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Fault Messages and Error Codes D 7 Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0083 MAX 1 0 CABLES The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion I O system so EXCEEDED 1 0 cables allowed was exceeded that it has an allowable number of cables e Cycle power 0084 MAX I 0 POWER The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion I O system so SUPPLIES EXCEEDED 1 0 power supplies allowed was that it has the correct number of power exceeded supplies 0085 MAX I O MODULES The maximum number of expansion Non User e Reconfigure the expansion I O system so EXCEEDED 1 0 modules allowed was exceeded that it has an allowable number of modules e Cycle power xxgg EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module could not Non User e Change the baud rate in the user program MODULE BAUD RATE communicate at the baud rate 1 0 configuration and ERROR spe
56. correct the problem by updating your PID loop at a slower rate or move the PID instruction to an STI interrupt routine Reset and rate gains will be in error if the instruction operates with this bit set Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 14 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Derivative Action Bit DA Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DA Derivative Action Bit PD10 0 DA binary bit Oor 1 control read write When set 1 the derivative rate action DA bit causes the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated on the error instead of the process variable PV When clear 0 this bit allows the derivative rate calculation to be evaluated where the derivative is performed on the PV CV Upper Limit Alarm UL Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit 0or 1 status read write The control variable upper limit alarm bit is set when the calculated CV output exceeds the upper CV limit CV Lower Limit Alarm LL Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access LL CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit Oor1 status read write The control variable lower limit alarm bit is set 1 when the calculated CV output is less th
57. e 500CPU message type e 485CIF message type e PLC5 message type A summary of the message instruction configuration parameters is shown below Description e 500CPU Read e 500CPU Write e 485CIF Read e 485CIF Write e PLC5 Read e PLC5 Write Specifies the type of message Valid types are Data Table Address For a Read this is the starting address which receives data Valid file types are B T C R N and L For a Write this is the starting address which is sent to the target device Valid file types are O I B T C R N L ST ang ATOM Size in elements Defines the length of the message in elements e 1 word elements valid size 1 to 103 e 2 word elements valid size 1 to 51 e 8 word elements valid size 1 e 42 word elements valid size 1 to 2 e Timer 500CPU and 485CIF Counter and Control elements valid size 1 to 34 e PLC 5 Timer elements valid size 1 to 20 Channel Identifies the communication channel Always Channel 0 or Channel 1 for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Target Device Message Timeout Defines the amount of time the controller waits for the reply before the message errors A timeout of 0 seconds means that the controller waits indefinitely for a reply Valid range is from 0 to 255 seconds Data Table Address Fora Read this is the address in the processor which is to return data 500CPU and PLC5 Valid file types are S B T C R N
58. it no longer reflects the state of the physical input or the input LED For embedded inputs the controller reacts as if the force is applied to the physical input terminal NOTE When an input is forced it has no effect on the input device connected to the controller Output Forcing When an output is forced the controller overrides the status of the control program and sets the output to the user defined state Discrete outputs can be forced on or off The value in the output file is unaffected by the force It maintains the state determined by the logic in the control program However the state of the physical output and the output LED will be set to the forced state NOTE If you force an output controlled by an executing PTO or PWM function an instruction error is generated The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers allow users to configure groups of DC inputs for high speed or normal operation Users can configure each input group s response time A configurable filter determines how long the input signal must be on or off before the controller recognizes the signal The higher the value the longer it takes for the input state to be recognized by the controller Higher values provide more filtering and are used in electrically noisy environments Lower values provide less filtering and are used to detect fast or narrow pulses You typically set the filters to a lower value when using high speed counters
59. length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word The position is incremented after each load Position This is the current location pointed to in the FIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 Gword or 0 to 63 long word Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 14 10 File Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 14 11 FFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files NEST e Parameter 2 T ec amp 8 S 5 9 5 5 E olla lll geg Eee EEE Eeg Slee ls sis Source eje elele e e e e e e FIFO ele e e e ele ele Control 2 e e Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers or Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload FFU FIFO Unload 1 C EU 5 FIFO N7 0 Dest N71 CDN 5 Control R6 0 Length 1 EM
60. put in the POS field of the control data file The number in the POS field is continuously updated and the Done bit DN is not set until all of the characters are read NOTE For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 20 28 ARL ASCII Read Line Instruction Type output ARL oa ia Line CEN gt Table 20 25 Execution Time for the ARL Instruction anne Dest S105 CDN2 Controller When Instruction Is Control R6 4 String Length 15 CER gt True False HE is T MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 139 7 us 50 1 us character 11 7 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 114 us 44 3 us character 10 6 us Use the ARL instruction to read characters from the buffer up to and including the Termination characters and store them in a string The Termination characters are specified via the Channel Configuration screen Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 Destination is the string element where you want the string stored Control is the control data file See page 20 6 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to read from the buffer The maximum is 82 characters If you specify a length larger than 82 only the first 82 characters are read and mov
61. the termination characters and puts this value in the POS field of the control data file The Done bit DN is then set If a zero appears in the POS field no termination characters were found The Found bit FD is set if the POS field is set to a non zero value Instruction Type output Table 20 13 Execution Time for the ACB Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 103 1 12 1 MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 84 2 us 11 0 us Use the ACB instruction to determine the number of characters in the buffer On a false to true transition the controller determines the total number of characters and records it in the POS field of the control data file The channel configuration must be set to ASCII Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel 0 or Channel 1 Control is the control data file See page 20 6 Characters are the number of characters in the buffer that the controller finds 0 to 1024 This parameter is read only Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 20 30 for error descriptions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 16 ASCII Instructions ACI String to Integer ACI String to Integer L Source ST10
62. 0 Dest N7 0 0 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 14 ACB Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files Address Address atu Fas Mode Level N E je z Parameter 2 E e s z E a a zl o E 9 TE e ce ej i uzmie coe iElLIo z s len fen le le S I 2E l5 Ela EIS 21S S Els Ela S S ia Channel Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit EN is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The Done bit DN is set on completion of the instruction The controller determines the number of characters in the buffer and puts this value in the POS field of the control data file The Done bit DN is then set If a zero appears in the POS field no characters were found The Found bit FD is set when the POS filed is set to a non zero value Instruction Type output Table 20 15 Execution Time for the ACI Instruction Controller Data Size When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series
63. 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Not Used Not Used Example 1 T off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 Example 2 T on on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to Blank cells don t care ie rising edge lU fa Table 5 7 HSC Mode 3 Examples the MicroLogix 1 500 ling edge NOTE used Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being HSC Mode 3 Counter with External Direction Reset and Hold Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 off on U off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 0 1 0 0 Example 2 on on U off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 1 0 0 Example3 on U Toff on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on U loff off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on off on U Toff Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 lI Clear accumulator 0 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care fe rising edge lU fa Publication 1762 RM001C EN P ling edge NOTE used Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0
64. 0 29 3 5 2 1 4 0 0 82 0 1 6 char And AND 0 0 2 2 2 8 0 0 9 2 3 0 ASCII Read Characters ARD 11 8 132 3 49 7 4 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply char ASCII Read Line ARL 11 7 1397 50 1 14 3 char Publication 1762 RM001C EN P A 2 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Table A 1 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII String Search ASC 0 0 16 2 4 0 6 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply matching char ASCII String Compare ASR 0 0 92 4 0 1 8 matching char ASCII Write with Append AWA 14 1 268 12 char 3 4 ASCII Write AWT 14 1 268 12 char 3 4 Bit Shift Left BSL 1 3 32 1 3 word 3 8 Bit Shift Right BSR 1 3 32 1 3 word 3 8 Clear CLR 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 6 3 1 0 File Copy CoP 0 0 19 0 8 word 2 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Count Down CTD 9 0 9 0 24 Count Up CTU 9 2 9 0 24 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 0 0 1 9 1 9 Divide DIV 0 0 12 2 2 0 0 0 42 8 3 5 Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 0 0 72 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Equal EQU 1 1 1 3 1 3 1 9 2 8 2 6 FIFO Load
65. 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being Using the High Speed Counter 5 19 HSC Mode 4 Two Input Counter up and down Table 5 8 HSC Mode 4 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Up Count Down Not Used Not Used Example 1 I on U off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example 2 on U loff fl on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care f rising edge U fa ling edge NOTE Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used HSC Mode 5 Two Input Counter up and down with External Reset and Hold Table 5 9 HSC Mode 5 Examples Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Direction Reset Hold Example 1 f on U off on IU off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Example 2 on IU loff t on IU off off on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 1 0 0 Exa
66. 1 12 See also LA Load Always on page 3 8 Power Up Mode Behavior Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 81 12 binary 0 or 1 control read only If Power Up Mode Behavior is clear 0 Last State the mode at power up is dependent upon the position of the mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 mode at the previous power down If Power Up Mode Behavior is set 1 Run the mode at power up is dependent upon the position of the mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only state of the Major Error Halted flag S 1 13 IMPORTANT If you want the controller to power up and enter the Run mode regardless of any previous fault conditions you must also set the Fault Override bit S 1 8 so that the Major Error Halted flag is cleared before determining the power up mode System Status File C 7 The following table shows the Power Up Mode under various conditions MicroLogix 1200 Major Error Power Up Mode at Last Power Down Power Up Mode Halted Mode Behavior Remote False Last State REM Download Download REM Program REM Program Program or Any Test mode REM Suspend or Suspend REM Suspend REM Run or Run REM Run Run Don t Care REM Run True Don t Care Don t Care REM Program w Fault MicroLogix 1500 Major Error Power Up Mode at Last Power Down Power Up Mode Mode Switch Position Halted Mode Behav
67. 1 of 16 1 2 RET Return from Subroutine 16 3 DIV Divide 10 5 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay 8 6 DLG Data Log Instruction 22 8 SBR Subroutine Label 16 3 ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 1 3 SCL Scale 10 7 END Program End 16 5 SCP Scale with Parameters 10 8 EQU Equal 9 3 SQC Sequencer Compare 15 2 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load 14 8 SQL Sequencer Load 5 8 FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload 14 11 SQ0 Sequencer Output 15 5 FLL Fill File 14 3 SOR Square Root 10 9 FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD 1 4 STS Selectable Timed Start 18 8 GEO Greater Than or Equal To 9 5 SUB Subtract 10 4 GRT Greater Than 9 4 SUS Suspend 6 4 HSL High Speed Counter Load 5 26 SWP Swap 0 10 IIM Immediate Input with Mask 17 1 TND Temporary End 6 4 INT Interrupt Subroutine 18 7 TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD 1 8 IOM Immediate Output with Mask 17 3 TOF Timer Off Delay 8 5 JMP Jump to Label 16 1 TON Timer On Delay 8 4 JSR Jump to Subroutine 16 2 UID User Interrupt Disable 18 9 LBL Label 16 2 UIE User Interrupt Enable 18 10 LEQ Less Than or Equal To 9 5 UIF User Interrupt Flush 18 11 LES Less Than 9 4 XIC Examine if Closed 7 1 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load 14 14 XIO Examine if Open 7 1 LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload 14 17 XOR Exclusive OR 12 5 LIM Limit Test 9 7 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Reach us now at www rockwellautomation com Wher
68. 1200 MUL word 6 8 us 0 0 us long word 31 9 us 0 0 us DIV word 12 2 us 0 0 us EN Ed lots long word 428 us 0 0 us Source A ene MicroLogix 1500 MUL word 5 8 us 0 0 us Source B N7 1 long word 27 6 us 0 1 us Poe Tn DIV word 103 us 0 0 us 0 lt long word 36 7 us 0 0 us Use the MUL instruction to multiply one value by another value Source A x Source B and place the result in the Destination Use the DIV instruction to divide one value by another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination If the Sources are single words and the Destination is directly addressed to S 13 math register then the quotient is stored in S 14 and the remainder is stored in S 13 If long words are used then the results are rounded Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 10 6 Math Instructions NEG Negate Instruction Type output NEG Negate Table 10 5 Execution Time for the NEG Instruction Source N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 1 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 2 9 us 0 0 us long word 12 1 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 9 us 0 0 us long word 10 4 us 0 0 us Use the NEG instruction to change the sign of the Source and place the result in the Destination CLR Clear Instruction Type output d di ms Table 10 6 Execution Time for the CLR Instruction 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix
69. 1200 word 1 3 us 0 0 us long word 6 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 2 us 0 0 us long word 5 5 us 0 0 us Use the CLR instruction to set the Destination to a value of zero Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Math Instructions 10 7 SCL Scale Instruction Type output SCL Scale Table 10 7 Execution Time for the SCL Instruction Source N7 0 0 lt Controller When Rung Is Rate 10000 N7 1 0 lt True False JE um MicroLogix 1200 105 us 0 0 us Dest us MicroLogix 1500 8 7 us 0 0 us The SCL instruction causes the value at the Source address to be multiplied by the Rate slope value The resulting value is added to the Offset and the rounded result is placed in the Destination The following equations express the linear relationship between the input value and the resulting scaled value scaled value rate x source 10000 offset where rate scaled max scaled min input max input min offset scaled min input min x rate Rate and Offset can both be immediate values The data range for rate and offset is 32768 to 32767 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 10 8 SCL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 MK Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level N E g iz Par
70. 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers The chapter is organizedas follows Controller Memory on page 2 2 Data Files on page 2 5 Protecting Data Files During Download on page 2 6 Static File Protection on page 2 8 e Password Protection on page 2 9 Clearing the Controller Memory on page 2 10 Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 2 10 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 2 2 Controller Memory and File Types Controller Memory File Structure MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 user memory is comprised of Data Files Function Files and Program Files and B Ram files for the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor Function Files are exclusive to the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers they are not available in the MicroLogix 1000 or SLC controllers NOTE The file types shown below for data files 3 through 7 are the default filetypes for those file numbers and cannot be changed Data files 9 through 255 can be added to your program to operate as bit timer counter control integer string long word message or PID files E eae Ele 3 s 3 a HE 5 B gu 7 ES 3 to 255 T s Bit o Timer Counter Control Integer String Long Word Data MG Message Files PD PID HSC Function Files LEO 2 3 PWM 9
71. 1500 only on page 3 9 Base Hardware Information Function File on page 3 12 Communications Status File on page 3 13 Input Output Status File on page 3 18 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 3 2 Function Files Overview Table 3 1 Function Files Function Files are one of the three primary file structures within the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers Program Files and Data Files are the others Function Files provide an efficient and logical interface to controller resources Controller resources are resident permanent features such as the Real Time Clock and High Speed Counter The features are available to the control program through either instructions that are dedicated to a specific function file or via standard instructions such as MOV and ADD The Function File types are File Name File File Description Identifier High Speed Counter HSC This file type is associated with the High Speed Counter function See Using the High Speed Counter on page 5 1 for more information Pulse Train Output PTO This file type is associated with the Pulse Train Output Instruction See Pulse Train Outputs MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 PTO Function File on page 6 6 for more information BXB units only Pulse Width Modulation PWM This file type is associated with the Pulse Width Modulation instruction See Pulse Width MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Modulation PWM Function File on page 6 19 for more informati
72. 1764 LRP Processor only 22 13 Table 22 8 Reply Structure Controller Responds with Reply D pr Nos DAR E85 Field Function Description SRC Source Node DST Destination Node CMD Command Code SIS Status Code TNS Transaction Number Always 2 bytes DATA Formatted string Conditions that Will Erase the Data Retrieval File If the data integrity check fails the record is deleted and an error is sent with STS of OxFO and ext STS of OxOE For more information on writing a DF1 protocol refer to Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual available from www theautomationbookstore com MPORTANT The data in the retrieval file can only be read once Then it is erased from the processor The following conditions will cause previously logged data to be lost Program download from RSLogix 500 to controller Memory Module transfer to controller except for Memory Module autoload of tbe same program Full Queue when a queue is full new records are recorded over the existing records starting at the beginning of the file You can put the following rung in your ladder program to prevent this from happening B3 1 LEQ DLG E Less Than or Eq A lt B Data Log 1 Source A DLSO 5 RST queue number 5 Soure B DLSO 5 FSZ Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 22 14 Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Publication
73. 2 Timer File Word Bit 15 14 173 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 453211 0 Word O JEN TT JDN Internal Use Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulated Value EN Timer Enable Bit TT Timer Timing Bit DN Timer Done Bit ATTENTION Do not copy timer elements while the timer enable bit EN is set Unpredictable machine operation may occur Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 8 3 Timer Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files Address Address ata Files Mode Level N E e T Parameter 4 E ob M HM ec a i a o E S 5 o gle l le le l z E l lz la ViElS six S s s co len fen fis bs S fe SE IG IB le Sls ES 9 B la Ela Sia Timer Time Base Preset Accumulator 1 Valid for Timer Files only NOTE Use an RES instruction to reset a timer s accumulator and status bits Timer and Counter Instructions 8 3 Timer Accuracy Timer accuracy refers to the length of time between the moment a timer instruction is enabled and the moment the timed interval is complete Table 8 4 Timer Accuracy Time Base Accuracy 0 001 seconds 0 001 to 0 00 0 01 seconds 0 01 to 0 00 1 00 se
74. 20 6 ASCII Instructions The ASCII instructions are arranged so that the Write instructions precede the Read instructions Instruction Function Valid Controller s Page ACL ASCII Clear Buffer Clear the receive and or transmit buffers e MicroLogix 1200 20 7 AIC Integer to String Convert an integer value to a string e MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 20 8 AWA ASCII Write with Write a string with user configured characters 20 9 Append appended AWT ASCII Write Write a string 20 11 ABL Test Buffer for Line Determine the number of characters in the buffer up e MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 20 14 to and including the end of line character e MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later ACB Number of Characters Determine the total number of characters in the 20 15 in Buffer buffer ACI String to Integer Convert a string to an integer value 20 16 ACN String Concatenate Link two strings into one 20 18 AEX String Extract Extract a portion of a string to create a new string 20 19 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines Set or reset modem handshake lines 20 20 ARD ASCII Read Characters Read characters from the input buffer and place them 20 22 into a string ARL ASCII Read Line Read one line of characters from the input buffer and 20 23 place them into a string ASC String Search Search a string 20 25 ASR ASCII String Compare Compare two string
75. 3 4 Watch the PV When the PV starts to change stop your stopwatch Type 60 in CO96 and immediately start your stopwatch Record this value It is the deadtime Multiply the deadtime by 4 This value approximates the natural period For example if deadtime 3 seconds then 4 x 3 12 seconds x natural period Divide the value obtained in step 5 by 10 Use this value as the loop updated time For example if natural period 12 seconds then 12 10 1 2 seconds Therefore the value 120 would be entered as the loop update time 120 x 10 ms 1 2 seconds Enter the following values the initial setpoint SP value a reset T of 0 a rate Ty of 0 a gain K of 1 and the loop update time determined in step 17 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm MaxS MinS scaling feed forward Return to page 19 23 and complete the tuning procedure starting with step 4 Chapter 20 ASCII Instructions This chapter contains general information about the ASCII instructions and explains how they function in your control program This chapter is arranged into the following sections General Information Instruction Types and Operation on page 20 2 Protocol Overview on page 20 4 e String ST Data File on page 20 5 Control Data File on page
76. 30532 Modbus Communication Parameters Communication Status File 31501 to 31566 Read Only System Status File space Status S 2 words 0 to 65 40001 to 40256 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 41501 to 41566 Read Write System Status File space Status S 2 words 0 to 65 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P E 10 Protocol Configuration Table E 5 Modbus to MicroLogix Memory Map Detail MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Modbus Addressing Modbus Address Reference Modbus Function Code decimal 01 to 4096 Read Write Modbus Coil Data space 1 5 15 01 to 14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space 2 to 30256 Read Modbus Input Register space Modbus Data Table Coil File Number Modbus Data Table Contact File Number Modbus Data Table Input Register File Number Modbus Data Table Holding Register File Number Pre Send Delay Modbus Slave Address nter character Timeout RTS Send Delay RTS Off Delay Parity Presentation Layer Error Code Presentation Layer Error Code Presentation Layer Error Count Executed Function Code Error Last Transmitted Exception Code File Number of Error Request Element Number of Error Request Function Code 1 Message Counter Read Single Output Coil 001 001 501 502 503 504 506 507 50
77. 483 647 long word Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 12 2 Logical Instructions Updates to Math Status Bits Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 12 1 Logical Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files LENEI ure unction Files S Mode Level a 3 Parameter E 8 2 E B L E 85 88 ES c alo lllo l l l E leli la aE l5 l ll e e e le B S IS ES I le E 5 EIS 9 alla e a l Slo Source A elelelelele ejeoejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo eje Source p e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e Destination e e e le jele elele elele e ele e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing 4 Source B does not apply to the NOT instruction The NOT instruction only has one source value IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files After a logical instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits
78. 5 Position 0 lt Instruction Type output Table 14 12 Execution Time for the FFU Instruction File Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 33 us 0 8 us word 10 4 us long word 36 us 1 5 us long word 10 4 us MicroLogix 1500 word 27 7 us 0 65 us word 97 us long word 29 4 us 125 us long word 9 7 us 14 11 On a false to true rung transition the FFU instruction unloads words or long words from a user created file called a FIFO stack The data is unloaded using first in first out order After the unload completes the data in the stack is shifted one element toward the top of the stack and the last element is zeroed out Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFL FIFO LOAD Source FIFO Control Length Position FFU FIFO UNLOAD FIFO Dest Control Length Position EN N7 10 DN N7 12 R6 0 EM 34 9 EU N7 12 DN N7 11 EM R6 0 34 9 FFL and FFU Instruction Pair Destination Position N71 N72 0 N7 13 1 FFU instruction N7 14 2 unloads data from 3 stack N7 12 at 4 position 0 N12 5 34 words are allocated 6 for FIFO stack starting 7 at N7 12 ending at N7 45 Source 8 N7 10 Ly g FFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N7 45 33 availab
79. 5 second or greater Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may IMPORTANT an not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode This instruction will execute on either a false or true rung However if you want to repeat this instruction the rung must go from false to true Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 10 ASCII Instructions Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P When using this instruction you can also perform in line indirection See page 20 29 for more information Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 Source is the string element you want to write Control is the control data file See page 20 6 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to write from the source string 0 to 82 If you enter a 0 the entire string is written This is word 1 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is the number of characters that the controller sends to an external device This is word 2 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is updated after all characters have been transmitted The valid range for POS is from 0 to 84 The number of characters sent to the destinatio
80. 6 TE 26 8 OLA 16 9 T41 ACC 6 9 B3 2 6 3 T4 ACC 8 9 B 1 2 24 5 T 3 ACC 26 1 BI 2 25 3 TE ACC 27 3 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P A 6 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Execution Time Example Word Level Instruction Using and Indirect Address ADD Instruction Addressing e Source A N7 e Source B T4 ACC e Destination N ADD Instruction Times ADD Instruction 2 7 us e Source A 5 8 us e Source B 6 5 us Destination 24 5 us Total 36 5 us Execution Time Example Bit Instruction Using an Indirect Address XIC B3 e XIC 0 9 us 5 8 us 6 7 us True case e XIC 0 9 us 5 8 us 6 7 us False case MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time A 7 MicroLogix 1200 Calculate the scan time for your control program using the worksheet Scan Time Worksheet Input Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 1 0 is used 55 us Expansion Input Words X 10 us or X 14 us if Forcing is used Number of modules with Input words X 80 us Input Scan Sub Total Program Scan Add execution times of all instructions in your program when executed true Program Scan Sub Total B Output Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 1 0 used 30 us Exp
81. 65 535 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below Table 5 13 HSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level E Parameter E g T a Gges ts it B a 8 8 ebe e dG oOggiizrzmEki u eEgIm sss el Jeo lm fe le S IE EG le S SE 8 9 B la 2 S la Counter Number High Preset ele elelele elele ele Low Preset ele elelele elele ele Output High Source e elelele elele ele Output Low Source e e elelele elele ele Using the High Speed Counter 5 27 RAC Reset Accumulated Value Instruction Type output RAC LL Heset cumulated Mere E Controller Execution Time When Rung Is Source 0 True False MicroLogix 1200 21 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 17 8 us 0 0 us The RAC instruction resets the high speed counter and allows a specific value to be written to the HSC accumulator The RAC instruction uses the following parameters Counter Number Specifies which high speed counter is being used Counter Number 0 HSCO MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Counter Number 1 HSC1 MicroLogix 1500 only e Source Specifies the location of
82. 7 9 input I 2 5 input and output addressing examples 1 13 integer N 2 5 long word L 2 5 message MG file 21 4 organization and addressing 20 5 output 0 2 5 PID PD 19 2 protecting data files 2 6 status S file C 1 string ST file 20 5 timer T 8 7 data logging 22 1 data table G 2 DCD instruction 17 2 decode 4 to 1 of 16 instruction 17 2 DF1 full duplex protocol F 5 configuration parameters F 5 description 5 DF1 half duplex protocol F 6 configuration parameters F 7 description 6 DH485 communication protocol 2 configuration parameters F 3 DH485 network configuration parameters F 3 description E 2 protocol F 2 token rotation 2 DIN rail G 2 DIV instruction 10 5 divide instruction 10 5 DLG Instruction 22 8 download G 2 DTE definition G 2 E Ell function file 78 17 embedded 1 0 1 1 EMI G 2 ENC instruction 11 3 encode 1 0f 16 to 4 instruction 11 3 encoder definition G 3 quadrature 5 20 END instruction 16 5 EQU instruction 9 3 equal instruction 9 3 error codes D 1 D 2 ASCII instruction error codes 20 30 Ell error codes 18 18 fault messages and error codes D 1 HSC error codes 5 5 major error code status C 13 math overflow trap bit 10 3 math status bits 70 3 MSG instruction error codes 21 21 PID runtime errors 19 16 PTO error codes 6 17 PWM error codes 6 25 STI error code 18 13 troubleshooting guide D 2 errors identifying D 1 event input interrupt Ell function file 78 17 examine if close
83. 9 ASCI DAVEL x fein aus Sed ee RAO CQ ERES URN S E 13 Glossary Index MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Alphabetical List of Instructions Preface Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It provides information concerning who should use this manual the purpose of this manual related documentation conventions used in this manual Rockwell Automation support Who Should Use this Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing Manual programming or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix 1200 or MicroLogix 1500 controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product Purpose of this Manual This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers It describes the procedures you use to program and troubleshoot your controller This manual gives you an overview of the file types used by the controllers provides the instruction set for the controllers contains application examples to show the instruction set in use Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Preface 2 Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Rockwell Automation products To obtain a copy contact your local Rockwell Automation office or distributor For Information on understanding and applying micro contr
84. Access Setting OEM Lock 2 10 Chapter 3 Function Files OVENI EW ua Bie AG ed a nite cir a GO ee tina acne ie ke he eee 3 2 Real Time Clock Function Bue iw pce eh a Pass 3 3 Trim Pot Information Function File svo vi iff 3 5 Memory Module Information Function File 3 6 DAT Function File MicroLogix 1500 only 3 9 Base Hardware Information Function File 3 12 Communications Status File Lacu cen feet cand o EE e scd 3 13 Input Output Status Tie Sst ae ee xxix 3 18 Chapter 4 Programming Instructions Instruction S t o oup dde t ege Dese Reo dU Pp Red sir nd 4 1 Overview Using the Instruction Descriptions c4 s seo Re xS 4 2 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Table of Contents ii Using the High Speed Counter Using High Speed Outputs Relay Type Bit Instructions Timer and Counter Instructions Compare Instructions Publication 1762 RMO01C EN P Chapter 5 High Speed Counter HSC Function File 5 2 High Speed Counter Function File Sub Elements Summary 5 4 HSC Function File Sub Elements 4 iz aee Rr emet 5 5 HSL High Speed Counter Load caa sva vex era RO a 5 26 RAC Reset Accumulated Values uses pets 5 27 Chapter 6 PTO Pulse Train Output 22 V ae bee qot es dene 6 1 Pulse Train Output Function 2 ud ad ea ub EU ee we t 6 2 Pulse Train Outputs PTO Function File orsa 6 6 Pulse Train Output Function File Sub Elements Summary 6 7 PWM Pu
85. B word 17 6 us 7 2 us character 0 0 us FRN 3 or later long word 24 6 us 11 6 us character 10 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B 142 us 6 3 us character 00 us FRN 4 or later Use the ACI instruction to convert a numeric ASCII string to an integer word or long word value ASCII Instructions 20 17 Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source The contents of this location are converted to an integer value Destination This is the location which receives the result of the conversion The data range is from 32 768 to 32 767 if the destination is a word and from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 if the destination is a long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 16 ACI Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address iles Function Files Data Files Mode Level N E g T Parameter Elo le T S x a E L BSTS3s le Ele ale lgl l l lz lE lgl lo Ele l5 l la 8s ol len lon fe SJ I IE IE I S Ss FS S Ela la lS Sia Source Destination eje ele eje 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation The controller searches the source file type ST
86. B Processors 2 This value for the SVC instruction is for when the communica Publication 1762 RM001C EN P ions servicing function is accessing a data file The time increases when accessing a function file Indirect Addressing The following sections describe how indirect addressing affects the execution time of instructions in the Micrologix 1500 processor The timing for an indirect address is affected by the form of the indirect address For the address forms in the following table you can interchange the following file types Input D and Output O Bit B Integer ND e Timer T Counter C and Control R MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time B 5 Execution Times for the Indirect Addresses For most types of instructions that contain an indirect address es look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction indicates that an indirect reference is substituted Table B 2 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Instruction Execution Time Using Indirect Addressing Address Operand Address Operand Address Operand Form Time ps Form Time ps Form Time ys 0 1 48 O1 L 1 2 13 3 L I2 21 6 01 0 12 3 0 1 0 5 9 LA 21 9 O1 12 4 03 1 6 5 T4 DN 5 7 B31 48 0 0 14 1 T 1 DN 20 4 B 1 19 9 OT LEE 14 5 TI E F DN 20 7 BTE 20 1 B3
87. Bank 0 1 0 Bank 1 NOTE In most cases you can use the following address format X s b X file type letter s slot number b bit number See I O Addressing on page 1 13 for complete information on address formats Expansion Power Supplies and Cables To use a MicroLogix 1500 controller with a 1769 Expansion I O Power Supply verify that you have the following MicroLogix 1500 Processor Catalog Number 1764 LSP FRN 3 and higher Catalog Number 1764 LRP FRN 4 and higher Operating System Version You can check the FRN by looking at word 8 59 Operating System FRN in the Status File IMPORTANT If your processor is at an older revision you must upgrade the operating system to FRN 3 or higher to use an expansion cable and power supply On the Internet go to http www ab com micrologix to download the operating system upgrade Enter MicroLogix 1500 go to Tools and Tips ATTENTION LIMIT OF ONE EXPANSION POWER SUPPLY AND CABLE The expansion power supply cannot be connected directly to the controller It must be connected using one of the expansion cables Only one expansion power supply may be used in a MicroLogix 1500 system Exceeding these limitations may damage the power supply and result in unexpected operation MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion 1 0 Memory Mapping 1 0 Configuration 1 9 Discrete 1 0 Configuration 1769 IA8I Input Image For each input module the input data file contains
88. CVH Control PD10 0 CVH word INT Oto 10096 control read write Variable High Limit When the output limit bit PD10 0 OL is enabled 1 the CVH Control Value High you enter is the maximum output Cin percent that the control variable attains If the calculated CV exceeds the CVH the CV is set overridden to the CVH value you entered and the upper limit alarm bit UL is set When the output limit bit PD10 0 OD is disabled 0 the CVH value you enter determines when the upper limit alarm bit UL is set If CV exceeds the maximum value the output is not overridden and the upper limit alarm bit CUL is set Control Variable Low Limit CVL Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access CVL Control PD10 0 CVL word 0 to 10096 control read write Variable Low Limit INT When the output limit bit PD10 0 OD is enabled 1 the CVL Control Value Low you enter is the minimum output in percent that the Control Variable attains If the calculated CV is below the minimum value the CV is set overridden to the CVL value you entered and the lower limit alarm bit LL is set When the output limit bit PD10 0 OD is disabled 0 the CVL value you enter determines when the lower limit alarm bit LL is set If CV is below the minimum value the output is not overridden and the lower limit alarm bit LL is set Publication 1762 RM00
89. Decelerating Status PTO 0 DS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO DS Decel bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the deceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the deceleration phase of the output profile Using High Speed Outputs 6 9 PTO Run Status RS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access RS Run Status PTO 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The RS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is within the run phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile PTO Accelerating Status AS Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access AS Accelerating Status PTO 0 AS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO AS Accelerating Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The AS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction i
90. Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access OUT Output PTO 0 OUT word INT 2 or3 control read only The PTO OUT Output variable defines the output O0 0 2 or O0 0 3 that the PTO instruction controls This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program When OUT 2 PTO pulses output 2 O0 0 0 2 of the embedded outputs 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB e When OUT 3 PTO pulses output 3 O0 0 0 3 of the embedded outputs 1764 28BXB only NOTE Forcing an output controlled by the PTO while it is running stops all output pulses and causes a PTO error PTO Done DN Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access DN Done PTO 0 DN bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO DN Done bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DN bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction has completed its operation successfully Cleared 0 When the rung the PTO is on is false If the rung is false when the PTO instruction completes the Done bit is set until the next scan of the PTO instruction PTO Decelerating Status DS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access DS
91. Error Detection CRC BCC CRC EOT Suppression enabled disabled disabled When EOT Suppression is enabled the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued This saves modem transmission power when there is no message to transmit Duplicate Packet enabled disabled enabled Message Detect Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are not set to 0 Poll Timeout 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 3000 x20 ms Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG instruction error is generated and the ladder program needs to re queue the MSG instruction If you are using a MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero is not used Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respo
92. Executing HSC 0 UIX bit 0 to 7 status read only 5 8 UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC 0 UIE bit 0to 7 control read write 5 8 UIL User Interrupt Lost HSC 0 UIL bit 0to 7 status read write 5 9 UIP User Interrupt Pending HSC 0 UIP bit 0to 7 status read only 5 9 FE Function Enabled HSC 0 FE bit 0to 7 control read write 5 6 AS Auto Start HSC 0 AS bit 0to 7 control read only 5 6 ED Error Detected HSC 0 ED bit 0to 7 status read only 5 6 CE Counting Enabled HSC 0 CE bit 0to 7 control read write 5 7 SP Set Parameters HSC 0 SP bit 0 to 7 control read write 5 7 LPM Low Preset Mask HSC 0 LPM bit 2to7 control read write 5 9 HPM High Preset Mask HSC 0 HPM bit 0 to 7 control read write 5 11 UFM Underflow Mask HSC 0 UFM bit 2to7 control read write 5 12 OFM Overflow Mask HSC 0 0FM bit 0to 7 control read write 5 14 LPI Low Preset Interrupt HSC 0 LPI bit 2to7 status read write 5 10 HPI High Preset Interrupt HSC 0 HPI bit 0to 7 status read write 5 11 UFI Underflow Interrupt HSC 0 UH bit 2to7 status read write 5 13 OFI Overflow Interrupt HSC 0 0H bit 0to 7 status read write 5 14 LPR Low Preset Reached HSC 0 LPR bit 2to7 status read only 5 10 HPR High Preset Reached HSC 0 HPR bit 2to7 status read only 5 12 DIR Count Direction HSC 0 DIR bit 0to 7 status read only 5 15 UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bit 0to 7 status read write 5 12 OF Overflow HSC 0 OF bit 0to 7 status read wr
93. File S 2 1 The contents of the Status File are determined by the functions which utilize the Status File See System Status File on page C 1 for a detailed description Bit File B 3 9 to 255 1 The Bit File is a general purpose file typically used for bit logic Timer File T 4 9to255 3 The Timer File is used for maintaining timing information for ladder logic timing instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 8 1 for instruction information Counter File C 5 9to255 3 The Counter File is used for maintaining counting information for ladder logic counting instructions See Timer and Counter Instructions on page 8 1 for instruction information Control File R 6 9t0255 3 The Control Data file is used for maintaining length and position information for various ladder logic instructions Integer File N 7 9 to 255 1 The Integer File is a general purpose file consisting of 16 bit signed integer data words String File ST 9 to 255 42 The String File is a file that stores ASCII characters Not valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A Processors Long Word File L 9 to 255 2 The Long Word File is a general purpose file consisting of 32 bit signed integer data words Message File MG 9 to 255 25 The Message File is associated with the MSG instruction See Communications Instructions on page 21 1 for information on the MSG instruction PID File PD 9 to 255 23 The PID File is associated with the PID instruction See Process Control In
94. Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access IS Integral Sum PD10 0 I long word 2 147 483 648 to status read write 32 bitINT 2 147 483 647 This is the result of the integration Ec E dt I Altered Derivative Term AD Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access AD Altered PD10 0 AD long word 2 147 483 648 to status read only Derivative Term 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 This long word is used internally to track the change in the process variable within the loop update time Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 16 Runtime Errors Process Control Instruction Error code 0036 appears in the status file when a PID instruction runtime error occurs Code 0036 covers the following PID error conditions each of which has been assigned a unique single byte code value that appears in the MSB of the second word of the control block Error Code Description of Error Condition or Conditions Corrective Action 11H 1 Loop update time Change loop update time 0 D lt 1024 D gt 1024 2 Loop update time D 0 12H Proportional gain Change proportional gain K to0 lt K K lt 0 13H Integral gain reset Change integral gain reset T to 0 T T 0 14H Derivative gain rate Change derivative gain rate Ty to 0 Tq Ty lt 0 15H Feed Forward Bias FF is out
95. Format Access UIX User Interrupt Executing HSC 0 UIX bit 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set 1 whenever the HSC sub system begins processing the HSC subroutine due to any of the following conditions Low preset reached High preset reached Overflow condition count up through the overflow value Underflow condition count down through the underflow value The HSC UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an HSC interrupt is executing The HSC sub system will clear 0 the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the HSC subroutine Using the High Speed Counter 5 9 User Interrupt Pending UIP Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UIP User HSC 0 UIP bi Interrupt Pending 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 t Oto7 status read only The UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot be executed immediately This bit is maintained by the controller and is set and cleared automatically User Interrupt Lost UIL Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Pr
96. GRT A gt B true A lt B false LES A B false A lt B true Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator CHSC ACC MPORTANT i l for Source A in GRT LES GEQ and LEQ instructions Compare Instructions 9 5 GEO Greater Than or Equal To LEQ Less Than or Equal To Instruction Type input GEQ Grtr Than or Eq A gt B Table 9 6 Execution Time for the GEQ and LEO Instructions Source A N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Source B N7 1 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 1 3 us 1 1 us long word 2 8 us 2 7 us Less Than or Eql A lt B MicroLogix 1500 word 1 2 us 1 1 us Source A ae long word 2 6 us 2 5 ls Source B N7 1 9s The GEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than or equal to a second value The LEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is less than or equal to a second value Table 9 7 GEO and LEO Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State GEO AB true A B false LEO A gt B false A lt B true Only use the High Speed Counter Accumulator CHSC ACC IMPORTANT for Source A in GRT LES GEQ and LEQ instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 9 6 Compare Instructions MEQ Mask Compare for Equal Instruction Type input
97. MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Table 15 5 Execution Time for the SOL Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 21 7 us 7 0 us long word 24 3 us 7 1 us MicroLogix 1500 word 19 1 us 6 3 us long word 21 1 us 6 3 us Sequencer Instructions 15 9 On a false to true rung transition the SQL instruction loads words or long words into a sequencer file at each step of a sequencer operation This instruction uses the following operands e File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents are received on an element by element basis from the source NOTE If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position sequencer file The address level of the source must match the sequencer file If file is a word type then source must be a word type If file is a long word type then source must be a long word type The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 dong word Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer
98. Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words Message Steady State MSG 6 0 20 0 29 Long Word addressing level does not apply Message False to True 230 0 Transition for Reads Message False to True 264 1 6 Transition for Writes word Multiply MUL 0 0 6 8 2 0 0 0 31 9 3 5 Masked Move MVM 0 0 78 2 0 0 0 11 8 3 0 Negate NEG 0 0 29 3 0 0 0 12 1 3 0 Not Equal NEO 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 2 5 2 5 Not NOT 0 0 24 2 5 0 0 9 2 2 5 One Shot ONS 1 9 2 6 3 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Or OR 0 0 2 2 2 8 0 0 92 3 0 One Shot Falling OSF 37 28 54 Long Word addressing level does not apply One Shot Rising OSR 3 0 34 54 Output Enable OTE 1 1 1 4 1 6 Output Latch OTL 0 0 1 0 0 6 Output Unlatch OTU 0 0 1 1 0 6 Proportional Integral Derivative PID 11 0 295 8 24 Pulse Train Output PTO 24 4 85 6 1 9 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 247 1266 13 Reset Accumulator RAC Word addressing level does not 0 0 212 2 0 apply 1 0 Refresh REF 0 0 see p A 7 0 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Reset RES 0 0 5 9 1 0 Return RET 0 0 1 0 0 3 Retentive Timer On RTO 24 18 0 3 4 Subroutine SBR 1 0 1 0 0 3 Scale SCL 0 0 10 5 2 5 Scale with Parameters SCP 0 0 31 5 3 8 0 0 52 2 6 0 Sequencer Compare sac 74 23 5 3 9 74 26 3 44 Sequencer Load SOL 7 0 21 7 3 4 7 1 24 3 39 Sequencer Output sao 74 23 2 3 9 74 26 6 44 Square Root SOR 0 0 26 0 1 5 0 0 30 9 25 Selectable Timed Interrupt Start STS 0 0 57 5 1 0 Long Word addre
99. N50 43 N50 50 11 12 N50 12 N50 48 12 28 N50 28 N50 49 12 44 N50 44 N50 50 12 13 N50 13 N50 48 13 29 N50 29 N50 49 13 45 N50 45 N50 50 13 14 N50 14 N50 48 14 30 N50 30 N50 49 14 46 N50 46 N50 50 14 15 N50 15 N50 48 15 31 N50 31 N50 49 15 47 N50 47 N50 50 15 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The element number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data register as illustrated in the table The protection bit defines whether the data is read write or read only When the protection bit is set 1 the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display When the protection bit is clear 0 or the protection bit does not exist the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad IMPORTANT Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from its keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target integer file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten NOTE Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions addresses N50 51 and above in this example The DAT always starts at word 0 of a d
100. Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 22 6 Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Configuring Data Log Data Logging is configured using RSLogix 500 programming software Queues version V4 00 00 or later 1 Open a 1764 LRP application The first step in using Data Logging is to configure the data log queue s Access to this function is provided via the RSLogix 500 Project tree EXAMPLE RESET DLG Mel E3 i EJ Controler H Program Files Double click H E Data Files Configuration to HEJ Data Logging access Data Log E Configuration Configuration HE Force Files H E Custom Data Monitors E Database 2 The Data Log Que window appears Double click on Data Log Configuration Data Log Que Configuration Appearance of Data Jata Lor Walle ation s SEM Nt E M Log Que Configuration window before creating a queue Cancel Help 3 The Data Log Que dialog box appears as shown below Use this dialog box to enter the queue information Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 22 7 Data Log Que Configuration Number of Records i Je Cancel Separator Character Date Stamp Help Time Stamp dM Address to Log p Delete Current Address List Enter the following information Data Log Queue Description Configuration Parameter Number of Records Defines the number of records data sets in the qu
101. UIL User Interrupt Lost EI 0 UIL binary bit status read write 18 19 UIP User Interrupt Pending EII 0 UIP binary bit status read only 18 19 EIE Event Interrupt Enabled EII 0 EIE binary bit control read write 18 20 AS Auto Start EII 0 AS binary bit control read only 18 20 ED Error Detected Ell 0 ED binary bit status read only 18 20 ES Edge Select EII 0 ES binary bit control read only 18 21 IS Input Select EII 0 IS word INT control read only 18 21 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 18 Using Interrupts Ell Function File Sub Elements Ell Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN Program File Number EII O PFN word INT control read only PEN Program File Number defines which subroutine is called executed when the input terminal assigned to EII 0 detects a signal A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller It is programmed and operated the same as any other program file From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the configuration of the EII Ell Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code EIl 0 ER word INT status read only Any ER Error Code detected by t
102. US P for more information on valid configurations NOTE Visit the MicroLogix web site http www ab com micrologix for the MicroLogix 1500 Expansion I O System Qualifier Addressing Expansion 1 0 The figure below shows the addressing for the MicroLogix 1500 and its T O The expansion I O is addressed as slots 1 through 8 the controller s embedded I O is addressed as slot 0 Power supplies and cables are not counted as slots but must be added to the RSLogix 500 project in the I O configuration Modules are counted from left to right on each bank as shown in the illustrations below Figure 1 1 Vertical Orientation Embedded 1 0 Slot 0 LED e Expansion 1 0 Bank 0 Vy te e ER Expansion pe elles 1 0 Bank 1 2 S 2 o o v L i pY LEY LI Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 8 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Figure 1 2 Horizontal Orientation Embedded 1 0 Slot 0 gl D Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 ral En b q im YE Expansion Expansion 0
103. Waiting Bit EW is set after the enable bit is set and the message is in the buffer not in the queue and waiting to be sent The EW bit is cleared after the message has been sent and the processor receives acknowledgement ACK from the target device This is before the target device has processed the message and sent a reply Error ER Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 ER Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Error Bit ER is set when message transmission has failed An error code is written to the MSG File The ER bit and the error code are deared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Done DN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 DN Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Done Bit DN is set when the message is transmitted successfully The DN bit is cleared the next time the associated rung goes from false to true Start ST Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 ST Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Start Bit ST is set when the processor receives acknowledgment ACK from the target device The ST bit is cleared when the DN ER or TO bit is set Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 16 Communications Instructions Remote Messages Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The controller is also capable of remote or off link messaging Remote messaging is the abili
104. a bit is set 1 the corresponding node is active on the network If a bit is clear 0 the corresponding node is inactive 29 to 42 Reserved Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 3 18 Function Files Input Output Status File Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Table 3 18 Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostics MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Word Bit Description 43 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 10 44 Length always 14 45 Format Code always 0 46 Pre Send Time Delay 4 0 to 7 Node Address 8to 15 Reserved 48 Inter Character Timeout 49 RTS Send Delay 50 RTS Off Delay 51 0 to 7 Baud Rate 8and9 Parity 10to 15 Reserved 52 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 6 53 Length always 32 54 Format Code always 0 55 Presentation Layer Error Code 56 Presentation Layer Error Count 57 Execution Function Error Code 58 Last Transmitted Exception Code 59 Data File Number of Error Request 60 Element Number of Error Request 61 Function Code 1 Message Counter 62 Function Code 2 Message Counter 63 Function Code 3 Message Counter 64 Function Code 4 Message Counter 65 Function Code 5 Message Counter 66 Function Code 6 Message Counter 67 Function Code 8 Message Counter 68 Function Code 15 Message Counter 69 Function Code 16 Message Counter The input output st
105. a reply from the target node The target node is not required to respond within any given time frame NOTE If the Target Node faults or power cycles during the message transaction you will never receive a reply This is why you should use a Message Timeout value in your MSG instruction Communications Instructions 21 25 4 Step 4 is not shown in the timing diagram If you do not receive an ACK step 3 does not occur Instead either no response or a negative J acknowledge NAK is received When this happens the ST bit remains clear 0 No response may be caused by the target node is not there the message became corrupted in transmission the response was corrupted in response transmission A NAK may be caused by target node is busy target node received a corrupt message the message is too large When a NAK occurs the EW bit is cleared 0 and the ER bit is set CD indicating that the message instruction failed 5 Following the successful receipt of the packet the target node sends a reply packet The reply packet contains one of the following responses successful write request successful read request with data e failure with error code At the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction following the target node s reply the controller examines the message from the target device If the reply is successful the DN bit is set D and the ST bit is cleared 0 If it is a successful read request the
106. addressing affects the execution time of instructions for the Micrologix 1200 controllers The timing for an indirect address is affected by the form of the indirect address For the address forms in the following table you can interchange the following file types Input D and Output O Bit B Integer N e Timer T Counter C and Control R Execution Times for the Indirect Addresses For most types of instructions that contain an indirect address es look up the form of the indirect address in the table below and add that time to the execution time of the instruction indicates that an indirect reference is substituted Table A 2 MicroLogix 1200 Instruction ExecutionTime Using Indirect Addressing Address Form Operand Time ps Address Form Operand Time ps 0 1 5 8 B3 1 6 8 0 0 15 0 B3 1 7 6 OT 15 1 B 1 25 9 B3 5 8 BE 26 2 B 1 24 3 L8 2 6 5 B E 24 5 L 1 2 24 6 L81 6 1 L E 51 2 25 3 L 1 244 L8 1 6 8 L 24 3 L8 7 7 T4 6 0 LETS 26 0 T 1 24 0 LEA 25 9 T E 24 2 T4 DN 6 6 T4 ACC 6 5 T 1 DN 24 4 T 1 ACC 24 4 T DN 24 9 T 5 ACC 249 T4 ACC 2 74 0 1 2 6 3 T 1 ACC 2 24 4 01 0 2 15 2 T 5 ACC 2 25 9 0 2 15 9 T4 1 6 5 0 1 0 6 8 T amp 8 3 0 1 1 7 6 TTA 26 1 0 0 1 16
107. alarm values and ignore the alarm bits Process Control Instruction 19 21 Output Limiting with Anti Reset Windup You may set an output limit percent of output on the control variable When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded a limit it sets an alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit and prevents the control variable from exceeding either limit value The instruction limits the control variable to 0 and 100 if you choose not to limit Select upper and lower output limits by setting the limit enable bit bit OL and entering an upper limit CVH and lower limit CVL Limit values are a percentage 0 to 100 of the control variable The difference between selecting output alarms and output limits is that you must select output limiting to enable limiting Limit and alarm values are stored in the same words Entering these values enables the alarms but not limiting Entering these values and setting the limit enable bit enables limiting and alarms Anti reset windup is a feature that prevents the integral term from becoming excessive when the control variable reaches a limit When the sum of the PID and bias terms in the control variable reaches the limit the instruction stops calculating the integral sum until the control variable comes back in range The integral sum is contained in element IS The Manual Mode In the MANUAL mode the PID algorithm does not compute the value of the
108. available operating systems your controller 0011 EXECUTABLE FILE 2 IS MISSING Ladder File 2 is missing from the program Non User Re compile and reload the program 0012 LADDER PROGRAM ERROR The ladder program has a memory integrity problem Non User Reload the program or re compile and reload the program If the error persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual 0015 1 0 CONFIGURATION FILE ERROR The user program l O configuration is invalid Non User Re compile and reload the program and enter the Run mode If the error persists be sure to use RSI programming software to develop and load the program Publication 1762 RM001C EN P D 4 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex yg 0016 STARTUP The user fault routine was executed Recoverable e Either reset bit S 1 9 if this is consistent PROTECTION FAULT at power up prior to the main ladder with the application requirements and program Bit 1 13 Major Error change the mode back to RUN or Halted was not cleared at the end of e clear S 1 13 the Major Error Halted bit the User Fault Routine The User before the end of the User Fault Routine Fault Routine ran because bit S 1 9 was
109. bit pattern stored in the OMB variable defines which outputs are controlled by the HSC and which outputs are not controlled by the HSC The bit pattern of the OMB variable directly corresponds to the output bits on the controller Bits that are set 1 are enabled and can be turned on or off by the HSC sub system Bits that are clear 0 cannot be turned on or off by the HSC sub system The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup The table below illustrates this relationship Table 5 12 Affect of HSC Output Mask on Base Unit Outputs Output Address 16 Bit Signed Integer Data Word 15 14 13 172 131 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Q0 HSC 0 HPO high preset output 0 1 1 JO 11 JO JO 11 1 JO JO HSC 0 0MB output mask 00 0 0 p DENEN AUN Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The outputs shown in the black boxes are the outputs under the control of the HSC sub system The mask defines which outputs can be controlled The high preset output or low preset output values HPO or LPO define if each output is either ON 1 or OFF 0 Another way to view this is that the high or low preset output is written through the output mask with the output mask acting like a filter The bits in the gray boxes are unused The first 12 bits of the mask word are used and the remaining mask bits are not functional because they do not correlate to any physical out
110. char ASCII Handshake Lines AHL 108 893 5 3 ASCII Integer to String AIC 0 0 25 4 3 char 1 4 0 0 68 7 1 6 And AND 0 0 2 0 2 8 0 0 79 3 0 ASCII Read Characters ARD 10 7 108 44 char 4 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply ASCII Read Line ARL 10 6 114 44 3 14 3 char ASCII String Search ASC 0 0 13 4 3 5 6 0 matching char Publication 1762 RM001C EN P B 2 Table B 1 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII String Compare ASR 0 0 7 5 3 5 1 8 Long Word addressing level does not apply matching char ASCII Write with Append AWA 12 5 a 10 6 34 char ASCII Write AWT 12 8 237 10 6 13 4 char Bit Shift Left BSL 14 26 4 1 06 13 8 word Bit Shift Right BSR 1 4 26 1 1 07 13 8 word Clear CLR 0 0 12 1 0 0 0 5 5 1 0 File Copy COP 0 0 15 9 0 67 2 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply word Count Down CTD 85 75 24 Count Up CTU 8 5 6 4 24 Decode 4 to 1 of 16 DCD 0 0 0 9 1 9 Divide DIV 0 0 10 3 2 0 0 0 36 7 3 5 Data Log DLG 6 7 67 5 11 8 24 6 7 67 5 11 8 date 2 4 date st
111. common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set look at the specific error code in parameter EII 0 ER This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller Using Interrupts 18 21 Ell Edge Select ES Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ES Edge Select EII 0 ES binary bit control read only The ES Edge Select bit selects the type of trigger that causes an Event Interrupt This bit allows the EII to be configured for rising edge Coff to on 0 to 1 or falling edge on to off 1 to 0 signal detection This selection is based on the type of field device that is connected to the controller The default condition is 1 which configures the EII for rising edge operation Ell Input Select IS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access IS Input Select EII 0 1S word INT control read only The IS Input Select parameter is used to configure each EII to a specific input on the controller Valid inputs are 0 to 7 which correspond to 11 0 0 0 to I1 0 0 7 This parameter is configured with the programming device and cannot be changed from the control program Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 22 Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The PID Concept Chapter 19 Process Control Instruction This chapter describes the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1
112. data file It cannot start at any other address within the file The base hardware information BHD file is a read only file that contains a description of the MicroLogix 1200 Controller or the MicroLogix 1500 Base Unit Table 3 8 Base Hardware Information Function File BHI Address Description BHI 0 CN CN Catalog Number BHI 0 SRS SRS Series BHI 0 REV REV Revision BHI 0 FT FT Functionality Type Function Files 3 13 Communications Status The Communications Status CS File is a read only file that contains File information on how the controller communication parameters are configured and status information on communications activity The communications status file uses Table 3 9 Communications Status File Size Controller Number of Word Elements MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A Processor 44 1 word elements MicroLogix 1200 71 1 word elements MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors There is one communications Status file for each communications port Communications Status File CSO corresponds to Channel 0 on the controller Communications Status File CS1 corresponds to Channel 1 on the 1764 LRP processor NOTE You can use the Communications Status File information as a troubleshooting tool for communications issues The data file is structured as Table 3 10 Communications Status File Word Description Applies to Controller Details on Page 0 to 5 Ge
113. defined as follows e Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 This bit is set when an error over or under range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error e Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits are set when the input signal is above the user specified range The module continues to convert data to the maximum full range value during an over range condition The bits reset when the over range condition clears UIx Under range flag bits for input channels 0 through 3 These bits are set when the input signal is below the user specified range The module continues to convert data to the maximum full range value during an under range condition The bits reset when the under range condition clears e SGNx The sign bit for channels 0 through 3 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 0 Configuration 1 7 MicroLogix 1500 If the application requires more I O than the controller provides you can Compact attach I O modules These additional modules are called expansion I O Expansion 1 0 Expansion 1 0 Modules Compact I O Bulletin 1769 is used to provide discrete and analog inputs and outputs and in the future specialty modules For the MicroLogix 1500 you can attach up to eight additional I O modules The number of modules that can be attached is dependent on the amount of power required by the I O modules See your MicroLogix 1500 User Manual publication 1764 UM001A
114. defines which subroutine is called executed when HSCO counts to High Preset or Low Preset or through Overflow or Underflow The integer value of this variable defines which program file will run at that time A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 See also Interrupt Latency on page 18 5 Error Code ER Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access ER Error Code HSC O ER word INT 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The ERs Error Codes detected by the HSC sub system are displayed in this word Errors include Table 5 2 HSC Error Codes Error Code Name Mode Description Number less than 3 greater than 255 or does not exist 2 Invalid Mode n a Invalid Model 3 Invalid High 0 1 High preset is less than or equal to zero 0 Preset 2107 High preset is less than or equal to low preset 4 Invalid Overflow 0 to 7 High preset is greater than overflow 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 6 Using the High Speed Counter Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Function Enabled FE Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access FE Function HSC 0 FE bi Enabled t Oto7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The FE Function Enab
115. device E6H PCCC Description Illegal Address address does not exist or does not point to something usable by this command E7H Target node cannot respond because length requested is too large E8H PCCC Description Cannot complete request situation changed file size for example during multi packet operation E9H PCCC Description Data or file is too large Memory unavailable EAH PCCC Description Request is too large transaction size plus word address is too large EBH Target node cannot respond because target node denies access ECH Target node cannot respond because requested function is currently unavailable EDH PCCC Description Resource is already available condition already exists EEH PCCC Description Command cannot be executed EFH PCCC Description Overflow histogram overflow FOH PCCC Description No access F1H Local processor detects illegal target file type F2H PCCC Description Invalid parameter invalid data in search or command block F3H PCCC Description Address reference exists to deleted area FAH PCCC Description Command execution failure for unknown reason PLC 3 histogram overflow F5H PCCC Description Data conversion error F6H PCCC Description The scanner is not able to communicate with a 1771 rack adapter This could be due to the scanner not scanning the selected adapter not being scanned the adapter not responding or an invalid request of a DCM BT block transfer F7H PCCC Description T
116. equivalent of 16 bits of memory For example 1 integer data file element 1 user word 1 long word file element 2 user words 1 timer data file element 3 user words For program files a word is the equivalent of a ladder instruction with one operand For example 1 XIC instruction which has 1 operand consumes 1 user word 1 EQU instruction which has 2 operands consumes 2 user words 1 ADD instruction which has 3 operands consumes 3 user words e Function files do not consume user memory NOTE Although the controller allows up to 256 elements in a file it may not actually be possible to create a file with that many elements due to the user memory size in the controller MicroLogix 1200 User Memory The MicroLogix 1200 controller supports 6K of memory Memory can be used for program files and data files The maximum data memory usage is 2K words as shown below 2 0K 0 5K 0K 0K Program Words 4K 4 3K Data Words See MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page A 1 to find the memory usage for specific instructions 1 These are approximate values For actual memory usage see the tables in Appendix A and B of this manual Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 2 4 Controller Memory and File Types Publication 1762 RM001C EN P MicroLogix 1500 User Memory MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Processor The 1764 LSP processor supports over 7K of memory Memory can beusedfor program fil
117. exercise extreme care when using indirect addressing Always be aware of the possibility of crossing file boundaries or pointing to data that was not intended to be used Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Programming Instructions Overview 4 7 Example Using Indirect Addressing to Duplicate Indexed Addressing In this section an indexed addressing example is shown first Then an equivalent indirect addressing example is shown Indexed addressing is supported by SLC 500 and MicroLogix 1000 programmable controllers The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 do not support indexed addressing This example is shown for comparison purposes Indexed Addressing Example The following ADD instruction uses an indexed address in the Source A and Destination addresses If the indexed offset value is 20 stored in S 24 the controller uses the data stored at the base address plus the indexed offset to perform the operation Indexed ADD Working ADD Addresses Add Addresses Add Source A N7 0 Source A N7 20 Source B 25 Source B 25 Dest N15 0 Dest N15 20 In this example the controller uses the following addresses Operand Base Address Offset Value in S 24 Working Address Source A N7 0 20 N7 20 Destination N15 0 20 N15 20 NOTE In the SLC and ML1000 controllers there are some instructions that clear S 24 after the instruction completes For this reason you must insure that the index register is loaded
118. for the first character between 0 and 9 All numeric characters are extracted until a non numeric character or the end of the string is reached Action is taken omly if numeric characters are found The string length is limited to 82 characters Commas and signs are allowed in the string However only the minus sign is displayed in the data table This instruction sets the following math flags in the controller status file Math Flag Description 0 1 Overflow V Flag is set if the result is outside of the valid range 0 2 Zero Z Flag is set if the result is zero S 0 3 Sign S Flag is set if the result is negative 5 0 Overflow Trap Flag is set when the Overflow flag S 0 1 is set 5 15 ASCII String Flag is set if the Source string exceeds 82 characters Manipulation Error When S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code S 6 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 18 ASCII Instructions ACN String Concatenate ACN String Concatenate Source A ST10 11 Source B ST10 12 Dest ST10 10 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output Table 20 17 Execution Time for the ACN Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 17 9 us 10 2 us character 0 0 us The ACN instruction combines two ASCII strings The second string is appended to the first and
119. instruction in this example an integer file This example also illustrates how to perform a limit check on the indirect address The limit instruction at the beginning of the rung is monitoring the indirect element If the data at N50 100 is less than 10 or greater than 25 the copy instruction is not processed This procedure can be used to make sure an indirect address does not access data an unintended location Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 4 6 Programming Instructions Overview Indirect Addressing of Bit B3 0 B3 0 0002 lE d E25 0 16 0003 C END gt e Address B3 B25 0 Description In this example the element to be used for the indirection is B25 0 The data in B25 0 defines the bit within file B3 If the value of location B25 0 1017 the XIC instruction is processed using B3 1017 NOTE If a number larger than 4096 or larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in B25 0 in this example data integrity cannot be guaranteed Exceeding the number of elements in the data file would cause the file boundary to be crossed These are only some of the examples that can be used others include File and Element Indirection N N10 0 N25 0 Input Slot Indirection 11 N7 0 0 Each group of instructions may or may not allow indirection Please review the compatibility table for each instruction to determine which elements within an instruction support indirection Miele vou must
120. interrupt disable UID instruction 18 9 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P user interrupt enable UIE instruction 18 10 user interrupt flush UIF instruction 78 11 IOM instruction 17 3 IOS function file 3 18 J JMP instruction 16 1 JSR instruction 16 2 jump G 4 jump to label instruction 76 7 jump to subroutine instruction 16 2 L label instruction 76 2 ladder logic G 4 last 100 uSec scan time status C 17 latching inputs 1 15 LBL instruction 16 2 least significant bit LSB G 4 LED light emitting diode G 4 LEO instruction 9 5 LES instruction 9 4 less than instruction 9 4 less than or equal to instruction 9 5 LFL instruction 14 14 LFU instruction 14 17 LIFO Last In First Out G 4 LIFO load instruction 14 14 LIFO unload instruction 14 17 LIM instruction 9 7 limit instruction 9 7 load memory module always bit C 6 load memory module on error or default program bit C 5 local messages 21 7 logic G 4 logical instructions 12 7 logical NOT instruction 12 6 logical OR instruction 12 4 low byte G 4 major error code status C 13 major error detected in user fault routine status bit C 77 major error halted status bit C 8 manuals related P 2 mask compare for equal instruction 9 6 masked move instruction 73 3 master control relay MCR G 4 master control reset instruction 76 5 math instructions 70 1 math overflow selection bit C 70 math register status C 15 maximum scan time status C 15 MCR instru
121. not provide the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers For the same functionality as the OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1000 and SLC 500 controllers use the ONS instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Relay Type Bit Instructions 7 7 Use the OSR and OSF instructions to trigger an event to occur one time These instructions trigger an event based on a change of rung state as follows Use the OSR instruction when an event must start based on the false to true rising edge change of state of the rung Use the OSF instruction when an event must start based on the true to false falling edge change of state of the rung These instructions use two parameters Storage Bit and Output Bit e Storage Bit This is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan Output Bit This is the bit address which is set based on a false to true OSR or true to false OSF rung transition The Output Bit is set for one program scan To re activate the OSR the rung must become false To re activate the OSF the rung must become true Table 7 12 OSR Storage and Output Bit Operation Rung State Transition Storage Bit Output Bit false to true one scan bit is set bit is set true to true bit is set bit is reset true to false and false to false bit is reset bit is reset Table 7 13 OSF Storage and Output Bits Operation Rung State Tra
122. of two sources and places the result in the destination Table 12 8 Truth Table for the XOR Instruction Destination A XORB Source A 1 1 11 11 11 10 J1 JO JO JO JO 01 1 JO JO Source B 1 11 10 JO 1 11 41 1 1 11 JO JO JO JO 1 1 Destination 0 J0 1 1 JO 1 0 1 11 1 JO 0 1 1 1 11 Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator IMPORTANT E HSC ACO for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 12 1 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 12 2 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 12 6 Logical Instructions NOT Logical NOT Instruction Type output NOT NOT Table 12 9 Execution Time for the NOT Instruction Source N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 1 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 2 4 us 0 0 us long word 9 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 4 us 0 0 us long word 8 1 us 0 0 us The NOT instruction is used to invert the source bit by bit one s complement and then place the result in the destination Table 12 10 Truth Table for the NOT Instruction Destination A NOT B Source 1 1 11 11 11 10 11 10 JO JO 10 10 1 1 10 10 Destination O IO 10 JO JO 11 JO 1 J1 11 11 1 JO 10 11 J1 For more information see Using Logical Instructi
123. operates independently from the other NOTE HSCO is used in this document to define how any HSC works The MicroLogix 1500 s HSC1 is identical in functionality IMPORTANT The HSC function can only be used with the controller s embedded I O It cannot be used with expansion I O modules This chapter describes how to use the HSC function and also contains sections on the HSL and RAC instructions as follows High Speed Counter HSC Function File on page 5 2 HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 5 26 RAC Reset Accumulated Value on page 5 27 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 2 Using the High Speed Counter High Speed Counter Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder you see a HSC Function File This file provides access to HSC configuration data and also allows the HSC Function File control program access to all information pertaining to each of the High Speed Counters NOTE If the controller is in the run mode the data within sub element fields may be changing 3 Function Files HSC pto sti Jen atc em MM oar tr Jall ins ESS n PFN Program File Number ER Error Code Ubs User Interrupt Executing UIE User Interrupt Enable UIL User Interrupt Lost UIP User Interrupt Pending FE Function Enabled AS Auto Start ED Error Detected CE Counting Enabled SP Set Parameters LPM Low Preset Mask HPM High Preset Mask UFM Undertlow Mask OFM Overflow Mask LFI Low Pres
124. or a sequence of events Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response of T or F branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program Its primary use is to build OR logic communication scan A part of the controller s operating cycle Communication with devices such as other controllers and operator interface devices takes place during this period control program User logic the application that defines the controllers operation Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Glossary 2 Publication 1762 RMO001C EN P controller A device such as a programmable controller used to control output devices controller overhead A portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping purposes memory checks tests communications etc control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions counter A device that counts the occurrence of some event CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of processor memory that contains I O status and files where user data such as bit integer timers and counters is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN s
125. preset value is reached When the accumulator equals the preset timing stops The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go false regardless of whether the timer has timed out TON timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Table 8 6 Timer Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done Is Set When accumulated value preset value And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs rung state goes false bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung state is true and accumulated value lt preset value e rung state goes false e DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung state Is true rung state goes false Publication 1762 RM001C EN P TOF Timer Off Delay TOF Timer Off Delay t C EN 2 Timer 74 0 Time Base 1 0 CDN gt Preset 0 lt Accum 0 lt Timer and Counter Instructions 8 5 Instruction Type output Table 8 7 Execution Time for the TOF Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 2 9 us 13 0 us MicroLogix 1500 2 5 us 10 9 us Use the TOF instruction to delay turning off an output The TOF instruction begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become false As long as rung conditions remain false the timer increments i
126. set at power up g 007 NVRAM MEMORY Bit S 2 9 is set in the controller and Non Recoverable Transfer the memory module program to the MODULE USER the memory module user program controller and then change to Run mode PROGRAM does not match the controller user MISMATCH program yg 0018 MEMORY MODULE The user program in the memory Non User Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash to be USER PROGRAM module is incompatible with the OS compatible with the memory module INCOMPATIBLE WITH e Obtain a new memory module OS e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 001A USER PROGRAM The user program is incompatible Non User Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash INCOMPATIBLE WITH with the OS e Contact your local Rockwell Automation OS AT POWER UP representative for more information about available operating systems your controller yg 0020 MINOR ERROR AT A minor fault bit bits 0 7 in S 5 was Recoverable Correct the instruction logic causing the END OF SCAN set at the end of scan error DETECTED e Enter the status file display in your programming software and clear the fault e Enter the Run mode g 007 EXPANSION POWER A power failure is present on the Non User Re apply power to the expansion I O bank FAIL EPF expansion I O bank See Important note below MicroLogix 1500 only This error code is present only when the controller is powered
127. starting position from 1 to 82 within the search string An index of 1 indicates the left most character of the string Search is the address of the string you want to examine the position in the Search string where the Source string begins If no match is found result is set equal to zero Result is the location from 1 to 82 that the controller uses to store l Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 28 ASC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address iles Function Files Data Files Mode Level a E je T Parameter 3 Elo E EN e E SF ils 2 58 cs SIP llo l l lz E llela jw lEISislelslels len lon fe b Sf I IE I S SF 1S S Ela la l Slo Source ele elele ele e Index Search e e Result eje elele e e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 26 ASCII Instructions ASR ASCII String Compare ASR ASCII String Compare Source A ST10 8 Source B ST10 9 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Example I1 ASC lE String Search 0 Source ST38 40 Index 35 If input slot 1 bit 10 is set search the string String Search ST52 80 in
128. the timing diagram on page 20 28 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 14 ASCII Instructions ABL Test Buffer for Line Instruction Type output ABL P For Line I EN2 Table 20 11 Execution Time for the ABL Instruction anne Control R60 CDN2 Controller When Instruction Is Characters 1 Error 0 lt lt ER 5 True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 115 us 8 6 us character 12 5 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 94 us 7 6 us character 11 4 us The ABL instruction is used to determine the number of characters in the receive buffer of the specified communication channel up to and including the end of line characters termination This instruction looks for the two termination characters that you configure via the channel configuration screen On a false to true transition the controller reports the number of characters in the POS field of the control data file The channel configuration must be set to ASCI Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 Control is the control data file See page 20 6 Characters are the number of characters in the buffer that the controller finds 0 to 1024 This parameter is read only and resides in word 2 of the control data file Error displays the
129. the status of real world input devices connected to the base unit or Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 7 2 Relay Type Bit Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P expansion I O or internal addresses data or function files Examples of devices that turn on or off e a push button wired to an input addressed as I1 0 4 an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 2 a timer controlling a light addressed as T 3 DN a bit in the bit file addressed as B3 16 The instructions operate as follows Table 7 2 XIO and XIC Instruction Operation Rung State Addressed XIC Instruction XIO Instruction Bit True Off Returns a False Returns a True True On Returns a True Returns a False False Instruction is not evaluated Instruction is not evaluated Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 7 3 XIC and XIO Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address i ion Files E Data Files Function Files Model Level 5 Parameter a 2 E e S ec a T m Bis S v z c ole ll lo lz Elg l i lala ElL l lols o e lal le fo S 2 EG lm SIS E S S alg la ela l 8 la Operand Bit je e e ej ele ejojojojojojojojojojo jojojo ejoj
130. to 63 long word Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 14 16 File Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 14 15 LFL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files ev de Parameter 2 T ec amp 3 S E 9 E 5 E olala eil gE EE EEEE Egg Eiai Source ele elele e e e e ele LIFO ele e e e ele ele Control 2 e Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P File Instructions 14 17 LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload Instruction Type output LFU re Unload L CEU gt Table 14 16 Execution Time for the LFU Instruction LIF N7 0 Dest N7 1 CDN5 Controller Data Size When Rung Is Control R6 0 Length 1 lt CEM True False Position 9 MicroLogix 1200 word 29 1 us 10 4 us long word 31 6 us 10 4 us MicroLogix 1500 word 25 6 us 9 7 us long word 27 4 us 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the LFU instruction un
131. to Saturday status read only DS Disabled RTC 0 DS binary 0 or 1 status read only BL RTC Battery Low RTC 0 BL binary 0 or 1 status read only The following table indicates the expected accuracy of the real time clock for various temperatures Table 3 3 Real Time Clock Accuracy at Various Temperatures Ambient Temperature Accuracy 0 C 32 F 34 to 70 seconds month 25 C 77 F 36 to 68 seconds month 40 C 104 F 29 to 75 seconds month 55 C 131 F 133 to 237 seconds month 1 These numbers are worst case values over a 31 day mo nth Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 3 4 Function Files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Writing Data to the Real Time Clock When valid data is sent to the real time clock from the programming device or another controller the new values take effect immediately In RSLogix 500 click on Set Date amp Time in the RTC Function File screen to set the RTC time to the current time on your PC NOTE You can use a MSG instruction to write RTC data from one controller to another to synchronize time To send write RTC data use RTC 0 as the source This feature not available with the Series A controllers The real time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid date or time data NOTE Use the Disable Clock button in your programming device to disable the real time clock before storing a module This decreases the drain o
132. trim pot 0 High Limit N7 17 This is the data resident in Integer file 7 element 17 The Test Value TPI 0 POTO and High Limit N7 17 are direct addressing examples The Low Limit is immediate addressing Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 4 4 Programming Instructions Overview Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Indirect Addressing Indirect addressing allows components within the address to be used as pointers to other data locations within the controller This functionality can be especially useful for certain types of applications recipe management batch processing and many others Indirect addressing can also be difficult to understand and troubleshoot It is recommended that you only use indirect addressing when it is required by the application being developed The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 support indirection indirect addressing for Files Words and Bits To define which components of an address are to be indirected a closed bracket is used The following examples illustrate how to use indirect addressing Indirect Addressing of a Word B3 0 ADD 0000 J E Add 0 Source A N7 N10 1 0 lt Source B 1234 1234 lt Dest N11 33 0 lt e Address N7 N10 1 e In this example the element number to be used for source A in the ADD instruction is defined by the number located in N10 1 If the value of location N10 1 15 the ADD instruction operates as N7 15 Source B In this ex
133. up 8 9 CTD Count Down Count down 0 9 RES Reset Reset the RTO and counter s ACC and status 8 10 bits not used with TOF timers For information on using the High Speed Counter output s see Using the High Speed Counter on page 5 1 Timer Instructions Timers in a controller reside in a timer file A timer file can be assigned as 0 any unused data file When a data file is used as a timer file each timer verview element within the file has three sub elements These sub elements are e Timer Control and Status Preset This is the value that the timer must reach before the timer times out When the accumulator reaches this value the DN status bit is set TON and RTO only The preset data range is from 0 to 32767 The minimum required update interval is 2 55 seconds regardless of the time base e Accumulator The accumulator counts the time base intervals It represents elapsed time The accumulator data range is from 0 to 32767 Timers can be set to any one of three time bases Table 8 1 Timer Base Settings Time Base Timing Range 0 001 seconds 0 to 32 767 seconds 0 01 seconds 0 to 327 67 seconds 1 00 seconds 0 to 32 767 seconds Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 8 2 Timer and Counter Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Each timer address is made of a 3 word element Word 0 is the control and status word word 1 stores the preset value and word 2 stores the accumulated value Table 8
134. us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 22 3 us 0 0 us long word 26 0 us 0 0 us The SQR instruction calculates the square root of the absolute value of the source and places the rounded result in the destination The data ranges for the source is 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The Carry Math Status Bit is set if the source is negative See Updates to Math Status Bits on page 10 3 for more information Table 10 12 SOR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 2 um Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level e Parameter E E E o F o S zje 5 n E E t o ge 9 a x Sis elslels len lem i le 5l S lz E l5 lala lEs Els e Els e assi Source ele e e e e e e e ele Destination e e ej ej e ele eje 1 See Important note about indirect addressing MPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 10 10 Math Instructions SWP Swap SWP Swap Source 2ST10 1 DATA 0 Length 13 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output Table 10 13 Execution Time for the SWP Instruction Controller MicroL
135. when the message instruction was first processed The buffer and queue mechanisms are completely automatic Buffers are allocated and released as the need arises and message queuing occurs if buffers are full The controller initiates read and write messages through available communication channels when configured for the following protocols e DH 485 e DF1 Full Duplex e DF1 Half Duplex Slave For a description of valid communication protocols see Protocol Configuration on pag eE 1 Communications Instructions 21 3 MSG Message Instruction Type output MSG Read Write Message E 2 Table 21 1 Execution Time for the MSG Instruction MSG File M6G9 0 DN5 Setup Screen ER gt Controller Rung Condition When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Steady State True 20 0 us 6 0 us False to True Transition for Reads 230 0 us False to True Transition for Writes 264 us 1 6 us per word MicroLogix 1500 Steady State True 17 0 us 6 0 us False to True Transition for Reads 198 0 us False to True Transition for Writes 226 us 4 1 4 us per word Any preceding logic on the message rung must be solved true before the message instruction can be processed The example below shows a message instruction B3 0 0000 JE Read Write Message CEN MSG File MG11 0 DN Setup Screen CER If B3 0 is on 1 the MSG rung is true and MG11 0 is not already proce
136. 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs bit12 C5 0 0V OV overflow the accumulated value wraps from 32 767 a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU indicator to 32 768 and continues to count up instruction is enabled bit 13 C5 0 DN DN done accumulated value gt preset value e accumulated value lt preset value or indicator e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit15 C5 0 CU CU countup rung state is true e rung state is false enable e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled Table 8 13 CTD Instruction Counter Control and Status Bits Counter Word 0 Data File 5 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs bit11 C5 0 UN UN underflow the accumulated value wraps from 32 768 a RES instruction with the same address as the CTD indicator to 432 767 and continues to count down instruction is enabled bit13 C5 0 DN DN done accumulated value preset value e accumulated value lt preset value or indicator e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTU instruction is enabled bit 14 C5 0 CD CD count down enable rung state is true e rung state is false e a RES instruction with the same address as the CTD instruc
137. 0 and pass data when set 1 The instruction will not change the value in the destination word unless you set mask bits The mask can be fixed or variable It is fixed if you enter a hexadecimal code It is variable if you enter an element address or a file address direct or indirect for changing the mask with each step The following figure indicates how the SQO instruction works SQ0 Sequencer Output EN 5 File B10 1 Mask OFOF CDN 5 Dest 014 0 Control R6 20 Length 4 Position 2 Destination 0 14 0 External Outputs 0 14 at Step 2 15 87 0 00 0000 0101 10000 1010 01 ON I 02 Mask Value OFOF 03 ON 4 15 87 0 04 0000 41111 10000 1111 05 06 Sequencer Output File B10 1 07 Step 08 ON 0000 0000 0000 10000 J0 09 1010 0010 11111 10101 11 T ON 1111 10101 10100 1010 2 Current Step 1 0101 10101 10101 10101 3 12 0000 1111 10000 1111 J4 13 14 15 Sequencer Instructions 15 7 This instruction uses the following operands Word 0 gyl File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and stored in the destination NOTE If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words e Mask The mask operand contains the mask value When mask bit
138. 0 1 111 1 1 After Move Valid constants for the mask are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word The mask is displayed as a hexadecimal unsigned value from 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 13 7 MVM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 ras Address Address Data Files Function Files und Level Parameter E K nd 3 F ae 3 k z o lola lela EERE mazzel ag Source ele e eje ce ele ele Mask ele e eje c elele ele Destination eje e leje e e eje ele 1 The ST file is not valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors 2 See Important note about indirect addressing You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC IMPORTANT HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status Bits After a MVM instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Table 13 8 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry always resets S 0 1 Overflow always resets S
139. 0 2 Zero Bit sets if destination is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if the MSB of the destination is set otherwise resets File Instructions Chapter 14 The file instructions perform operations on file data Instruction Used To Page COP Copy File Copy a range of data from one file 14 2 location to another FLL Fill File Load a file with a program constant ora 14 3 value from an element address BSL Bit Shift Left Load and unload data into a bit array one 14 4 bit at a ti BSR Bit Shift Right pape ee 14 6 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in 14 8 th der first in first out FFU First In First Out FIFO Sane UPL In MSE 14 11 Unload LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load Load words into a file and unload them in 14 14 der last in first out LFU Last In First Out LIFO OREO TIS OUD 14 17 Unload Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 14 2 File Instructions COP Copy File COP Copy File Source N7 0 Dest N7 1 Length 1 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output Table 14 1 Execution Time for the COP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 19 08 us 0 8 us word 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 15 9 us 0 67 us word 0 0 us The COP instruction copies blocks of data from one location into another Table 14 2 COP Instruction Valid Addressing Mode
140. 0 IS long word 2 147 483 648 to status read write 19 15 32 bitINT 2 147 483 647 AD Altered Derivative Term PD10 0 AD long word 2 147 483 648 to status read only 19 15 32 bitINT 2 147 483 647 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Process Control Instruction 19 9 Controller Gain K Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access KC Controller Gain K PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write Gain K word 3 is the proportional gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 or 0 to 327 67 when RG 1 Set this gain to one half the value needed to cause the output to oscillate when the reset and rate terms below are set to zero NOTE Controller gain is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 19 13 Reset Term T Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access Tl Reset Term T PD10 0 Ti word 0 to 32 767 control read write INT Reset T word 4 is the Integral gain ranging from 0 to 3276 7 when RG 0 or 327 67 when RG 1 minutes per repeat Set the reset time equal to the natural period measured in the above gain calibration A value of 1 adds the maximum integral term into the PID equation NOTE Reset term is affected by the reset and gain range RG bit Fo
141. 0 L Mn Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 8 Communications Instructions Example 3 Local DF1 Half Duplex Network Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 0 or RS 232 higher SLC 9 03 SLC 5 04 and um DF1 Half Duplex Protocol SLC 5 05 or PLC 5 processors configured for DF1 Half Duplex Master LU eese Modem S14 cs oN 7 E MicroLogix MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 Slave 1200 Slave 1500 Slave SLC 5 04 Slave SLC 5 03 with 1747 KE Interface Module Slave NOTE It is recommended that isolation 1761 NET AIC be provided between the controller and the modem N Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Communications Instructions 21 9 Configuring a Local Message Setup Screen Message The rung below shows a MSG instruction preceded by conditional logic Access the message setup screen by double clicking Setup Screen B3 0 MSG 0000 Read Write Message 0 MSG File MG11 0 Setup Screen The RSLogix Message Setup Screen is shown below This screen is used to setup This Controller Target Device and Control Bits Descriptions of each of the elements follow za MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 This Controller Control Bits 3 Communication Command 500CP
142. 00 must use the remote bridge link ID of the passthru device In this example the SLC 5 04 on Link ID1 node 17 is the passthru device Passthru Link ID Set the Passthru Link ID in the General tab on the Channel Configuration screen The Link ID value is a user defined number between 1 and 65 535 All devices that can initiate remote messages and are connected to the local network must have the same number for this variable Channel Configuration Chan 0 System System Driver DH485 User Driver Shutdown Memon Module Overwrite Protected Passthru Link ID dec Edit Resource Owner Timeout x 1sec ER Iv Comme Servicing Selection v Message Servicing Selection Communications Instructions 21 21 MSG Instruction Error When the processor detects an error during the transfer of message data Codes the processor sets the ER bit and enters an error code that you can monitor from your programming software Error Code Description of Error Condition 02H Targetnode is busy NAK No Memory retries by link layer exhausted i asi i i a wt OW OC C C 03H Target node cannot respond because message is too large 04H Target node cannot respond because it does not understand the command parameters OR the control block may have been inadvertently modified
143. 01 When clear 0 this bit allows the reset minutes repeat value and the gain multiplier value to be evaluated with a reset multiplier of 0 1 and a gain multiplier of 0 1 Example with the RG bit set The reset term TD of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0 01 minutes repeat 0 6 seconds repeat is applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error is multiplied by 0 01 and applied to the PID algorithm Example with the RG bit clear The reset term TD of 1 indicates that the integral value of 0 1 minutes repeat 6 0 seconds repeat is applied to the PID integral algorithm The gain value KC of 1 indicates that the error is multiplied by 0 1 and applied to the PID algorithm NOTE The rate multiplier TD is not affected by this selection Setpoint Scaling SC Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SC Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit 0 or 1 control read write The SC bit is cleared when setpoint scaling values are specified Loop Update Too Fast TF Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TF Loop Update Too PD10 0 TF binary bit 0 or 1 status read write Fast The TF bit is set by the PID algorithm if the loop update time specified cannot be achieved by the controller due to scan time limitations If this bit is set
144. 03 02 01 00 0 EN gyl DN EM ER Uie RN Ep Error Code Byte 1 Number of characters specified to be sent or received LEN 2 Number of characters actually sent or received POS C oO 5 CO 7 8 EN Enable Bit indicates that an instruction is enabled due to a false to true transition This bit remains set until the instruction completes execution or generates an error EU Queue Bit when set indicates that an ASCII instruction was placed in the ASCII queue This action is delayed if the queue is already filled DN Asynchronous Done Bit is set when an instruction successfully completes its operation EM Synchronous Done Bit not used ER Error Bit when set indicates that an error occurred while executing the instruction UL Unload Bit when this bit is set by the user the nstruction does not execute If the instruction is already executing operation ceases If this bit is set while an instruction is executing any data already processed is sent to the destination and any remaining data is not processed Setting this bit will not cause instructions to be removed from the ASCII queue This bit is only examined when the instruction is ready to start executing RN Running Bit when set indicates that the queued instruction is executing FD Found Bit when set indicates that the instruction has found the end of line or termination character in the buffer only use
145. 05H Local processor is off line possible duplicate node situation 06H Target node cannot respond because requested function is not available 07H Target node does not respond 08H Target node cannot respond 09H Local modem connection has been lost OBH Target node does not accept this type of MSG instruction OCH Received a master link reset one possible source is from the DF1 master 10H Target node cannot respond because of incorrect command parameters or unsupported command 12H Local channel configuration protocol error exists 13H Local MSG configuration error in the Remote MSG parameters 15H Local channel configuration parameter error exists 16H Target or Local Bridge address is higher than the maximum node address 17H Local service is not supported 18H Broadcast is not supported 21H Bad MSG file parameter for building message 30H PCCC Description Remote station host is not there disconnected or shutdown 37H Message timed out in local processor 39H Local communication channel reconfigured while MSG active 3AH STS in the reply from target is invalid 40H PCCC Description Host could not complete function due to hardware fault 45H MSG reply cannot be processed Either Insufficient data in MSG read reply or bad network address parameter 50H Target node is out of memory 60H Target node cannot respond because file is protected 70H PCCC Description Processor is in Program Mode 80H PCCC Description Compatibility mode file missin
146. 1 B51 89 10 B51 10 B51 58 42 B51 42 B51 90 11 B51 11 B51 59 43 B51 43 B51 91 12 B51 12 B51 60 44 B51 44 B51 92 13 B51 13 B51 61 45 B51 45 B51 93 14 B51 14 B51 62 46 B51 46 B51 94 15 B51 15 B51 63 47 B51 47 B51 95 The bit number displayed on the DAT corresponds to the data bit as illustrated in the table The protection bit defines whether the data is editable or read only When the protection bit is set 1 the corresponding data address is considered read only by the DAT The Protected LED illuminates whenever a read only element is active on the DAT display When the protection bit is clear 0 or the protection bit does not exist the Protected LED is off and the data within the corresponding address is editable from the DAT keypad Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 3 12 Function Files Base Hardware Information Function File Publication 1762 RM001C EN P IMPORTANT Although the DAT does not allow protected data to be changed from its keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target bit file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten NOTE Remaining addresses within the target file can be used without restrictions addresses B51 96 and above in this example The DAT always starts at bit 0 of a
147. 10 CLR instruction 10 6 common techniques used in this manual P 2 communication instructions 21 1 communication protocols DF1 full duplex F 5 DF1 half duplex 6 DH485 E 2 Modbus Slave RTU 9 communication scan G 1 communications active status bit C 17 channel 0 status C 16 mode selection status bit C 17 status file 3 13 compare instructions 9 7 compiler revision build number status C 21 release status C 21 contacting Allen Bradley for assistance P 3 contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance D 9 control profile G 2 control program G 1 control register error status bit C 11 controller definition G 2 fault messages D 2 mode C 7 mode status C 4 overhead A 7 B 6 G 2 status file C 1 conversion instructions 11 7 convert from binary coded decimal BCD instruction 77 4 convert to binary coded decimal BCD instruction 1 1 8 COP instruction 14 2 copy file instruction 14 2 count down instruction 8 9 count up instruction 8 9 counters counter file 8 7 counter file and status bits 8 8 definition G 2 how counters work 8 7 CPU central processing unit definition G 2 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P CS function file 3 13 CTD instruction 8 9 CTU instruction 8 9 D DAT configuration 3 9 function file 3 9 data file overwrite protection lost status bit C 18 data files 2 2 2 5 bit B 2 5 control R 2 5 counter C 8 7 I O images for expansion modules MicroLogix 1200 1 4 I O images for expansion modules MicroLogix 1500
148. 10 TAB 4375 Record 2 21 00 00 TAB 2275 TAB 8150 TAB 4335 Record 3 21 30 00 TAB 2380 TAB 8195 TAB 4360 Record 4 22 00 00 TAB 2293 TAB 8390 TAB 4375 Record 5 22 30 00 TAB 2301 TAB 8400 TAB 4405 Record 6 23 00 00 TAB 2308 TAB 8100 TAB 4395 String Length of Record The size of a record is limited so that the length of the maximum formatted string does not exceed 80 characters The following table can be used to determine the formatted string length Data Memory Consumed Formatted String Size delimiter 0 bytes 1 character word 2 bytes 6 characters long word 4 bytes 11 characters date 2 bytes 10 characters time 2 bytes 8 characters Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 22 5 For queue 5 the formatted string length is 29 characters as shown below Data Time N7 11 11 3 0 1122 1 Characters 8 1 6 1 16 1 J6 8412462412464146 29characters Number of Records Using Queue 5 as an example each record consumes Record Field Memory Consumption Time 2 bytes N7 11 2 bytes 11 3 0 2 bytes 11 2 1 2 bytes Integrity Check 2 bytes Total 10 bytes Each record consumes 10 bytes So if only one queue was configured the maximum number of records that could be stored would be 4915 The maximum number of records is calculated by Maximum Number of Records Data Log File Size Record Size 48K bytes 10 bytes 48 1024 10 4915 records
149. 1094 us 719s MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 89 3 us 10 8 us The AHL instruction is used to set or reset the RS 232 Request to Send RTS handshake control line for a modem The controller uses the two masks to determine whether to set or reset the RTS control line or leave it unchanged The channel configuration must be set to ASCII NOTE Make sure the automatic modem control used by the port does not conflict with this instruction Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O0 or Channel 1 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P ASCII Instructions 20 21 e AND Mask is the mask used to reset the RTS control line Bit 1 corresponds to the RTS control line A value of 1 in the AND mask resets the RTS control line a value of 0 leaves the line unchanged The valid data range for the mask is from 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal OR Mask is the mask used to set the RTS control line Bit 1 corresponds to the RTS control line A value of 1 in the OR mask sets the RTS control line a value of 0 leaves the line unchanged The valid data range for the mask is from 0000 to FFFF hexadecimal Control is the control data file See page 20 6 Channel Status displays the current status 0000 to 001F of the handshake lines for the specified channel This status is read o
150. 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 0 EN 0 pn oy3 0 0 0 0 0 10 JO 10 0 l0 J0 0 1 FSZ File Size number of records allocated 2 RST Records Stored number of records recorded 1 EN Enable Bit 2 DN Done Bit 3 OV Overflow Bit Data Logging Enable EN When the DLG instruction rung is true the Data Logging Enable EN is set 1 and the DLG instruction records the defined data set To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q EN where Q is the queue number Data Logging Done DN The Data Logging Done DN bit is used to indicate when the associated queue is full This bit is set 1 by the DLG instruction when the queue becomes full This bit is cleared when a record is retrieved from the queue To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q DN were Q is the queue number Data Logging Overflow OV The Data Logging Overflow OV bit is used to indicate when a record gets overwritten in the associated queue This bit is set 1 by the DLG instruction when a record is overwritten Once set the OV bit remains set until you clear 0 it To address this bit in ladder logic use the format DLS0 Q OV where Q is the queue number Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 22 10 Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Publication 1762 RM001C EN P File Size FSZ File Size FSZ shows the number of rec
151. 1762 RM001C EN P Programming Instructions Memory Usage and Execution Time Appendix A MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time This appendix contains a complete list of the MicroLogix 1200 programming instructions The list shows the memory usage and instruction execution time for each instruction Execution times using indirect addressing and a scan time worksheet are also provided The table below lists the execution times and memory usage for the programming instructions These values depend on whether you are using word or long word as the data format Table A 1 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words ASCII Test Buffer for Line ABL 12 5 115 8 6 3 3 Long Word addressing level does not apply char ASCII Number of Characters in ACB 12 1 103 1 3 3 Buffer char ASCII Clear Buffer ACL 0 0 clear 1 2 Long Word addressing level does not apply both 249 1 receive 28 9 transmit 33 6 ASCII String Concatenate ACN 0 0 n 115 20 char Add ADD 0 0 2 7 3 3 0 0 11 9 3 5 ASCII String Extract AEX 0 0 14 84 29 2 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply char ASCII Handshake Lines AHL 113 034 5 3 ASCII Integer to String AIC 0
152. 1C EN P Process Control Instruction 19 7 The table below shows the output parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Output Parameters Output Parameter Descriptions Address Data Format Range Type User Program For More Access Information CV Control Variable User defined word INT 0 to 16 383 control read write 19 7 CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT 0 to 100 control read write 19 7 SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT 0 to 16383 status read only 19 7 Control Variable CV Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access CV Control Variable User defined word INT 0 to 16 383 control read write The CV Control Variable is user defined See the ladder rung below PID 0000 PID PID File PD10 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N7 1 Setup Screen Control Variable Percent CVP Output Parameter Address Data Range Type _ User Program Descriptions Format Access CVP Control Variable Percent PD10 0 CVP word INT O to 100 control read write CVP Control Variable Percent displays the control variable as a percentage The range is 0 to 100 If the PD10 0 AM bit is off automatic mode this value tracks the control variable CV output Any value written
153. 2 Updates to Math Status Bits 6 44450 e4s454 00645 10 3 ADD Add SUB Subtract cc Wi x ee ie s 10 4 MUL Multiply DIV Divide o oo uaaa esses 10 5 NEG CN CBA ira S399 ard b RUE HERR DES da Beg ha n SORE 10 6 CLR Gleh ts Sn tid deed Sante baw Ase Creat da b ot Sect 10 6 SGT Seale dex dicar oi a SON SE A RAG OU Ot 10 7 SCP Scale with Parameters sq50 eite weadod poy Ha ONE By 10 8 SQR quare ROO pra we Lee eee eh he o Gr Reb 10 9 WPS Sa is 4 nth oe eaten oth RERUM 10 10 Chapter 11 Using Decode and Encode Instructions 11 1 DCD Decode 4 to T 0 16 c Vy RACE WC CERRO ROA 11 2 ENC Encode 1 0f 16 to4 llle 11 3 FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD 11 4 TOD Convert to Binary Coded Decimal BCD 11 8 Chapter 12 Using Logical Instructions d evn ree ese had eed 12 1 Updates to Math Status Bits 5 2S 29 Lex Sees REOS TES 12 2 AND Bit Wise AND sa tetro qe ever 12 3 OR Logical e Lascoraotat aio e top oboe tede iet 12 4 XOR Exclusive OR oan Pease OES ESOS OR ESR EONS SG 12 5 INCOT Logical NOT prape duani a Ferte Whang e ob th ah Ge t 12 6 Chapter 13 MEOS TONES qae osse eae te ae pen Er Pet Pen blc d 13 1 MVM Masked Move a Sd eq AEn a Recte ddr so nae tuse 13 3 Chapter 14 COP CODI EI jul cht OF ac Eee Rotor e ordeo d 14 2 FELA 31 IBS MERYCRERET RERO tae A ia 14 3 BSL BitaShitt Delo o d aeciet oar ois Red HEP aer eee RS 14 4 BSR Bit Shift Right pra nk ot d
154. 2 Using the High Speed Counter Publication 1762 RM001C EN P High Preset Reached HPR Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access HPR High HSC 0 HPR bi Preset Reached t 2 t07 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The HPR High Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value CHSC 0 ACC is greater than or equal to the high preset variable HSC 0 HIP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Underflow UF Description Address Data Format ysc Modes Type User Program Access UF Underflow HSC 0 UF bit 0to7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The UF Underflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value C HSC 0 ACC has counted through the underflow variable HSC 0 UNF This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the underflow condition Underflow conditions do not generate a controller fault Underflow Mask UFM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UFM HSC 0 UFM bit 2107 control read write Underflow Mask 1 For Mode descripti
155. 24AWA A A FRN1 March 2000 Initial product release 1762 L24BWA 1762 L40AWA 1762 L40BWA 1762 L24AWA A B FRN2 May 2000 The trim pots trimming potentiometers on the controller 1762 L24BWA operated in reverse of the ladder logic Corrected 1762 L40AWA 1762 L40BWA 1762 L24AWA B A FRN3 November 2000 MicroLogix 1200 controllers now offer 1762 L24BWA e Full ASCII read write 1762 L40AWA e PTO Controlled Stop 1762 L40BWA e PWM Ramping e RTC and String Messaging e Static Data File Protection e Comms Reset Pushbutton Bit 1762 L24BXB B A FRN3 November 2000 Initial product release Supports all the features listed above 1762 L40BXB for the 1762 L24xWA and 1762 L40xWA controllers Publication 1762 RM001C EN P November 2000 Summary of Changes MicroLogix 1500 Catalog Series Revision Firmware Release Date Enhancement Number Letter Letter Release No 1764 LSP A B FRN2 February 1999 Initial product release 1764 LSP A C FRN3 October 1999 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers with 1764 LSP Processor can now be used with Compact I O Bulletin 1769 Expansion Cables and Power Supplies 1764 SP B A FRN4 April 2000 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers with 1764 LSP Processor can now use e String Data File Type e ASCII Instruction Set Support e Modbus RTU Slave protocol e Ramping when using PWM outputs e Static Data File Protection e RTC Messaging 1764 LRP B A FRN4 April 2000 Initial product release Micro
156. 255 3 retries ENQ retries 0 to 255 3 retries Stop Bits not a setting always 1 1 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P E 6 X Protocol Configuration DF1 Half Duplex Protocol Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P DF1 Half Duplex protocol provides a multi drop single master multiple slave network DF1 Half Duplex protocol supports data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 In contrast to DF1 Full Duplex communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use the RS 232 port on the MicroLogix controller as both a Half Duplex programming port and a Half Duplex peer to peer messaging port DF1 Half Duplex Operation The master device initiates all communication by polling each slave device The slave device may only transmit message packets when it is polled by the master It is the master s responsibility to poll each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to communicate During a polling sequence the master polls a slave either repeatedly until the slave indicates that it has no more message packets to transmit or just one time per polling sequence depending on how the master is configured An additional feature of the DF1 Half Duplex protocol is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG instruction in its ladder program to send or request data to from another slave When the initiating slave is polled the MSG inst
157. 2768 to 32767 The accumulated value is incremented CTU or decremented CTD on each false to true rung transition The accumulated value is retained when the rung condition again becomes false and when power is cycled on the controller The accumulated count is retained until cleared by a reset RES instruction that has the same address as the counter Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Timer and Counter Instructions NOTE The counter continues to count when the accumulator is greater than the CTU preset and when the accumulator is less than the CTD preset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 8 11 CTD and CTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files Address Address Maias Mode Level e E Je T Parameter E o le 9 S c a a 7358 k 5E o SIP B le le l lz E l z la l2 EIE lZ l S lela ol len fon fe os l Elk SE GB lm Es else E al la Sic Counter e Preset e e Accumulator 1 Valid for Counter Files only Using Counter File Control and Status Bits Like the accumulated value the counter status bits are also retentive until reset as described below Table 8 12 CTU Instruction Counter Control and Status Bits Counter Word
158. 3 8 0 0 44 7 6 0 Sequencer Compare sac 6 3 20 1 3 9 6 3 22 44 Sequencer Load SOL 6 3 19 1 3 4 6 3 21 1 3 9 Sequencer Output S00 6 3 20 0 3 9 6 3 23 1 44 Square Root SOR 0 0 22 3 1 5 0 0 26 0 25 Selectable Timed Interrupt Start STS 0 0 50 7 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Publication 1762 RMO001C EN P B 4 MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Table B 1 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words Subtract SUB 0 0 29 3 3 0 0 112 3 5 Suspend SUS N A N A 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Service Communications svel 0 0 166 1 4 1 0 service one channel word Service Communications 0 0 327 1 4 1 0 service two channels word Swap SWP 0 0 117418 115 swapped word Temporary End TND 0 0 1 0 0 5 Convert to BCD TOD 0 0 14 3 1 8 Off Delay Timer TOF 10 9 2 5 3 9 On Delay Timer TON 2 5 15 5 3 9 User Interrupt Disable UID 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Enable UIE 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Flush UIF 0 0 10 6 0 9 Examine if Closed XIC 0 0 0 9 1 0 Examine if Open XIO 0 0 0 9 1 0 Exclusive Or XOR 0 0 2 3 2 8 0 0 8 9 3 0 1 Only valid for MicroLogix 1500 Series
159. 3 us MicroLogix 1500 26 1 us 1 07 us word 1 4 us If you wish to shift more than one bit per scan you must create a loop in your application using the JMP LBL and CTU instructions The BSR instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The data is shifted right through the array then unloaded one bit at a time The following figure shows the operation of the BSR instruction Unload Bit R6 0 10 4 4 145 44 43 42 M M0 39 38 3 36 35 134 33 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 ag 38BitAray INVALID eg es e7 jee amp a gt P Data block is shifted one bit at atime from bit 69 to bit 32 Source Bit 23 06 This instruction uses the following operands File The file operand is the address of the bit array that is to be manipulated Control The control operand is the address of the BSR s control element The control element consists of 3 words LEO CO ACRIOR OR ERUNT Word 0 DNI2 ERS uL not used Word 1 Size of bit array number of bits Word2 not used 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the bit array has shifted one position 3 ER Error Bit when set indicates that the in
160. 32 767 control read write 19 9 TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary Oor 1 control read write 19 10 LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1 to 1024 control read write 19 10 ZCD Zero Crossing Deadband PD10 0 7CD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 19 11 FF Feed Forward Bias PD10 0 FF word INT 16 383 to 416 383 control read write 19 11 SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 432 767 status read only 19 11 AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM binary bit 0 or 1 control read write 19 12 CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM binary bit 0 or 1 control read write 19 12 DB PV in Deadband PD10 0 DB binary bit 00r 1 status read write 19 12 RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit 0 or 1 control read write 19 13 SC Setpoint Scaling PD10 0 SC binary bit 0 or 1 control read write 19 13 TF Loop Update Too Fast PD10 0 TF binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 19 13 DA Derivative Action Bit PD10 0 DA binary bit 00r 1 control read write 19 14 UL CV Upper Limit Alarm PD10 0 UL binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 19 14 LL CV Lower Limit Alarm PD10 0 LL binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 19 14 SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 19 14 PV PV Out of Range PD10 0 PV binary bit 0 or 1 status read write 19 15 DN Done PD10 0 DN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only 19 15 EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only 19 15 IS Integral Sum PD10
161. 4 3 Addressing Modes The MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 support three types of data addressing e Immediate e Direct e ndirect The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 do not support indexed addressing Indexed addressing can be duplicated with indirect addressing See Example Using Indirect Addressing to Duplicate Indexed Addressing on page 4 7 How or when each type is used depends on the instruction being programmed and the type of elements specified within the operands of the instruction By supporting these three addressing methods the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 allow incredible flexibility in how data can be monitored or manipulated Each of the addressing modes are described below Immediate Addressing Immediate addressing is primarily used to assign numeric constants within instructions For example You require a 10 second timer so you program a timer with a 1 second time base and a preset value of 10 The numbers 1 and 10 in this example are both forms of immediate addressing Direct Addressing When you use direct addressing you define a specific data location within the controller Any data location that is supported by the elements of an operand within the instruction being programmed can be used In this example we are illustrating a limit instruction where Low Limit Numeric value from 32 768 to 32 767 entered from the programming software Test Value TPI 0 POTO This is the current position value of
162. 500 Proportional Integral Derivative PID instruction The PID instruction is an output instruction that controls physical properties such as temperature pressure liquid level or flow rate using process loops The PID instruction normally controls a closed loop using inputs from an analog input module and providing an output to an analog output module For temperature control you can convert the analog output to a time proportioning on off output for driving a heater or cooling unit An example appears on page 19 17 The PID instruction can be operated in the timed mode or the Selectable Time Interrupt STI mode In the timed mode the instruction updates its output periodically at a user selectable rate In the STI mode the instruction should be placed in an STI interrupt subroutine It then updates its output every time the STI subroutine is scanned The STI time interval and the PID loop update rate must be the same in order for the equation to execute properly See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 18 12 for more information on STI interrupts PID closed loop control holds a process variable at a desired set point A flow rate fluid level example is shown below Feed Forward Bias Set Point Error PID L g Equation L Flow Rate Process Control Variable Output Level EX Detector z Control Valve The PID equation controls the process by sending an output
163. 7 45 33 available position 9 in this case Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 File Instructions 14 9 This instruction uses the following operands e Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the FIFO stack The address level of the source must match the FIFO stack If FIFO is a word size file source must be a word value or constant If FIFO is a long word size file source must be a long word value or constant The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word e FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words m 15 n gu wm 939195 5 18 13 12 0519 Word0 gN l DN leM not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source The
164. 762 RM001C EN P To reset the accumulator of a retentive timer use an RES instruction See RES Reset on page 8 10 How Counters Work Timer and Counter Instructions 8 7 The figure below demonstrates how a counter works The count value must remain in the range of 32 768 to 32 767 If the count value goes above 32 767 the counter status overflow bit OV is set 1 If the count goes below 32 768 the counter status underflow bit UN is set 1 A reset RES instruction is used to reset 0 the counter 32 768 0 32 767 Count Up Counter Accumulator Value Count Down Underflow Overflow Using the CTU and CTD Instructions Counter instructions use the following parameters Counter This is the address of the counter within the data file All counters are 3 word data elements Word 0 contains the Control and Status Bits Word 1 contains the Preset and Word 2 contains the Accumulated Value Word Bit 15 14 13 12 11 1109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Word 0 CU CD DN OV UN Not Used Word 1 Preset Value Word 2 Accumulated Value CU Count Up Enable Bit CD Count Down Enable Bit DN Count Done Bit OV Count Overflow Bit UN Count Underflow Bit Preset When the accumulator reaches this value the DN bit is set The preset data range is from 32768 to 32767 e Accumulator The accumulator contains the current count The accumulator data range is from 3
165. 8 509 510 511 512 512 513 514 515 516 517 518 519 Function Code 2 Message Counter Read Discrete Input Image 520 Function Code 3 Message Counter Read Single Holding Register 521 Function Code 4 Message Counter Read Single Input Register 522 Function Code 5 Message Counter Set Clear Single Output Coil 523 Function Code 6 Message Counter Read Write Single Holding Register 524 Function Code 8 Message Counter Run Diagnostics 525 Function Code 15 Message Counter Set Clear for Block of Output Coils 526 Function Code 16 Message Counter Read Write for Block of Holding Registers 527 Modem Status A e mAb mA mA S A A A m5 SA A mA mA AI SAS SASI SAS Re SA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA mA SE mA AJS 00 10 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 31 4 528 Total messages responded to by this slave 529 Total messages to this Slave 530 Total Messages Seen 531 Link Layer Error Count 532 Link Layer Error 501 to 31566 Read Only System Status File 4 0001 to 40256 Read Write Modbus Holding Register space 3 6 16 41501 to 41566 Read Write System Status File 3 6 16 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Protocol Configuration E 11 The controller responds to the Modbus command function codes listed in Table E 6 below Ta
166. ASCII queue is full the instruction waits until the next program scan to determine if it can enter the ASCII queue The controller continues executing other instructions while the ASCII port control instruction is waiting to enter the queue Programming ASCII Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCIT instruction with conditional logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0 5 second or greater Do not continuously generate streams of ASCII data out of a communications port IMPORTANT If ASCII write instructions execute continuously you may not be able to re establish communications with RSLogix 500 when the controller is placed into the RUN mode Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 4 ASCII Instructions Protocol Overview Publication 1762 RM001C EN P MicroLogix 1200 Series A and later and MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later The AWA and AWT instructions only successfully transmit an ASCH string out of the RS 232 port when the channel is configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol If the RS 232 port is configured for any protocol other than DF1 Full Duplex the AWA and AWT instructions will error out with an error code of 9 DF1 Full Duplex packets take precedence over ASCII strings so if an AWA or AWT instruction is triggered while a DF1 Full Duplex packet is being transmitted the ASCII instructi
167. Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 6 binary 0 or 1 status read only This bit is set 1 by the controller to indicate that 1 or more inputs or outputs are forced When this bit is clear a force condition is not present within the controller Fault Override At Power Up System Status File C 5 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 8 binary 0 or 1 control read only When set 1 causes the controller to clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 at power up The power up mode is determined by the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only and the Power Up Mode Behavior Selection bit S 1 12 See also FO Fault Override on page 3 7 Startup Protection Fault Address Data Format Range Type 1 9 binary 0 or 1 control User Program Access read only When set 1 and the controller powers up in the RUN or REM RUN mode the controller executes the User Fault Routine prior to the execution of the first scan of your program You have the option of clearing the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 to resume operation If the User Fault Routine does not clear bit 1 13 the controller faults and does not enter an executing mode Program the User Fault Routine logic accordingly NOTE When executing the startup protection fault routine S 6 major error fault code contains the value 0016H
168. An error occurred in the PTO Recoverable or See the Error Code in the PTO Function File for instruction configuration Non User the specific error 003C PWM ERROR An error occurred in the PWM Recoverable or See the Error Code in the PWM Function File instruction configuration Non User for the specific error Publication 1762 RM001C EN P D 6 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 003D INVALID SEQUENCER A sequencer instruction SOO SOC Recoverable Correct the user program then re compile LENGTH POSITION SOL length position parameter is reload the program and enter the Run mode greater than 255 003E INVALID BIT SHIFT OR A BSR or BSL instruction length Recoverable Correct the user program or allocate more LIFO FIFO parameter is greater than 2048 or an data file space using the memory map then PARAMETER FFU FFL LFU LFL instruction length reload and Run parameter is greater than 128 word file or greater than 64 double word file 003F COP FLL OUTSIDE OF A COP or FLL instruction length Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the DATA FILE SPACE parameter references outside of the length and parameter do not point outside entire data space of the data file space e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode 0050 CONTROLLER TYPE A particular controller type was Non User e Con
169. An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the same Error physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example PWMO and PWM1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Yes No No Output An invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output 3 are the only valid Error choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present 1 No No Yes Hardstop This error is generated whenever a hardstop is detected This error does not Error fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the hardstop condition is removed 2 No No Yes Output The configured PWM output 2 or 3 is currently forced The forced condition Forced must be removed for the PWM to operate This error does not fault the Error controller It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed 3 Yes Yes No Frequency The frequency value is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 This error faults Error the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 4 Reserved 5 Yes Yes No Duty Cycle The PWM duty cycle is either less than zero or greater than 1000 Error This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 26 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Chapter Rela
170. C1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care fT rising edge j falling edge Table 5 5 HSC Mode 1 Examples NOTE used Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being HSC Mode 1 Up Counter with External Reset and Hold Input Terminals 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CEBit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 111 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Not Used Reset Hold Example 1 il on U Toff off Jon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count 1 0 0 Example 2 on IU Toff on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example3 on U loff off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 4 on U off on U Toff Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 5 Il Clear accumulator 0 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care f rising edge U fa ling edge NOTE used Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 18 Table 5 6 HSC Mode 2 Examples Using the High Speed Counter HSC Mode 2 Counter with External Direction Input Terminals 1 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11
171. D 055 77 4D 115 IM 109 16D 155 m AN 14 OE 016 ISO 46 2E 056 78 4E 116 IN 110 6E 156 n Q 15 OF 017 JSI 47 2F 057 79 4F 117 10 111 6F 157 o AP 16 10 020 IDLE 48 30 060 10 80 50 120 P 112 70 180 p Q 17 11 021 DC1 149 31 061 1 81 51 121 Q 113 171 161 q AR 18 12 022 DC2 50 32 062 2 82 52 122 R 114 372 162 r S 19 13 023 DC3 51 33 063 13 83 53 123 S 115 173 163 s T 20 14 024 DC4 52 34 064 l4 84 54 124 JT 116 174 164 t AU 21 15 025 INAK 53 35 065 I5 85 55 125 JU 117 75 165 Ju y 22 16 026 SYN 154 36 066 J6 86 56 126 IV 118 76 166 v W 123 17 027 ETB 55 37 067 17 87 57 127 W 119 77 167 w X 24 18 030 CAN 56 38 070 l8 88 58 130 X 120 178 170 x AY 25 19 031 EM 57 39 071 9 89 59 131 Y 121 79 71 y AZ 26 1A 032 SUB 58 3A 072 90 5A 132 Z 122 7A 172 z 27 1B 033 JESC 59 3B 073 91 5B 133 123 7B 173 H 28 1C 034 FS 60 3C 07 4 lt 92 5C 134 N 124 7C 174 29 1D 035 IGS 61 3D 07 5 l 93 5D 135 125 7D 1755 1 AA 30 1E 036 RS 62 3E 07 6 94 5E 136 126 7E 176 J 31 1F 037 JUS 63 3F 077 q 95 5F 137 127 7F 177 DEL The standard ASCII character set includes values up to 127 decimal 7F hex The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Controllers also support an extended character set decimal 128 to 255 However the extended character set may display different characters depending on the platform you are using Decimal values 0 throu
172. DB SP Error range DB Time Zero crossing is deadband control that lets the instruction use the error for computational purposes as the process variable crosses into the deadband until it crosses the setpoint Once it crosses the setpoint error crosses zero and changes sign and as long as it remains in the deadband the instruction considers the error value zero for computational purposes Select deadband by entering a value in the deadband storage word word 9 in the control block The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value you enter A value of zero inhibits this feature The deadband has the same scaled units as the setpoint if you choose scaling Output Alarms You may set an output alarm on the control variable at a selected value above and or below a selected output percent When the instruction detects that the control variable has exceeded either value it sets an alarm bit bit LL for lower limit bit UL for upper limit in the PID instruction Alarm bits are reset by the instruction when the control variable comes back inside the limits The instruction does not prevent the control variable from exceeding the alarm values unless you select output limiting Select upper and lower output alarms by entering a value for the upper alarm CVH and lower alarm CVL Alarm values are specified as a percentage of the output If you do not want alarms enter zero and 100 respectively for lower and upper
173. Data Format usc Modes Type User Program Access OF Overflow HSC 0 OF bit 0 to 7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The OF Overflow status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACO has counted through the overflow variable HSC 0 OF This bit is transitional and is set by the HSC sub system It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear 0 the overflow condition Overflow conditions do not generate a controller fault Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 14 Using the High Speed Counter Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Overflow Mask OFM Description Address Data Format usc Modes Type User Program Access OFM Overflow HSC 0 OFM bi Mask t 0to7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The OFM Overflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow an overflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and an overflow reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Overflow Interrupt OFI Description Address Data Format WSC Modes Type User Program Access OFI Overflow HSC 0 OFI bi Interrupt t 0 to 7 status r
174. Data is transferred from the controller to a programming or storage device watchdog timer A timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it causes a fault write To send data to another device For example the processor writes data to another device with a message write instruction A ABL instruction 20 14 ACB instruction 20 15 accuracy timer 8 3 ACI instruction 20 16 ACL instruction 20 7 ACN instruction 20 18 active nodes status C 14 ADD instruction 10 4 address G 1 addressing direct addressing 4 3 1 0 1 7 immediate addressing 4 3 indirect addressing 4 4 indirect addressing of a bit 4 6 indirect addressing of a file 4 5 indirect addressing of a word 4 4 modes 4 3 using in line indirection 20 29 AEX instruction 20 19 AHL instruction 20 20 AIC instruction 20 8 AIC Advanced Interface Converter G 1 Allen Bradley contacting for assistance P 3 D 9 support P 3 allow future access setting 2 10 AND instruction 12 3 application G 1 ARD instruction 20 22 arithmetic flags C 3 ARL instruction 20 23 ASC instruction 20 25 ASCII definition G 7 ASCII character set 20 31 ASCII clear buffers instruction 20 7 ASCII control data file 20 6 ASCII file 20 5 ASCII handshake lines instruction 20 20 ASCII instruction error codes 20 30 ASCII instructions 20 1 error codes 20 30 status bits 20 5 20 6 22 9 timing diagram 20 28 ASCII integer t
175. E User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable STI subroutine processing This bit must be set if you want the controller to process the STI subroutine at the configured time interval If you need to restrict when the STI subroutine is processed clear the UIE bit An example of when this is important is if a series of math calculations need to be processed without interruption Before the calculations take place clear the UIE bit After the calculations are complete set the UIE bit and STI subroutine processing resumes STI User Interrupt Lost UIL User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type UIL User Interrupt Lost STIO UIL binary bit status read write The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that indicates an interrupt was lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the lost condition STI User Interrupt Pending UIP Using Interrupts 18 15 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIP User Interrupt Pending STI 0 UIP binary bit status read only The UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the
176. EN P 14 8 File Instructions FFL First In First Out FIFO Load FFL FIFO Load t C EN 5 Source N7 0 FIFO N7 1 lt DN gt Control R6 0 Length 1 lt lt EM 5 Position 0 lt Instruction Type output Table 14 10 Execution Time for the FFL Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 11 3 us 11 1 us long word 117 us 112 us MicroLogix 1500 word 10 0 us 9 8 us long word 10 9 us 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the FFL instruction loads words or long words into a user created file called a FIFO stack This instruction s counterpart FIFO unload FFU is paired with a given FFL instruction to remove elements from the FIFO stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the FFL FFU instruction pair shown below FFL HFO LOAD Source Position FFU FIFO UNLOAD FIFO Dest Control Length Position Nz10 CoN 10 LDN N7 12 reo MEM 34 9 EU N7 12 DN N7 11 EM neo OM 34 9 FFL and FFU Instruction Pair Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Destination Position N7 11 le N7 12 0 N7 13 1 FFU instruction N7 14 2 unloads data from 3 stack N7 12 at 4 position Ne 5 34 words are allocated 6 for FIFO stack starting 7 at N7 12 ending at N7 45 Source 8 N7 10 Lp 9 FFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N
177. Execution Time for the SOO Instruction Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 23 2 US 7 1 us long word 26 6 us 7 1 us MicroLogix 1500 word 20 0 us 6 3 us long word 23 1 us 6 3 us On a false to true rung transition the SQO instruction transfers masked source reference words or long words to the destination for the control of sequential machine operations When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask to the destination address specified in the instruction Data is written to the destination word every time the instruction is executed The done bit is set when the last word of the sequencer file is transferred On the next false to true rung transition the instruction resets the position to step one Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 15 6 Sequencer Instructions Word B10 1 B10 2 B10 3 B10 4 B10 5 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P If the position is equal to zero at start up when you switch the controller from the program mode to the run mode the instruction operation depends on whether the rung is true or false on the first scan If the rung is true the instruction transfers the value in step zero If the rung is false the instruction waits for the first rung transition from false to true and transfers the value in step one The bits mask data when reset
178. FFL 11 1 11 3 34 112 11 7 3 9 FIFO Unload FFU 10 4 33 0 8 word 3 4 10 4 36 1 5 long word 3 4 Fill File FLL 0 0 14 0 6 word 2 0 0 0 15 1 2 longword 2 5 Convert from BCD FRD 0 0 14 1 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Greater Than or EqualTo GEQ 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 9 Greater Than GRT 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 4 High Speed Load HSL 0 0 46 7 73 0 0 47 3 78 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 0 0 26 4 3 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Interrupt Subroutine INT 1 0 1 0 0 3 Immediate Output with Mask 10M 0 0 22 3 3 0 Jump JMP 0 0 1 0 0 5 Jump to Subroutine JSR 0 0 8 4 1 5 Label LBL 1 0 1 0 0 5 Less Than or EqualTo LEO 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 7 2 8 2 9 Less Than LES 1 1 1 3 1 3 2 2 8 2 9 LIFO Load LFL 10 4 25 5 34 10 4 31 6 3 9 LIFO Unload LFU 10 4 29 1 34 10 4 31 6 34 Limit LIM 6 1 6 4 2 3 13 6 14 4 4 0 Master Control Reset MCR Start 1 2 1 2 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply MCR End 1 6 1 6 1 5 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 1 8 1 9 1 8 3 1 3 9 3 5 Move MOV 0 0 24 2 5 0 0 8 3 2 0 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time A 3 Table A 1 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps
179. G Instruction Ladder Logic Enabling the MSG Instruction for Continuous Operation The message instruction is enabled during the initial processor program scan and each time the message completes For example when the DN or ER bit is set MSG 2 0000 Read Write Message CEN gt MSG File MG11 0 cDN gt Setup Screen CER gt Message Done Bit Message Enable Bit MG11 0 G11 0 0001 lE gt DN EN Message Error Bit MG11 0 z dE dou ER 0002 CEND gt 0000 0001 0002 0003 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Enabling the MSG Instruction Via User Supplied Input This is an example of controlling when the message instruction operates Input I 1 0 could be any user supplied bit to control when messages are sent Whenever I 1 0 is set and message MG11 0 is not enabled the message instruction on rung 0001 is enabled User Supplied Message Input Enable Bit I1 MG11 0 B3 0 J E LE A n E qa 0 EN 0 The message instruction is enabled with each false to true transition of bit B3 0 0 B3 0 MSG Je EIE ES Message Done Bit MG11 0 Es Read Write Message MSG File MG11 0 Setup Screen lp DN Message Error Bit MG11 0 J E zl ee ER CEND gt Local Messaging Examples Parameter This Controller Communication Command Communications Instructions 21 29 Three examples of local messaging are shown in this section
180. HSC Chapter 5 Added IMPORTANT notes about using the High Speed Outputs PTO and Chapter 6 PWM Modified text that describes the PWM Accel Decel Delay ADD Chapter 6 parameter Added PTO Controlled Stop CS parameter MicroLogix 1500 only Chapter 6 Modified text that describes the Scale SCL instruction Chapter 10 Corrected text for the PID Reset Term Ti The last sentence now reads Chapter 19 A value of 1 adds the maximum integral term into the PID equation previously said that a value of 1 adds the minimum integral term MicroLogix 1200 Series B Controllers can use the entire set of ASCII Chapter 20 instructions Added section on Programming ASCII Instructions with information on Chapter 20 how to prevent communications shut down when using ASCII instructions Added Ctrl characters to the ASCII Character Set chart Chapter 20 Added MSG File Element description Chapter 21 The ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 now applies to Appendix C MicroLogix 1200 Series B Controllers as well as the MicroLogix 1500 Added Fault Classification non user recoverable non recoverable to the Appendix D Fault Messages troubleshooting table Added new Error Code Appendix D 001A User Program Incompatible with OS at Power Up Added alphabetical list of instructions for easy reference Inside Back Cover ASCII Protocol can be used by MicroLogix 1200 Series B Controlle
181. J0 SGN Channel 0 Data 0 to 32 768 SGN Channel 1 Data 0 to 32 768 gt Word SGN Sign bit in two s complement format Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 12 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Specialty 1 0 Configuration 1769 IT6 Thermocouple Module Input Data File The input data file contains the analog values of the inputs Bit Position 15 14 13 172 71 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Analog Input Data Channel 0 Analog Input Data Channel 1 Analog Input Data Channel 2 Analog Input Data Channel 3 Analog Input Data Channel 4 Analog Input Data Channel 5 OC7 0 6 0C5 0C4 0C3 0C2 0C1 0C0 S7 S6 S5 S4 S3 S2 S1 S0 UO 00 U1 JUO U2 02 U3 03 U4 04 U5 05 U6 06 U7 07 The bits are defined as follows Sx General status bit for channels 0 through 5 and CJC sensors S6 and 7 This bit is set 1 when an error over range under range open circuit or input data not valid exists for that channel An input data not valid condition is determined by the user program This condition occurs when the first analog to digital conversion is still in progress after a new configuration has been sent to the module OCx Open circuit detection bits indicate an open input circuit on channels 0 through 5 OCO through OC5 and on CJC sensors CJCO OC6 and CJC1 OC7 The bit is set 1 when an open circuit con
182. Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Ladder Scan Scan Output Scan MEM p NOTE The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay The input file value does not represent the external input IMPORTANT P P P IMPORTANT when the input is configured for latching behavior When configured for rising edge behavior the input file value is normally off on for 1 scan when a rising edge pulse is detected The previous examples demonstrate rising edge behavior Falling edge behavior operates exactly the same way with these exceptions The detection is on the falling edge of the external input The input image is normally on D and changes to off 0 for one scan Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 0 Configuration 1 17 Falling Edge Behavior Example 1 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Scan Number X 3 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status Input File Value Falling Edge Behavior Example 2 Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X 2 Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Input Ladder Output Scan Scan S
183. Logix 1500 Controllers with 1764 LRP Processor has all the features of the 1764 LSP plus e Second communications port isolated RS 232 e Data Logging capability 1764 LSP B B FRN5 October 2000 For both the 1764 LSP and LRP processors e When using the PTO feature the controller can now 1764 LRP B B FRNS October 2000 perform a controlled stop when using PTO outputs The deceleration phase of the PTO can be initiated early via ladder logic e Enhanced program compare bit functionality in the Memory Module Publication 1762 RM001C EN P November 2000 Summary of Changes 5 New Information The table below lists sections that document new features and additional information about existing features For This New Information See Added MicroLogix 1200 1762 L24BXB and 1762 L40BXB Controllers Chapter 1 5 6 Added configuration information for several new 1 0 modules Chapter 1 e 1762 1016 OA8 0B8 0B18 OW 16 IF4 e 1769 OB16P and IT6 Added section on Configuring Expansion I O Using RSLogix 500 Chapter 1 Made minor changes to clarify data file numbering Chapter 2 Modified section on Writing Data to the Real Time Clock Chapter 3 In the Communications Status File General Channel Status Block Bit 15 Chapter 3 the Comms Toggle Push Button Bit is now valid for MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 previously was only the MicroLogix 1500 Added IMPORTANT notes about using the High Speed Counter
184. MP Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 0 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 0 0 us The JMP instruction causes the controller to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL label number Jumps can be forward or backward in ladder logic within the same program file Multiple JMP instructions may cause execution to proceed to the same label The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999 The label is local to a program file Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 16 2 Program Control Instructions LBL Label 02 0 LBL JSR Jump to Subroutine JSR _ Jump To Subroutine SBR File Number U 255 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type input Table 16 2 Execution Time for the LBL Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 0 us 1 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 1 0 us The LBL instruction is used in conjunction with a jump MP instruction to change the order of ladder execution Jumps cause program execution to go to the rung marked LBL label number The immediate data range for the label is from 0 to 999 The label is local to a program file Instruction Type output Table 16 3 Execution Time for the JSR Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 8 4 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 18 0 us 0 0 us The JSR instruction
185. NT 0 to 16383 control read write MINS to maximum scaled MAXS 1 The range listed in the table is for when scaling is not enabled With scaling the range is from minimum scaled The SPS Setpoint is the desired control point of the process variable Process Variable PV Input Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access PV Process user defined word INT 0 to 16383 control read write Variable The PV Process Variable is the analog input variable Process Control Instruction 19 5 Setpoint MAX MAXS Input Address Data Range Type User Parameter Format Program Descriptions Access MAXS Setpoint PD10 0 MAXS word 32 768 to 32 67 control read write Maximum INT If the SPV is read in engineering units then the MAXS Setpoint Maximum parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its maximum value Setpoint MIN MINS InputParameter Address Data Range Type User Descriptions Format Program Access MINS Setpoint PD10 0 MINS word 32 768 to 32 67 control read write Minimum INT If the SPV is read in engineering units then the MINS Setpoint Minimum parameter corresponds to the value of the setpoint in engineering units when the control input is at its minimum value NOTE MinS Ma
186. NT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Example SWP Swap Source S710 1 DATAIO Length 13 Source Value before executing SWP instruction abcdefghijklmnopgrstuvwxyzabcdefg Source Value before executing SWP instruction badcfehgjilknmporgtsvuxwzyabcdefg The underlined characters show the 13 words where the low byte was swapped with the high byte Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 10 12 Math Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Using Decode and Encode Instructions Chapter 11 Conversion Instructions The conversion instructions multiplex and de multiplex data and perform conversions between binary and decimal values Instruction Used To Page DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Decodes a 4 bit value 0 to 15 turning on the 11 2 corresponding bit in the 16 bit destination ENC Encode 1 of 16 to 4 Encodes a 16 bit source to a 4 bit value 11 3 Searches the source from the lowest to the highest bit and looks for the first set bit The corresponding bit position is written to the destination as an integer FRD Convert From Binary Converts the BCD source value to an integer and 11 4 Coded Decimal stores it in the destination TOD Convert to Binary Coded Converts the integer source value to BCD format 11 8 Decimal and stores it in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be use
187. O is a word size file source must be a word value or constant If LIFO is a long word size file source must be a long word value or constant The data range for the source is from 32768 to 32767 word or 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words m gu m 02 10 0 196 2 15 15 Word0 pw DN2 EpMB not used Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction loads data 1 EN Enable Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates that LIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack to receive the value or constant found in the source The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word The position is incremented after each load Position This is the current location pointed to in the LIFO stack It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 Gword or 0
188. PTO and or pulse width modulation PWM outputs The 1762 L24BXB and L40BXB each have one high speed output Publication 1762 RM001C EN P MicroLogix 1200 Expansion 1 0 1 0 Configuration 1 3 If the application requires more I O than the controller provides you can attach I O modules These additional modules are called expansion VO Expansion 1 0 Modules MicroLogix 1200 expansion I O Bulletin 1762 is used to provide discrete and analog inputs and outputs and in the future specialty modules For the MicroLogix 1200 you can attach up to six additional I O modules The number of 1762 I O modules that can be attached to the MicroLogix 1200 is dependent on the amount of power required by the I O modules See your MicroLogix 1200 User Manual publication 1762 UM001A US P for more information on valid configurations NOTE Visit the MicroLogix web site http www ab com micrologix for the MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O System Qualifier Addressing Expansion l O Slots The figure below shows the addressing for the MicroLogix 1200 and its I O The expansion I O is addressed as slots 1 through 6 the controller s embedded I O is addressed as slot 0 Modules are counted from left to right as shown below Expansion 0 NOTE In most cases you can use the following address format X s b X file type letter s slot number b bit number See I O Addressing on page 1 13 for complete information on address formats
189. RD Instruction Source Operand The source can be either a word address or the math register The maximum BCD source values permissible are e 9999 if the source is a word address allowing only a 4 digit BCD value e 32768 if the source is the math register allowing a 5 digit BCD value with the lower 4 digits stored in S 13 and the high order digit in S 14 If the source is the math register it must be directly addressed as S 13 S 13 is the only status file element that can be used Updates to Math Status Bits Table 11 9 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry always resets S 0 1 Overflow sets if non BCD value is contained at the source or the value to be converted is greater than 32 767 otherwise resets On overflow the minor error flag is also set S 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit always resets NOTE Always provide ladder logic filtering of all BCD input devices prior to performing the FRD instruction The slightest difference in point to point input filter delay can cause the FRD instruction to overflow due to the conversion of a non BCD digit S1 EQU FRD L Mp 3 EQUAL FROM BCD ea 15 Source A N7 1 Source 1 0 0 0 0 Source B I 0 0 Dest N72 0 0 MOV MOVE an Source 1 0 0 0 Dest N7 1 0 The two rungs shown cause the controller to verify that the value I 0 remains the same for tw
190. RM001C EN P 16 6 Program Control Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P While the rung state of the first MCR instruction is true execution proceeds as if the zone were not present When the rung state of the first MCR instruction is false the ladder logic within the MCR zone is executed as if the rung is false All non retentive outputs within the MCR zone are reset MCR zones let you enable or inhibit segments of your program such as for recipe applications When you program MCR instructions note that You must end the zone with an unconditional MCR instruction You cannot nest one MCR zone within another e Donotjump into an MCR zone If the zone is false jumping into it activates the zone NOTE The MCR instruction is not a substitute for a hard wired master control relay that provides emergency stop capability You still must install a hard wired master control relay to provide emergency I O power shutdown AUS if you start instructions such as timers or counters in an MCR zone instruction operation ceases when the zone is disabled Re program critical operations outside the zone if necessary Chapter 17 Input and Output Instructions The input and output instructions allow you to selectively update data without waiting for the input and output scans Instruction Used To Page IIM Immediate Input with Mask Update data prior to the normal input scan 17 1 IOM Immediate Output with Up
191. Revision Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 62 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the revision Boot FRN of the processor User Program Functionality Type System Status File C 21 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 63 word 0 to 32 767 Status read only This register identifies the level of functionality of the user program in the controller Compiler Revision Build Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 64 low byte byte 0 to 255 Status read only This register identifies the Build Number of the compiler which created the program in the controller Compiler Revision Release Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 64 high byte byte 0 to 255 Status read only This register identifies the Release of the compiler which created the program in the controller Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 22 System Status File Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Identifying Controller Faults Appendix D Fault Messages and Error Codes This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller Topics include identifying controller faults contacting Rockwell Automation for assistance While a program is executing a fault may occur wi
192. ST52 80 starting at the 36th character for Result N10 0 the string found in ST38 40 In this example the position result is stored in N10 0 Error Conditions The following conditions cause the controller to set the ASCII Error bit S 5 15 e Source string length is less than 1 or greater than 82 Index value is less than 1 or greater than 82 Index value is greater than Source string length The destination is not changed in any of the above conditions When the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 Instruction Type input Table 20 29 Execution Time for the ASR Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 19 2 us 4 0 us matching character O0us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 7 5 us 3 5 uis matching character 0 0 us Use the ASR instruction to compare two ASCII strings The controller looks for a match in length and upper lower case characters If two strings are identical the rung is true if there are any differences the rung is false ASCII Instructions 20 27 Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source A is the location of the first string used for comparison Source B is the location of the second string used for comparison Addressing Modes and File Types can be use
193. Status PTO 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 10 ED Error Detected Status PTO 0 ED bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 10 NS Normal Operation Status PTO 0 NS bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 15 JPS Jog Pulse Status PTO 0 JPS bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 15 JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0 JCS bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 16 JP Jog Pulse PTO 0 JP bit 00r 1 control read write 6 15 JC Jog Continuous PTO 0 JC bit 00r 1 control read write 6 11 EH Enable Hard Stop PTO 0 EH bit 0 or 1 control read write 6 11 EN Enable Status follows rung state PTO 0 EN bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 11 ER Error Code PTO 0 ER word INT 2 to 7 status read only 6 17 OF Output Frequency Hz PTO 0 0F word INT 10 to 20 000 control read write 6 11 OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz PTO 0 0FS word INT 0 to 20 000 status read only 6 12 JF Jog Frequency Hz PTO 0 JF word INT 10 to 20 000 control read write 6 15 TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated PTO 0 TOP long word 0 to control read write 6 12 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 OPP Output Pulses Produced PTO 0 0PP long word 0 to status read only 6 12 32 bit INT 2 147 483 647 ADP Accel Decel Pulses PTO 0 ADP long word see p 6 13 control read write 6 13 32 bit INT CS Controlled Stop PTO 0 CS bit 00r 1 control read write 6 14 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 8 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P PTO Output OUT Sub
194. Stop HIS Idle Status LED Error Detected Status H NS Normal Operation Status LJPS Jog Pulse Status LCS Jog Continuous Status LJP Jog Pulse HJE Jog Continuous LEH Enable Hard Stop L EN Enable Status follows rung state LER Error Code H DF Output Frequency Hz L OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz L JF Jog Frequency Hz L TOP Total Output Pulses To Be Generated L OPP Output Pulses Produced L ADF Accel Decel Pulses mi 4 D D D D D D 0 0 0 0 D 0 D D D 0 D 0 D D D D II E Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Using High Speed Outputs 6 7 Pulse Train Output The variables within each PTO sub element along with what type of Function Fil behavior and access the control program has to those variables are listed unctio e individually below All examples illustrate PTO 0 Terms and behavior for Sub Elements Summary PTO 1 MicroLogix 1500 only are identical Table 6 2 Pulse Train Output Function File PTO 0 Format Access Information OUT Output PT0 0 0UT word INT 2 or 3 control fread only 6 8 DN Done PTO 0 DN bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 8 DS Decelerating Status PTO 0 DS bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 8 RS Run Status PTO 0 RS bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 9 AS Accelerating Status PTO 0 AS bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 9 RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP bit 0 or 1 control read write 6 9 IS Idle
195. TE To convert numbers larger than 9999 decimal the destination must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error Example The integer value 9760 stored at N7 3 is converted to BCD and the BCD equivalent is stored in N7 0 The maximum BCD value is 9999 TOD ToBCD I Source N7 3 The destination value is fus Mine displayed in BCD format 760 MSB LSB 7 l 6 0 N73 Decimal 0010 0110 0010 0000 6 0 N7 0 4 digitBCD 1001 0111 0110 0000 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 11 10 Conversion Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Using Logical Instructions Chapter 12 Logical Instructions The logical instructions perform bit wise logical operations on individual words Instruction Used To Page AND BitWise AND PeformanANDopeaton 123 OR Logical OR Perform an inclusive OR operation 12 4 XOR Exclusive OR Perform an Exclusive Or operation 12 5 NOT Logical NOT Perform a NOT operation 12 6 When using logical instructions observe the following e Source and Destination must be of the same data size i e all words or all long words Tare Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACO for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions e Source A and Source B can be a constant or an address but both cannot be constants e Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147
196. TPI 0 ER Word bits 0 to 7 0 3 Status Read Only TP1 Error Code Word bits 8 to 15 The data resident in TPI 0 POTO represents the position of trim pot 0 The data resident in TPI 0 POT1 corresponds to the position of trim pot 1 The valid data range for both is from 0 counterclockwise to 250 clockwise Error Conditions If the controller detects a problem with either trim pot the last values read remain in the data location and an error code is put in the error code byte of the TPI file for whichever trim pot had the problem Once the controller can access the trim pot hardware the error code is cleared The error codes are described in the table below Table 3 6 Trim Pot Error Codes Error Code Description 0 Trim pot data is valid 1 Trim pot subsystem detected but data is invalid 2 Trim pot subsystem did not initialize 9 Trim pot subsystem failure Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 3 6 Function Files Memory Module Information Function File Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The controller has a Memory Module Information CMMI File which is updated with data from the attached memory module At power up or on detection of a memory module being inserted the catalog number series revision and type memory module and or real time clock are identified and written to the MMI file in the user program If a memory module and or real time clock is not attached zeros are written to the MMI file
197. The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to OxFFFF or 0 to OxFFFFFFFF NOTE If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file e Source This is the value that is compared to file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Length contains the number of steps in the sequencer reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to 3 ER Erro rue rung transition after the rung goes false Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set 4 FD Found bit is set when the status of all non masked bits in the source address match those of the word in the sequencer reference file This bit is assessed each time the SQC instruction is evaluated while the rung is true Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Source if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256
198. Time for the IOM Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 22 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP 18 4 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1764 LAP 19 4 us 0 0 us The IOM instruction allows you to selectively update output data without waiting for the automatic output scan This instruction uses the following operands Slot The slot is the physical location that is updated with data from the output file IMPORTANT Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IOM cannot be used with expansion I O Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the corresponding bit data is passed to the physical outputs A 0 prohibits corresponding bit data from being passed to the outputs The mask value can range from 0 to OxFFFF Bit 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Output Data OuputWord 0 Mask 00 00 JO J0 0 0 1 1 1 17 1 1 1 1 Real Outputs Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Output Word Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the outputs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 17 4 Input and Output Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 17 4 10M Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see U
199. Type User Program Format Access DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS word INT 1to 1000 status read only The PWM DCS Duty Cycle Status provides feedback from the PWM sub system The Duty Cycle Status variable can be used within an input instruction on a rung of logic to provide PWM system status to the remaining control program Using High Speed Outputs 6 25 PWM Accel Decel Delay ADD Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ADD Accel Decel Delay PWM 0 ADD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write PWM ADD Accel Decel Delay defines the amount of time in 10 millisecond intervals to ramp from zero to the specified frequency or duration Also specifies the time to ramp down to zero The PWM ADD value is loaded and activated immediately whenever the PWM instruction is scanned on a true rung of logic This allows multiple steps or stages of acceleration or deceleration to occur PWM Error Code ER Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access ER PWM Error Codes PWM 0 ER word INT 2 to 5 status read only PWM ER Error Codes detected by the PWM sub system are displayed in this register The table identifies known errors Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 2 Yes No No Overlap
200. U Read Ignore if timed out TO 0 Data Table Address N7 1 Size in Elements 5 Awaiting Execution EW e Channel g Error ER D Target Device Message done DN 0 Message Timeout 5 Message Transmitting ST 0 Data Table Address W50 200 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Node Addr dec 23 octal 27 Local Remote Local EU d Error Code Hex 0 No errors E Description Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 10 Communications Instructions Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 0 E lessage Data Table Address 50 200 Message Enabled EN 0 Local Node Add dec cota Local Remote Local Enor CodelHes 0 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P This Controller Parameters Communication Command The controller supports six different types of communications commands If the target device supports any of these command types the controller should be capable of exchanging data with the device Supported commands include Table 21 2 Communication Command Types Communication Description Used For Command 500CPU Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix controllers 500CPU Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data SLC 500 command set all MicroLogix controllers 485CIF Read The target devic
201. accuracy 8 3 timer and counter instructions 8 7 timer files 8 1 timer off delay instruction 8 5 timer on delay instruction 8 4 timing diagrams ASCII 20 28 AWA and AWT instructions 20 28 latching inputs 1 15 MSG instruction 21 23 PTO relative timing 6 4 quadrature encoder 5 20 TND instruction 76 4 TOD instruction 11 8 changes to the math register 77 9 example 77 9 TOF instruction 8 5 TON instruction 8 4 TPI function file 3 5 trim pots 3 5 error conditions 3 5 function file 3 5 troubleshooting D 2 D 9 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 8 Index automatically clearing faults D 7 contacting Allen Bradley for assistance P 3 D 9 identifying controller faults D 1 manually clearing faults D 2 using the fault routine D 2 true G 8 U UID instruction 18 9 UIE instruction 18 10 UIF instruction 18 11 upload G 8 user application mode status C 4 user fault routine creating a user fault routine 18 6 file number status C 16 major error detected status bit C 77 recoverable and non recoverable faults 18 6 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P user interrupt disable instruction 18 9 user interrupt enable instruction 18 10 user interrupt flush instruction 18 11 user program functionality type status C 21 W watchdog scan time C 10 write G 8 X XIC instruction 7 7 XIO instruction 7 7 XOR instruction 12 5 Z zero flag C 3 MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Alphabetical List of Instructions
202. age 12 2 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 12 4 Logical Instructions OR Logical OR Instruction Type output OR Bitwise Inclusive OR Table 12 5 Execution Time for the OR Instruction Source A N7 0000h lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Source B N7 1 0000h True False m ates MicroLogix 1200 word 22 us 0 0 ps long word 92 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 0 us 0 0 us long word 7 9 us 0 0 us The OR instruction performs a logical OR of two sources and places the result in the destination Table 12 6 Truth Table for the OR Instruction Destination A OR B Source A 111 11 11 11 10 1 JO JO JO JO JO 1 1 JO JO Source B 1110 01111 1 11 JO JO JO JO 1 J1 Destination 1 1 1111111111111111 0 0 1 1 1 1 Talia Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACO for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Logical Instructions 12 5 XOR Exclusive OR Instruction Type output XOR Bitwise Exclusive 0R Table 12 7 Execution Time for the XOR Instruction Source A N7 0 0000h Controller Data Size When Rung Is Source B N7 1 0000h True False Be S MicroLogix 1200 word 3 0 us 00 us long word 9 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 3 US 0 0 us long word 8 9 us 0 0 us The XOR instruction performs a logical exclusive OR
203. age D 1 The basic types of faults are described below Recoverable Non User Fault Non Recoverable Non Recoverable Faults are Recoverable Faults are caused by the user and may be recovered from by executing logic in the user fault routine The user can attempt to clear the Major Error Halted bit 1 13 Note You may initiate a MSG instruction from the controller to another device to identify the caused by the user and cannot be recovered from The user fault routine executes when this type of fault occurs However the fault cannot be cleared Note You may initiate a MSG instruction to another device Non User Faults are caused by various conditions that cease ladder program execution The user fault routine does not execute when this type of fault occurs fault condition of the controller to identify the fault condition of the controller Status File Data Saved The Arithmetic Flags Status File word S 0 are saved on entry to the user fault subroutine and re written upon exiting the subroutine Creating a User Fault Subroutine To use the user fault subroutine 1 Create a subroutine file Program Files 3 to 255 can be used 2 Enter the file number in word S 29 of the status file Controller Operation The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable faults causes the controller to read 8 29 and execute the subroutine number identified by S 29 If the fault is recoverable the routine can be
204. ameter B E es M Sle ec e e oss S T E m ale l9 lo mzEtFIAIE BIIs i s ler lon f S ISIE B I S S FS 9 B le sla le S la Source ele elele ele e Rate ele elele elele Offset ele elele elele e Destination ele eleje ele 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Tein Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the SCL instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 10 8 Math Instructions SCP Scale with Parameters Instruction Type output SCP a w Parameters E Table 10 9 Execution Time for the SCP Instruction nput i l 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Input Min 7 0 lt True False Input Max s MicroLogix 1200 word 315 us 0 0 us Scaled Min long word 52 2 us 0 0 us Scaled Max 74 MicroLogix 1500 word 27 0 us 0 0 us Output an long word 44 7 us 0 0 us 0 The SCP instruction produces a scaled output value that has a linear relationship between the input and scaled values This instruction solves the following equation listed below to determine scaled output y Ky yo Gi Xo xo yo Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following
205. ameter in the PTO function file Jog Continuous operation is only possible under the following conditions PTO sub system in idle Jog Pulse not active e Enable not active The JC bit operates as follows e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to generate continuous Jog Pulses Cleared 0 The PTO sub system does not generate Jog Pulses When the Jog Continuous bit is cleared the current output pulse is truncated PTO Jog Continuous Status JCS Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access JCS Jog Continuous Status PTO 0 JCS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO JCS Jog Continuous Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is generating continuous Jog Pulses The JCS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is generating continuous Jog Pulses Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not generating continuous Jog Pulses Using High Speed Outputs 6 17 PTO Error Code ER Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ER Error Code PTO 0 ER word INT 2to7 status read only PTO ER Error Codes detected by the PTO sub system are displayed in this register Table 6 3 Pulse Train Output Error Codes The error codes are shown in the table
206. amp stamp 12 4 time 12 4 time stamp stamp 16 2 long word 9 1 word logged logged Encode 1 of 16 to 4 ENC 0 0 6 8 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Equal EQU 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 9 2 6 2 6 FIFO Load FFL 9 8 10 0 34 9 7 10 9 3 9 FIFO Unload FFU 9 7 27 7 0 65 13 4 9 7 29 4 1 25 long 3 4 word word Fill File FLL 0 0 12 14 0 43 12 0 0 0 12 3 0 8 long 2 5 word word Convert from BCD FRD 0 0 12 3 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Greater Than or EqualTo GEO 1 1 1 2 1 3 25 2 6 2 9 Greater Than GRT 1 1 1 2 1 3 25 2 6 24 High Speed Load HSL 0 0 39 7 73 0 0 40 3 78 Immediate Input with Mask IIM 0 0 22 5 3 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply Interrupt Subroutine INT 1 0 1 0 0 3 Immediate Output with Mask 10M 0 0 19 4 3 0 Jump JMP 0 0 1 0 0 5 Jump to Subroutine JSR 0 0 8 0 1 5 Label LBL 1 0 1 0 0 5 Less Than or EqualTo LEQ 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 5 2 6 2 9 Less Than LES 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 5 2 6 29 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Table B 1 MicroLogix 1500 Controllers Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time B 3 Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False Tr
207. ample the element specified by N10 1 must be between 0 and 255 because all data files have a maximum individual size of 256 elements NOTE If a number larger than the number of elements in the data file is placed in N10 1 Gn this example data integrity cannot be guaranteed because a file boundary will be crossed This may not generate a controller fault but the data location is invalid unknown Programming Instructions Overview 4 5 Indirect Addressing of a File LIM B3 0 COP 0001 Limit Test J E Copy File Low Lim 10 0 Source N N50 100 10 10 lt Dest N7 0 Test N50 100 Length 15 10 lt High Lim 25 25 lt e Address N N50 100 10 Description In this example the source of the COP instruction is indirected by N50 100 The data in N50 100 defines the data file number to be used in the instruction In this example the copy instruction source A is defined by N N50 100 10 When the instruction is scanned the data in N50 100 is used to define the data file to be used for the COP instruction If the value of location N50 100 27 this instruction copies 15 elements of data from N27 10 N27 10 to N27 24 to N7 0 N7 0 to N7 14 NOTE NOTE If a number larger than 255 is placed in N50 100 in this example a controller fault occurs This is because the controller has a maximum of 255 data files In addition the file defined by the indirection should match the file type defined by the
208. an the lower CV limit Setpoint Out Of Range SP Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access SP Setpoint Out of Range PD10 0 SP binary bit Oor1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the setpoint exceeds the maximum scaled value or is less than the minimum scaled value Process Control Instruction 19 15 PV Out Of Range PV Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access PV PV Out of Range PD10 0 PV binary bit Oor1 status read write The process variable out of range bit is set 1 when the unscaled process variable exceeds 16 383 or is less than zero Done DN Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DN Done PD10 0 DN binary bit Oor 1 status read only The PID done bit is set 1 for one scan when the PID algorithm is computed It resets 0 whenever the instruction is scanned and the PID algorithm was not computed applies to timed mode only Enable EN Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access EN Enable PD10 0 EN binary bit 0 or 1 status read only The PID enabled bit is set 1 whenever the PID instruction is enabled It follows the rung state Integral Sum IS Tuning Parameter Address Data
209. and L message types For a Write this is the address in the processor which receives data Valid file types are I O S B T C R N L and RTC Data Table Offset This is the word offset value in the common interface file byte offset for PLC device in the 485CIF message target processor which is to send the data types Local Node Address Specifies the node number of the device that is receiving the message Valid range is 0 to 31 for DH 485 protocol 0 to 254 for DF1 protocol or 0 to 63 for DeviceNet Local Remote Specifies whether the message is local or remote 1 Applies to MicroLog 2 485CIF write ST to 4 85CIF only ix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later 3 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 30 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Example 1 Local Read from a 500CPU Message Instruction Setup 7a MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 This Controller Communication Command Data Table Address Size in Elements Channel 500CPU Read Ignore if timed out TO r Control Bits Awaiting Execution Ew pl Target Device Error ERE Message Timeout Data Table Address Local Node Addr dec Local Remote Local Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN octal
210. and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit SP can be toggled while the HSC is running and no counts are lost Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 8 Using the High Speed Counter Publication 1762 RM001C EN P User Interrupt Enable UIE Description Address Data HSC Type User Program Format Modes Access UIE User Interrupt Enable HSC O UIE bit 0 to 7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable HSC subroutine processing This bit must be set 1 if the user wants the controller to process the HSC subroutine when any of the following conditions exist Low preset reached High preset reached Overflow condition count up through the overflow value Underflow condition count down through the underflow value If this bit is cleared 0 the HSC sub system does not automatically scan the HSC subroutine This bit can be controlled from the user program using the OTE UIE or UID instructions Wasa ni lf you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung User Interrupt Executing UIX Description Address Data HSC Modes Type User Program
211. ansion Output Words X 3 us or X 7 us if Forcing is used Output Scan Sub Total Communications Overhead Worst Case 1470 us Typical Case 530 us Use this number if the communications port is configured but not communicating to 200 us any other device Use this number if the communications port is in Shutdown mode 0 us Communications Overhead Sub Total System Overhead Add this number if your system includes a 1762 RTC or 1762 MMT1RTC 100 us Housekeeping Overhead 270 us System Overhead Sub Total Totals Sum of all sub totals Multiply by Communications Multiplier from Table X Total Estimated Scan Time 1 Communications Overhead is a function of the device connected to the controller This will not occur every scan Communications Multiplier Table Multiplier at Various Baud Rates Protocol 38 4K 19 2K 9 6K 4 8K 2 4K 1 2K 600 300 Inactive DF1 Full Duplex 1 50 1 27 1 16 1 12 1 10 1 09 1 09 1 08 1 00 DF1 Half Duplex Slave 1 21 1 14 1 10 1 09 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 07 1 01 DH 485 N A 1 16 1 11 N A N A N A N A N A 1 10 at 19 2K 1 07 at 9 6K Modbus 1 22 1 13 1 10 1 09 1 09 1 09 1 09 1 09 1 00 Shut Down 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 1 Inactive is defined as No Messaging and No Data Monitoring For DH 485 protocol inactive means that the controller is not connected to a network Publication 1762 RM001C EN P A 8 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Publication 1762 RM001C EN P
212. as can be used to calculate the maximum frequency limit for both profiles The maximum frequency the integer lt the result found below OF output frequency For Trapezoid Profiles OF x OF 4 0 5 For S Curve Profiles 0 999 x OF x SQRT OF 6 Accel 3 000 Run Run 6 000 Decel 48g 12 000 Decel 3 000 The ADP range is from 0 to the calculated value The value in the ADP variable must be less than one half the value in the TOP variable or an error is generated In this example the maximum value that could be used for accelerate decelerate is 6000 because if both accelerate and decelerate are 6000 the total number of pulses 12 000 The run component would be zero This profile would consist of an acceleration phase from 0 to 6000 At 6000 the output frequency OF variable is generated and immediately enters the deceleration phase 6000 to 12 000 At 12 000 the PTO operation would stop output frequency 0 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 14 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P PTO Controlled Stop CS Sub Element Description Address Data Range Type UserProgram Format Access CS Controlled Stop PTO Q CS bit 0 or 1 control read write The PTO CS Controlled Stop bit is used to stop an executing PTO instruction in the run portion of the profile by immediately start
213. as shown in the following table Table 9 1 EQU NEO GRT LES GEO and LEQ Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files F ion Files a Address Address unction Files SG Model Level P 5 Parameter a 2 E e E cc e E Bis S E E c cgioeogoer zmEtSILLLdw cImEsg9BLIS s _ o le le B S EIS IE IG Ble S 5 EIS S lela Ela le S la Source A elelelelele e le elejej je oe ejeoj e o eje e ele ele Source B elelelelele ej e e ejejojojojojojojojojojojo ele 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Compare Instructions 9 3 EQU Equal NEO Not Equal Instruction Type input EQU Equal Table 9 2 Execution Time for the EQU and NEO Instructions Source A N7 0 0 lt Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is Source B N7 1 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 EQU wor
214. ata file It cannot start at any other address within the file Function Files 3 11 Target Bit File TBF The value stored in the TBF location identifies the bit file with which the DAT will interface The DAT can read or write to any valid bit file within the controller Valid bit files are B3 through B255 When the DAT reads a valid bit file number it can access the first 48 bits 0 to 47 of the specified file on its display screen The next 48 bits 48 to 95 are used to define the read only or read write privileges for the first 48 bits The only bit file that the DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TBF location The TBF location can only be changed by a program download TITTAFUWA ose your programming software to ensure that the bit file you specify in the TBF location as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the MicroLogix 1500 user program The example table below shows how the DAT uses the configuration information with bit file number 51 DAT 0 TBF 51 Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit Bit Number Data Address Protection Bit 0 0 48 16 B5 B5 32 32 80 1 B51 1 B51 49 33 B51 33 B51 81 2 B51 2 B51 50 34 B51 34 B51 82 3 B51 3 B51 51 35 B51 35 B51 83 4 B51 4 B51 52 36 B51 36 B51 84 5 B51 5 B51 53 37 B51 37 B51 85 6 B51 6 B51 54 38 B51 38 B51 86 7 B51 7 B51 55 39 B51 39 B51 87 8 B51 8 B51 56 40 B51 40 B51 88 9 B51 9 B51 57 41 B51 4
215. ation Parameters Parameter Baud Rate Description Programming Software Default Toggles between the communication rate of 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K and 38 4K 1200 Parity Toggles between None Odd and Even None Termination 1 Specifies the first termination character The termination character defines the one or two character sequence used to specify the end of an ASCII line received Setting the first ASCII termination character to undefined ff indicates no ASCII receiver line termination is used d Termination 2 Specifies the second termination character The termination character defines the one or two character sequence used to specify the end of an ASCII line received Setting the second ASCII Termination character to undefined ff and the first ASCII Termination character to a defined value d indicates a single character termination sequence Nf Control Line Toggles between No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem and Full Duplex Modem No Handshaking Delete Mode The Delete Mode allows you to select the mode of the delete character Toggles between Ignore CRT and Printer Delete Mode affects the characters echoed back to the remote device When Delete Mode is enabled the previous character is removed from the receive buffer e In CRT mode when a delete character is encountered the controller echos three characters to the device backspace space and backspac
216. atus IOS file is a read only file in the controller that contains information on the status of the embedded and local expansion I O The data file is structured as Table 3 19 1 0 Status File Word Description 0 Embedded Module Error Code Always zero 1 to6 Expansion Module Error Code The word number corresponds to the module s slot number Refer to the 1 0 module s documentation for specific information MicroLogix 1200 1 to8 Expansion Module Error Code The word number corresponds to the module s slot number Refer to the 1 0 module s documentation for specific information MicroLogix 1500 Instruction Set Chapter 4 Programming Instructions Overview The following table shows the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 programming instructions listed within their functional group Functional Group Description Page High Speed Counter The high speed counter instructions along with the HSC function file allow you to monitor and control 5 1 the high speed outputs Generally used with DC inputs HSL RAC High Speed Outputs The high speed output instructions along with the PTO and PWM function files allow you to monitor 6 1 and control the high speed outputs Generally used with FET outputs BXB units PTO PWM Relay Type Bit The relay type bit instructions monitor and control the status of bits 7 1 XIC X10 OTE OTL OTU OSR ONS OSF
217. be a long word size file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words Word 0 Word 1 Length maximum number of words or double words in the stack Word2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates LIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the LIFO stack The length of the stack can range from 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word Position This is the next location in the LIFO stack where data will be unloaded Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 word or 0 to 63 long word The position is decremented after each unload Table 14 17 LFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files UT sin Parameter g T ec 3 8 S 3 3 v 5 ol hla e SERE Ea EEEE gel Sle llis LIFO ele e e e ele ele Destination e ojojo eje ele Control 2
218. below Error Non User Recoverable Instruction Error Description Code Fault Fault Errors Name 2 Yes No No Overlap An output overlap is detected Multiple functions are assigned to the same Error physical output This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute Example PTOO and PTO1 are both attempting to use a single output 1 Yes No No Output An invalid output has been specified Output 2 and output 3 are the only valid Error choices This is a configuration error The controller faults and the User Fault Routine does not execute 0 Normal Normal 0 no error present 1 No No Yes Hardstop This error is generated whenever a hard stop is detected This error does not Detected fault the controller To clear this error scan the PTO instruction on a false rung and reset the EH Enable Hard Stop bit to 0 2 No No Yes Output The configured PTO output 2 or 3 is currently forced The forced condition Forced mustbe removed for the PTO to operate Error This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the force condition is removed 3 No Yes No Frequency The operating frequency value OFS is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 Error This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 4 No Yes No Accel The accelerate decelerate parameters ADP are Decel e less than zero Error e greater than half the
219. ble E 6 Supported Modbus Commands MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Command Function Code decimal Subfunction Code decimal Read Coil Status 1 Read Input Status Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers Set and Reset Single Coil Write Single Holding Register Echo Command Data Clear Diagnostic Counters Set and Reset Multiple Coils Write Multiple Holding Registers 05 095 0 QO1 A C9 N oO O1 Upon receiving a Modbus command that is not supported or improperly formatted the controller will respond with one of the exception codes listed in Table E 7 below Table E 7 Modbus Error Codes MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Error Error Description Transmitted Code Exception Code 0 No error none 1 Function Code cannot Broadcast The function does not support Broadcast nothing transmitted 2 Function Code not supported The controller does not support this Modbus function or 1 subfunction 3 Bad Command Length The Modbus Command is the wrong size 3 4 Bad Length The function attempted to read write past the end of a data file 3 5 Bad parameter The function cannot be executed with these parameters 1 6 Bad File Type The file number being referenced is not the proper file type 2 7 Bad File Number T
220. by the programming software is overwritten If the PD10 0 AM bit is on MANUAL mode this value can be set by the programming software and the control variable output tracks the control variable percent value Scaled Process Variable SPV Input Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access SPV Scaled Process Variable PD10 0 SPV word INT 0 to 16383 status read only The SPV Scaled Process Variable is the analog input variable If scaling is enabled the range is the minimum scaled value MinS to maximum scaled value MaxS If the SPV is configured to be read in engineering units then this parameter corresponds to the value of the process variable in engineering units See Analog I O Scaling on page 19 17 for more information on scaling Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 8 Process Control Instruction Tuning Parameters The table below shows the tuning parameter addresses data formats and types of user program access See the indicated pages for descriptions of each parameter Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User For More Descriptions Program Information Access KC Controller Gain K PD10 0 KC word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 19 9 TI Reset Term T PD10 0 Ti word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 19 9 TD Rate Term Ty PD 10 0 TD word INT 0 to
221. can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program e Set 1 Whenever the PWM instruction is within the run phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever the PWM instruction is not within the run phase of the output profile PWM Accelerating Status AS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access t Oor1 status readonly AS Accelerating Status PWM 0 AS bi The PWM AS Accelerating Status bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The AS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PWM output is within the acceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM output is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 22 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P PWM Profile Parameter Select PP Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access PP Profile Parameter Select PWM 0 PP bit Oor1 control read write The PWM PP Profile Parameter Select selects which component of the waveform is modified during a ramp phase e Set 1 selects Frequency Cleared 0 selects Duty Cycle The PWM PP bit cannot be modified while the PWM output is running enabled See PWM ADD on page 6 25 for more information
222. can Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan Scan External Input Latched Status 1 Input File Value NOTE The gray area of the Latched Status waveform is the input filter delay The input file value does not represent the external input IMPORTANT IMPORTANT when the input is configured for latching behavior When configured for falling edge behavior the input file value is normally on off for 1 scan when a falling edge pulse is detected Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 18 1 0 Configuration Configuring Expansion Expansion 7 O 2 SUA for E the xem Configuring expansion I O can be done either manually or automatically Using 0 Using RSLogix 500 45 55 1 Open the Controller folder 2 Open the I O Configuration folder 3 For manual configuration drag the Compact I O module to the slot For automatic configuration you must have the controller connected to the computer either directly or over a network Click the Read I O Config button on the I O configuration screen RSLogix 500 will read the existing configuration of the controller s I O Some I O modules support or require configuration To configure a specific module double click on the module an I O configuration screen will open that is specific to the module Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Chapter 2 Controller Memory and File Types This chapter describes controller memory and the types of files used by the MicroLogix
223. causes the controller to start executing a separate subroutine file within a ladder program JSR moves program execution to the designated subroutine SBR file number After executing the SBR control proceeds to the instruction following the JSR instruction The immediate data range for the JSR file is from 3 to 255 SBR Subroutine Label Subroutine SBR RET Return from Subroutine RET Return Instruction Type input Program Control Instructions 16 3 Table 16 4 Execution Time for the SBR Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 0 us 1 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 1 0 us The SBR instruction is a label which is not used by the processor It is for user subroutine identification purposes as the first rung for that subroutine This instruction is the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true Instruction Type output Table 16 5 Execution Time for the RET Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 0 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 0 0 us The RET instruction marks the end of subroutine execution or the end of the subroutine file It causes the controller to resume execution at the instruction following the JSR instruction user interrupt or user fault routine that caused this subroutine to execute Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 16 4 Program Control Instructions SUS Suspend
224. cess Tool DAT configuration is stored in the processor in a specialized configuration file called the DAT Function File The DAT Function File which is part of the user s control program is shown below a Function Files HSC PTO stl Eu ATC BHI MMI LP MEN eer DATO LDP Data Access Terminal present E FIP F1 key Pressed E FIL F1 Key Latched F2P F2 Key Pressed F2L F2 Key Latched H PST Power Save Timeout minutes 0 255 b DFT Data Functional Type H FMA Firmware Major Rev 1 9 H FMI Firmware Minor Rev s 1 L EH EN 4 Catalog Number L TIF Target Integer File L TEF Target Bit File ccc ccocooooococcdo PES jm qecs Pw ios The DAT function file contains the Target Integer File the Target Bit File and the Power Save Timeout parameter These three parameters are described in the table below Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access Target Integer File DAT 0 TIF Word int Control Read Only Target Bit File DAT 0 TBF Word int Control Read Only Power Save Timeout DAT 0 PST Word int Control Read Only Target Integer File TIF The value stored in the TIF location identifies the integer file with which the DAT will interface The DAT can read or write to any valid integer file within the controller Valid integer files are N3 through N255 When the DAT reads a valid integer file number it can access the first 48 ele
225. cess variable enters the deadband and passes through the setpoint The valid range is 0 to the scaled maximum or 0 to 16 383 when no scaling exists Feed Forward Bias FF Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access FF Feed Forward PD10 0 FF word 16 383 to 416 383 control read write Bias INT The feed forward bias is used to compensate for disturbances that may affect the CV output Scaled Error SE Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access SE Scaled Error PD10 0 SE word INT 32 768 to 32 767 status read only Scaled error is the difference between the process variable and the setpoint The format of the difference E SP PV or E PV SP is determined by the control mode CM bit See Control Mode CM on page 19 12 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 12 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Automatic Manual AM Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access AM Automatic Manual PD10 0 AM binary bit Oor1 contro read write The auto manual bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program When off 0 it specifies automatic operation When on 1 it specifies manual operation In automatic operation the instruction controls the control variab
226. cessors only Word Bit Description 6 DLL Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 5 9 0 CTS 1 RTS 2 Reserved 3 Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD 4to15 Reserved 10 0 Software Handshaking Status 1to15 Reserved 11 Echo Character Count 12 Received Character Count Function Files 3 17 Table 3 16 ASCII Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processors only Word Bit Description 13 to 18 Reserved 19 Bad Character Count 20 to 22 Reserved Table 3 17 Active Node Table Block Word Description 23 Active Node Table Category Identifier Code always 3 24 Length always 4 for DH 485 always 0 for DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave and ASCII 25 Format Code always 0 26 Number of Nodes always 32 for DH 485 always 0 for DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave and ASCIl 27 Active Node Table Nodes 0 to 15 CS0 27 1 is node 1 CS0 27 2 is node 2 etc This is a bit mapped register that displays the status of each node on the network If a bit is set 1 the corresponding node is active on the network If a bit is clear 0 the corresponding node Is inactive 28 Active Node Table Nodes 16 to 31 CS0 28 1 is node 16 CS0 28 2 is node 17 etc This is a bit mapped register that displays the status of each node on the network If
227. cified in the user program 1 0 e Re compile reload the program and enter configuration the Run mode or e Replace the module e Cycle power xxg7 I O CONFIGURATION e The expansion 1 0 configuration Non User e Either correct the user program 1 0 MISMATCH in the user program did not match configuration to match the actual the actual configuration or configuration or e The expansion I O configuration e With power off correct the actual 1 0 in the user program specified a configuration to match the user program module but one was not found configuration or e The expansion I 0 module configuration data size for a module was greater than what the module is capable of holding xxag EXPANSION 1 0 The number of input or output image Non User e Correct the user program I O configuration MODULE words configured in the user to reduce the number of input or output CONFIGURATION program exceeds the image size in words and ERROR the expansion I O module e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode xxgg 12 EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module generated Non User e Refer to the 1 0 status file MODULE ERROR an error e Consult the documentation for your specific 1 0 module to determine possible causes of a module error xxAlt2 EXPANSION 1 0 e Either an expansion 1 0 cable is Non User Correct the user program to eliminate a CABLE CONFIGURATION MISMATCH ERROR configured in the user program but no cable
228. ck status bit C 8 offline G 5 offset G 5 off state leakage current G 5 one shot G 6 one shot falling instruction 7 6 one shot instruction 7 5 one shot rising instruction 7 6 online G 6 ONS instruction 7 5 operating system catalog number status C 20 FRN status C 20 series letter status C 20 operating voltage G 6 OR instruction 12 4 OSF instruction 7 6 OSR instruction 7 6 OTE instruction 7 3 OTL instruction 7 4 OTU instruction 7 4 outgoing message command pending status bit C 17 output device G 6 output instruction 7 3 output latch instruction 7 4 output scan G 6 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 Index output unlatch instruction 7 4 overflow flag C 3 overflow trap status bit C 11 ownership timeout 8 P password protection 2 9 PCCC G 6 PD data file 19 2 PID analog 0 scaling 19 17 application examples 19 22 application notes 19 18 errors 19 16 PID concept 19 1 PID equation 19 2 PID instruction 19 3 tuning parameters 19 8 power save timeout 3 9 power up mode behavior bit C 6 process control instruction 19 1 processor G 6 processor battery low status bit C 13 processor catalog number status C 20 processor files G 6 processor revision status C 20 processor series status C 20 program control instructions 16 7 program end instruction 16 5 program file definition G 6 memory structure 2 2 program mode G 6 program scan definition G 6 MicroLogix 1200 scan time worksheet A 7 MicroLogix 1500 scan time wo
229. conds 1 00 to 0 00 If your program scan can exceed 2 5 seconds repeat the timer instruction on a different rung identical logic in a different area of the ladder code so that the rung is scanned within these limits Repeating Timer Instructions Using the enable bit EN of a timer is an easy way to repeat its complex conditional logic at another rung in your ladder program NOTE Timing could be inaccurate if Jump JMP Label LBL Jump to Subroutine JSR or Subroutine SBR instructions skip over the rung containing a timer instruction while the timer is timing If the skip duration is within 2 5 seconds no time is lost if the skip duration exceeds 2 5 seconds an undetectable timing error occurs When using subroutines a timer must be scanned at least every 2 5 seconds to prevent a timing error Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 8 4 Timer and Counter Instructions TON Timer On Delay Instruction Type output TON Timer On Delay zem CEN2 Table 8 5 Execution Time for the TON Instructions Imer i Time Base 10 lt DN gt Controller When Rung Is Preset 0 lt Accum 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 18 0 us 3 0 us MicroLogix 1500 115 5 us 2 5 US Use the TON instruction to delay turning on an output The TON instruction begins to count time base intervals when rung conditions become true As long as rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the
230. control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit STI Timed Interrupt Enabled TIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STI 0 TIE binary bit control read write The TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the timed interrupt mechanism When set 1 timing is enabled when clear 0 timing is disabled If this bit is cleared disabled while the timer is running the accumulated value is cleared 0 If the bit is then set 1 timing starts This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle STI Auto Start AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit control read only The AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the STI Timed Interrupt Enable TIE bit when the controller enters any executing mode Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 16 Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RM001C EN P
231. control variable Rather it uses the value as an input to adjust the integral sum CIS so that a smooth transfer takes place upon re entering the AUTO mode In the MANUAL mode the programmer allows you to enter a new CV value from 0 to 100 This value is converted into a number from 0 to 16383 and written to the Control Variable address If your ladder program sets the manual output level design your ladder program to write to the CV address when in the MANUAL mode Remember that the new CV value is in the range of 0 to 16383 not 0 to 100 Writing to the CV percent CVP with your ladder program has no effect in the MANUAL mode PID Rung State If the PID rung is false the integral sum IS is cleared and CV remains in its last state Publication 1762 RMO001 C EN P 19 22 Process Control Instruction Application Examples Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Feed Forward or Bias Applications involving transport lags may require that a bias be added to the CV output in anticipation of a disturbance This bias can be accomplished using the processor by writing a value to the Feed Forward Bias element word FF See page 19 11 The value you write is added to the output allowing a feed forward action to take place You may add a bias by writing a value between 16383 and 16383 to word 6 with your programming terminal or ladder program PID Tuning PID tuning requires a knowledge of process control If you are inexperienced it will b
232. ction ource 7 e p Fan a Controller Data Size When Rung Is ontro Length 1 lt EM 5 True False PUN ii MicroLogix 1200 word 75 5 us 10 4 us long word 31 6 us 10 4 us MicroLogix 1500 word 222 us 9 7 us long word 27 4 us 9 7 us On a false to true rung transition the LFL instruction loads words or long words into a user created file called a LIFO stack This instruction s counterpart LIFO unload LFU is paired with a given LFL instruction to remove elements from the LIFO stack Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pair shown below LFL ae LIFO LOAD EN Destination Position uns APO ON Vm le INTA2 0 Control R6 0 N7 13 1 Length 34 Position 9 LFU instruction N7 14 2 unloads data from 3 ia INGAS EU stack N7 12 at 4 LIFO N7 12 HDN posue 5 34 words are allocated Dest N7 11 EM i Control R6 0 6 for FIFO stack starting Length 34 at N7 12 ending at Dec 7 AZ osition 9 N7 45 LFL and LFU Instruction Pair Source 8 N7 10 I 9 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N7 45 33 available position 9 i in this case Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 File Instructions 14 15 This instruction uses the following operands Source The source operand is a constant or address of the value used to fill the currently available position in the LIFO stack The data size of the source must match the LIFO stack If LIF
233. ction 16 5 memory 2 2 clearing controller memory 2 70 memory module boot status bit C 12 memory module compare bit C 9 memory module information function file 3 6 fault override 3 7 functionality type 3 6 load always 3 8 load on error 3 8 mode behavior 3 8 module present 3 7 program compare 3 7 write protect 3 7 memory module password mismatch status bit C 72 memory usage MicroLogix 1200 instructions A 7 MicroLogix 1500 instructions B 7 MEQ 9 6 MEQ instruction 9 6 message MG file 27 4 message errors 21 21 message instruction 27 3 message reply pending status bit C 16 messages local 21 7 local messaging examples 21 29 remote 21 16 messaging overview 21 1 minor error bits C 11 MMI function file 3 6 mnemonic G 4 Modbus definition G 4 Modbus slave RTU protocol F 9 Modbus to MicroLogix memory map E 9 F 10 E 11 mode behavior C 7 mode status C 4 modem 6 5 modes 6 5 monitoring controller operation fault recovery procedure D 2 MOV instruction 13 7 move instructions 13 1 MSG instruction 21 3 error codes 21 21 Index 5 ladder logic 21 28 local messaing examples 21 29 timing diagram 21 23 MUL instruction 10 5 multiply instruction 10 5 MVM instruction 13 3 NEG instruction 70 6 negate instruction 10 6 negative logic G 5 NEO instruction 9 3 network G 5 node address status C 15 nominal input current G 5 normally closed 6 5 normally open 6 5 not equal instruction 9 3 NOT instruction 72 6 0 OEM lock 2 10 OEM lo
234. ction is actually being executed by a parallel system status bits and other information are updated each time the PTO instruction is scanned while it is running This provides the control program access to PTO status while it is running PTO status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency is the same as the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized by placing a PTO instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PTO instructions to your program to increase how often a PTO instruction is scanned The charts in the following examples illustrate the typical timing sequence behavior of a PTO instruction The stages listed in each chart have nothing to do with controller scan time They simply illustrate a sequence of events In actuality the controller may have hundreds or thousands of scans within each of the stages illustrated in the examples Conditions Required to Start the PTO The following conditions must exist to start the PTO The PTO instruction must be in an idle state For idle state behavior all of the following conditions must be met Jog Pulse JP bit must be off Jog Continuous JC bit must be off Enable Hard Stop EH bit must be off Normal Operation NS bit must be off The output cannot be forced The rung it is on must transition from a False state 0 to a True state C1 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 4 Using H
235. d Input Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 X Xx X X X 0X x X X x jr jr pr jr jr jr Word e oo e c ow N e r read x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 IQ6XOW4 Output Image For each module the output data file contains the current state of the control program s directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 3 correspond to output terminals 0 through 3 bits 4 through 15 are not used Output Bit Position 15 14 13 172 11 109 8 7 j6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 X X IX X IX X X X X X X X Irw tr w r w Ir w Word r w read and write x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 0A8 1769 OW8 and 1769 OW68 Output Image For each module the output data file contains the current state of the control program s directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to output terminals 0 through 7 bits 8 through 15 are not used Output Bit Position 15 174 13 172 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 X X X X X X X X r w Ir w r w r w r w r w r w Ir w Word r w read and write x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 0B16 1769 OB16P and 1769 0V16 Output Image For each module the output data file contains the current state of the control program s directed state of the discrete output po
236. d it resets the data defined by the RES instruction The RES instruction has no effect when the rung state is false The following table shows which elements are modified Table 8 16 RES Instruction Operation When using a RES instruction with a Timer Element Counter Element Control Element The controller resets the The controller resets the The controller resets the ACC value to 0 ACC value to 0 POS value to 0 DN bit OV bit EN bit TT bit UN bit EU bit EN bit DN bit DN bit CU bit EM bit CD bit ER bit UL bit vada Hd B Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredictable machine operation or injury to personnel may occur Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 8 17 RES Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 A Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level N Parameter E o E E zs ec amp E F 3 B 5 m Es gt 2E e coegesi zEXLIW oes5sis5s r s s E a le E I in S o o lv la e S a Z lo lv la S a E lo S E JS a 2 S ia Structure
237. d the bit is cleared 0 1 MRP Incoming Message Reply Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has supplied the information requested by a MSG instruction executed by this controller When the appropriate MSG instruction is serviced during end of scan SVC or REF this bit is cleared 0 2 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller has one or more MSG instructions enabled and in the communication queue This bit is cleared 0 when the queue is empty 3 SSB Selection Status Bit This bit indicates that the controller is in the System Mode It is always set 4 CAB Communications Active Bit This bit is set 1 when at least one other device is on the DH 485 network If no other devices are on the network this bit is cleared 0 5to14 Reserved 15 Communications Toggle Push Button Communications Defaults Active This bit is set 1 whenever Channel 0 is in the default communications mode The bit is cleared 0 when Channel 0 is in user configured communications mode Always 0 for 1764 LRP Processor Channel 1 This bit is not available with the Series A controllers 5 0to7 Node Address This byte value contains the node address of your controller on the network 8to15 Baud Rate This byte value contains the baud rate of the controller on the network Diagnostic Counter Blocks are shown for e DH 485 DF1 Full Duplex e DF1 Half Duplex Slav
238. d 1 3 us 1 1 us NEG long word 28 us 1 9 us Not Equal NEQ word 1 3 us 1 1 us Sout ye long word 2 5 us 2 7 us Source B Ld MicroLogix 1500 EQU word 1 2 us 1 1 ws lt long word 2 6 us 1 9 us NEQ word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 2 3 us 2 5 us The EQU instruction is used to test whether one value is equal to a second value The NEQ instruction is used to test whether one value is not equal to a second value Table 9 3 EQU and NEQ Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State EQU A B true A B false NEO A B false A B true Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 9 4 Compare Instructions GRT Greater Than LES Less Than GRT Greater Than A gt B Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt LES Less Than A lt B Source A N7 0 0 lt Source B N7 1 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type input Table 9 4 Execution Time for the GRT and LES Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 1 3 us 1 1 us long word 2 8 us 2 7 us MicroLogix 1500 word 1 2 us 1 1 us long word 2 6 us 2 5 us The GRT instruction is used to test whether one value is greater than a second value The LES instruction is used to test whether one value is less than a second value Table 9 5 GRT and LES Instruction Operation Instruction Relationship of Source Values Resulting Rung State
239. d Overflow and Underflow setpoints Automatic Interrupt processing based on accumulated count Run time editable parameters from the user control program The High Speed Counter function operates as described in the following diagram Overflow High Preset 0 Low Preset Underflow 4 v ry v 4 4 1 2 147 483 647 maximum 2 147 483 648 minimum Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 4 Using the High Speed Counter High Speed Counter Each HSC is comprised of 36 sub elements These sub elements are either Function File bit word or long word structures that are used to provide control over the HSC function or provide HSC status information for use within the Sub Elements Summary control program Each of the sub elements and their respective functions are described in this chapter A summary of the sub elements is provided in the following table All examples illustrate HSCO Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical Table 5 1 High Speed Counter Function File HSC 0 or HSC 1 Sub Element Description Address DataFormt HSC Function UserProgram For More Modes Access Information PFN Program File Number HSC 0 PFN word INT 0to 7 control read only 5 5 ER Error Code HSC 0 ER word INT 0to 7 status read only 5 5 UIX User Interrupt
240. d Program Compare bit shows the status of the load program compare selection in the memory module s user program status file It enables you to determine the value without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Memory Module Program Compare on page C 9 for more information Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 3 8 Function Files Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P LE Load on Error The LE Load on Error bit represents the status of the load on error setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module On Error Or Default Program on page C 5 for more information LA Load Always The LA Load Always bit represents the status of the load always setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Load Memory Module Always on page C 6 for more information MB Mode Behavior The MB Mode Behavior bit represents the status of the mode behavior setting in the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the selection without actually loading the user program from the memory module See Power Up Mode Behavior on page C 6 for more information DAT Function File MicroLogix 1500 only Function Files 3 9 Data Ac
241. d as shown below Table 20 30 ASR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files Address Address Mode Level N E g T Parameter E S ls L Sr z m F BE 5 AE S gle llel lz Elz lze je l Elflslels 28 leo fo le a S IE IE IG S S IF 8 Ie Ele ela Sia Source A e e Source B 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation If the string length of Source A or Source B exceeds 82 characters the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set and the rung goes false Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 28 ASCII Instructions Timing Diagram for ARD ARL AWA and AWT Instructions Rung Condition Enable Bit EN Queue Bit EU Running Bit RN Done Bit Error Bit DN or ER Publication 1762 RM001C EN P oOo oO 1 1 Oc 1 1 ON OFF omnFrFwWN 1 2 6 34 5 1 5 2 6 3 rung goes true instruction successfully queued instruction execution complete instruction scanned for the first time after execution is complete rung goes false instruction execution starts ASCII Instructions 20 29 Using In line In
242. d as shown in the following table Table 11 1 Conversion Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 NN Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level a Parameter E 2 E o s gn eo S zje a ki E E g E a E 13 ee O Z n gt o S o v o e le am IE IZ IE IG mmaIjEO9 EjE aE u Source ele elele ele e Destination ele eleje eje 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 11 2 Conversion Instructions DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 Instruction Type output DCD Decode 4 to 1 of 16 I Table 11 2 Execution Time for the DCD Instruction Source N7 0 0000h lt Controller When Rung Is Dest N7 1 0000000000000000 True False MicroLogix 1200 1 9 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 0 9 us 0 0 us The DCD instruction uses the lower four bits of the source word to set one bit of the destination word All other bits in the destination word are cleared The DCD instruction converts the values as shown in the table
243. d by the ABL and ACB instructions Addressing Control Files The addressing scheme for the control data file is shown below R e s b f File number The valid file number range is from 3 to 255 Element delimiter e Element number The valid element number range is from 0 to 255 Each element is 3 words in length as shown in Table 20 2 Subelement delimiter S Subelement number The valid subelement number range is from 0 to 2 You can also specify LEN or POS Bit delimiter Bit number The valid bit number range is from 0 to 15 The bit number is the bit location within the string file element Bit level addressing is not available for words 1 and 2 of the control element Examples R62 Element 2 control file 6 R6 2 0 13 Bit 13 in sub element 0 of element 2 control file 6 R18 1 LEN Specified string length of element 1 control file 1 8 R18 1 POS Actual string length of element 1 control file 18 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P ASCII Instructions 20 7 ACL ASCII Clear Buffers Instruction Type output ACL sel Por Buffers PAIR Table 20 3 Execution Time for the ACL Instruction anne Transmit Buffer Yes Controller When Instruction Is Receive Buffer No True False MicroLogix 1200 clear buffers 0 0 us both 249 1 us receive 28 9 us transmit 33 6 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later clear buffers 0 0 us both 203 9 us receive 24 7 us transmit 29 1 us
244. d instruction 7 7 examine if open instruction 7 7 exclusive OR instruction 12 5 executing mode G 3 execution time MicroLogix 1200 instructions A 7 MicroLogix 1500 instructions B 7 expansion I O 1 3 1 7 analog l O configuration 1 5 1 11 discrete I O configuration 1 4 1 9 F false G 3 fault messages D 1 D 2 fault override at power up bit C 5 fault recovery procedure D 2 fault routine description of operation 76 6 Index 3 file number status C 16 manually clearing faults D 2 operation in relation to main control program 16 2 priority of interrupts 18 4 faults automatically clearing D 1 identifying D 1 manually clearing using the fault routine D 2 recoverable and non recoverable 18 6 FET G 3 FFL instruction 14 8 FFU instruction 14 11 FIFO First In First Out G 3 FIFO load instruction 14 8 FIFO unload instruction 14 11 file G 3 file instructions 14 7 ill file instruction 14 3 iltering inputs 1 14 irst scan status bit C 8 FLL instruction 14 3 forces enabled status bit C 4 orces installed status bit C 4 orcing inputs and outputs 1 14 FRD example 11 6 instruction 11 4 free running clock C 10 free running clock status C 10 full duplex G 3 function files 3 7 3 2 base hardware information BHI 3 12 communications status CS file 3 13 DAT function file 3 9 event input interrupt Ell 18 17 high speed counter HSC 5 2 input output status file IOS 3 78 memory module information MMI 3 6 pulse
245. d ly MOL 94 5 0 BS 14 6 FFL First In First Out FIFO Load s a wy hee xs 14 8 FFU First In First Out FIFO Unload sess 14 11 LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load anaa aaa 14 14 LFU Last In First Out LIFO Unload 0066 14 17 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Table of Contents iv Sequencer Instructions Program Control Instructions Input and Output Instructions Using Interrupts Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Chapter 15 SQC Sequencer COMpare 225 08404455 TE LT TUS ES SQO Sequencer Output 2 2 2 00 00 0000 eee SQL Sequencer Load osse vii dat ake read wok foe Chapter 16 JMP Jump to Label 2 245522 3259 5 bp LR e dices LBbqd3Bebux ee Cee MEN QOO RENE TISSUES E JSR Jump to Subroutine x4 eruta aseo i e o td te we hed SBR Subroutine Label a oR nae ven T pU eo eiue BET Return from Subroutine ss 6541045 vor qoe eg v Ws SUS Suspende eI un ar aos pata Nord si pep arto pata ms TND Temporary BI dos RSs dale ip ore RR t d END Program End 5 a Ru EROR e LL n e MCR Master Control Reset ias VC EX e eg Chapter 17 IIM Immediate Input with Mask IOM Immediate Output with Mask isses REE D O Belteshi y tee d aur ad o dert oed s rtt Chapter 18 Information About Using Interrupts User Interrupt Instructions lee INT Interrupt Subroutine n a 08 4er o B54 2S PLES STS Selectable Timed Sata 5 e
246. d to the communications request Communications Instructions 21 13 Data Table Address Offset This variable defines the starting address in the target controller The data table address is used for a 500CPU and PLC5 type messages A valid address is any valid configured data file within the target device whose file type is recognized by the controller Valid combinations are shown below Message Type Local File Type Target File Type 500CPU and PLC5 0 1 B N L 0 1 S B N L J m C C R R RTC N RTC 1 500CPU write RTC to Integer or RTC to RTC only Applies to MicroLogix 1200 Series B and later and 1500 Series B and later only i The data table offset is used for 485CIF type messages A valid offset is any value in the range 0 to 255 and indicates the word or byte offset into the target s Common Interface File CIF The type of device determines whether it is a word or byte offset MicroLogix controllers and SLC processors use word offset PLC 5 uses byte offset Local Node Address This is the destination device s node number if the devices are on a DH 485 using 1761 NET AIC DeviceNet using 1761 NET DND or DF1 Half Duplex network NOTE To initiate a broadcast message on a DH 485 network set the local node address to 1 Local Remote This variable defines the type of communications that is used Use local when you need point to point communications via DF1 Full Duplex or network communicati
247. data is written to the data table The message instruction function is complete If the reply is a failure with an error code the ER bit is set D and the ST bit is cleared 0 The message instruction function is complete 6 If the DN or ER bit is set 1 and the MSG rung is false the EN bit is cleared 0 the next time the message instruction is scanned See MSG Instruction Ladder Logic on page 21 28 for examples using the message instruction Publication 1762 RMO001 C EN P 21 26 Communications Instructions SVC Service Communications SVC _ Service Communications Channel Select Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output Table 21 4 Execution Time for the EQU and NEQ Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP or 166 us 1 4 us per word 0 0 us 1764 LRP with one channel selected MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 327 us 1 4 us per word 0 0 us with both channels selected 1 This value for the SVC instruction is for when the communications servicing function is accessing a data file The time increases when accessing a function file Under normal operation the controller processes communications once every time it scans the control program If you require the communications port to be scanned more often or if the ladder scan is long you can add an SVC Service Communications instruction to your control program The SVC instructi
248. date outputs prior to the normal output scan 17 3 Mask REF I O Refresh Interrupt the program scan to execute the 17 4 1 0 scan write outputs service communications read inputs IIM Immediate Input with Mask Instruction Type output IM i Input BOSE NOTE This instruction is used for embedded I O only It is not aoe N7 0 designed to be used with expansion I O Length 1 Table 17 1 Execution Time for the IIM Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 26 4 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 225 us 0 0 us Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 17 2 Input and Output Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The IIM instruction allows you to selectively update input data without waiting for the automatic input scan This instruction uses the following operands Slot This operand defines the location where data is obtained for updating the input file The location specifies the slot number and the word where data is to be obtained For example if slot I 0 input data from slot 0 starting at word 0 is masked and placed in input data file I 0 starting at word 0 for the specified length If slot 10 1 word 1 of slot 0 is used and so on IMPORTANT Slot 0 is the only valid slot number that can be used with this instruction IIM cannot be used with expansion I O Mask The mask is a hex constant or register address containing the mask value to be applied to the s
249. der range exists for that channel or there is a general module hardware error Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 and 1 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 6 O Configuration 1762 IF20F2 Output Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the channel output data Table 1 3 Raw Proportional Format T Bit Position 15 1 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 JO 0 0 Channel 0 Data 0 to 32 768 0 J0 1 0 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32 768 0 0 J0 Table 1 4 Scaled for PID Format T Bit Position 15 174 13 172 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 0 0 0 Channel 0 Data 0 to 16 383 0 1 10 10 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 383 0 l0 1762 IF4 Input Data File For each module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog values of the inputs The module can be configured to use either raw proportional data or scaled for PID data The input data file for either configuration is shown below Bit Position 15 14 13 172 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Word 0 SGNO Channel 0 Data 1 SGN1 Channel 1 Data 2 SGN2 Channel 2 Data 3 SGN3 Channel 3 Data 4 reserved 3 82 S1 S0 5 U0 00 U1 01 U2 02 U3 03 rreserved 6 reserved The bits are
250. determine when a memory module is present on the controller This bit is updated once per scan provided the memory module is first recognized by the controller To be recognized by the controller the memory module must be installed prior to power up or when the controller is in a non executing mode If a memory module is installed when the controller is in an executing mode it is not recognized If a recognized memory module is removed during an executing mode this bit is cleared 0 at the end of the next ladder scan WP Write Protect When the WP Write Protect bit is set 1 the module is write protected and the user program and data within the memory module cannot be overwritten IMPORTANT Once the WP bit is set 1 it cannot be cleared Only set this bit if you want the contents of the memory module to become permanent FO Fault Override The FO Fault Override bit represents the status of the fault override setting of the program stored in the memory module It enables you to determine the value of the FO bit without actually loading the program from the memory module IMPORTANT The memory module fault override selection in the Memory Module Information MMD file does not determine the controller s operation It merely displays the setting of the user program s Fault Override bit S 1 8 in the memory module See Fault Override At Power Up on page C 5 for more information LPC Load Program Compare The LPC Loa
251. dfe EXE Sent 20 14 ACB Number of Characters in Buffer 20 15 ACI String to Integer ip xui u ee ak es V RE need 20 16 ACN String Concatenate 0 000002 0s 20 18 AEX 2 SUING EXUACUS a psen ss ER dog OS aoe Eee E 20 19 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines i 2a queo Recte Rh 20 20 ARD ASCII Read Characters 0 0 00 00 eese 20 22 ARL ASCII Read Wines 42 8 eae h his Pas 4947321432 20 23 ASC String Search s oes derit aed be Soh sh dee dea es Ge 20 25 ASR ASCII String Compare 0 0 0 ee 20 26 Timing Diagram for ARD ARL AWA and AWT Instructions 20 28 Using In line Indirection ad deae etre hoa d Gea Gain ew r 20 29 ASCII Instruction Error COGBSu iu Fens I PER eres 20 30 ASCH Character Set aes o used urine Oe RY BE RAS e ET 20 31 Chapter 21 Communications Instructions Messaging Overview ees 21 1 MSG Messa 0E uc abte Res ve UE ES oC eR RS 21 3 The Message PH zu ut Laser oper ERSTES 21 4 Local Messages omai uua duoi x o xt Sohn y C OCA 21 7 Configuring a Local Message ase CE Ru 21 9 Remote Messages n nonna aaa a 21 16 Configuring a Remote Message pati dake eG oe we PS 21 18 MSG Instruction Error Codes ave bee does tear Reals 21 21 Timing Diagram for the MSG Instruction 21 23 SVC Service Communications 0 0 llle 21 26 MSG Instruction Ladder LOGIC ic ca geo 21 28 Local Messaging Examples ovs qe hee S oe BOOKS 21 29 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Table o
252. direction This allows you to insert integer and long word values into ASCII strings The Running bit RN must be set before the string value can be used The following conditions apply to performing in line indirection All valid integer N and long word D files can be used Valid range is from 3 to 255 File types are not case sensitive and can include either a colon or semicolon Positive value symbol and leading zeros are not printed Negative values C2 are printed with a leading minus sign Commas are not inserted where they would normally appear in numbers greater than one thousand Examples For the following examples N7 0 25 N7 1 37 L8 0 508000 L8 1 5 Valid in line direction Input Flow rate is currently N7 0 liters per minute and contains L8 0 particles per liter contaminants Output Flow rate is currently 25 liters per minute and contains 508000 particles per liter contaminants Input Current position is N7 1 at a speed of L8 1 RPM Output Current position is 37 at a speed of 5 RPM Invalid in line indirection Input Current position is N5 1 at a speed of L8 1 RPM Output Current position is N5 1 at a speed of 5 RPM NOTE Truncation occurs in the output string if the indirection causes the output to exceed 82 characters The appended characters are always applied to the output Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 30 ASCII Instruction Error
253. dition exists Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 and the CJC sensors U6 and U7 For thermocouple inputs the under range bit is set when a temperature measurement is below the normal operating range for a given thermocouple type For millivolt inputs the under range bit indicates a voltage that is below the normal operating range These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 5 and the CRC sensors O6 and O7 For thermocouple inputs the over range bit is set when a temperature measurement is above the normal operating range for a given thermocouple type For millivolt inputs the over range bit indicates a voltage that is above the normal operating range These bits can be used in the control program for error detection 1 0 Configuration 1 13 1 0 Addressing Addressing Details The I O addressing scheme and examples are shown below Slot Number Data File Number i Word File Type Y d Bit Input I or Output o Xd S w b Slot Delimiter Bit Delimiter Word Delimiter 1 1 0 located on the controller embedded 1 0 is slot 0 1 0 added to the controller expansion 1 0 begins with slot 1 Format Explanation Od s w b X File Type Input I or Output 0 Id s w b d Data File Number optional 0 output 1 input Slot delimiter optional not required for Data Files 2 to 255 s Slot number decimal Embedded 1 0 s
254. dition is detected from a field device Within the function file section of RSLogix 500 the user sees an EII folder Within the folder are four EII elements Each of these elements EII 0 EII 1 EIE2 and EII 3 are identical this explanation uses EIEO as shown below 7 4 Function Files Hsc Pro sm Ell jate Jen MMi oat re sl L PFN Program File Number LER Error Code H Ul User Interrupt Executing LUNE User Interrupt Enable H UIL User Interrupt Lost H UIP User Interrupt Pending L EIE Event Interrupt Enabled LAS Auto Start LED Error Detected LES Edge Select CYS Input Select Each EII can be configured to monitor any one of the first eight inputs 11 0 0 0 to 11 0 0 7 Each EII can be configured to detect rising edge or falling edge input signals When the configured input signal is detected at the input terminal the controller immediately scans the configured subroutine Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File Sub Elements Summary Table 18 12 Event Input Interrupt Function File Ell 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information PFN Program File Number EII 0 PFN word INT control read only 18 18 ER Error Code EII 0 ER word INT status read only 18 18 UIX User Interrupt Executing EII 0 UIX binary bit status read only 18 18 UIE User Interrupt Enable EII 0 UIE binary bit control read write 18 19
255. e I O Configuration folder Open slot 0 controller Select the embedded I O configuration tab V RO N Select the mask bits for the inputs that you want to operate as latching inputs 6 Select the state for the latching inputs The controller can detect both on rising edge and off falling edge pulses depending upon the configuration selected in the programming software The following information is provided for a controller looking for an on pulse When an external signal is detected on the controller latches this event In general at the next input scan following this event the input image point is turned on and remains on for the next controller scan It is then set to off at the next input scan The following figures help demonstrate this Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 16 1 0 Configuration Rising Edge Behavior Example 1 External Input Latched Status Input File Value Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 Scan Number X42 Input Scan Ladder Output Scan Scan Input Scan Ladder Scan Output Scan Input Ladder Scan Scan Output Scan Rising Edge Behavior Example 2 External Input Latched Status Input File Value Scan Number X Scan Number X 1 lL q Scan Number X42 Input Scan Ladder Output Scan Scan Input Scan
256. e Modbus RTU Slave e ASCII Table 3 12 DH 485 Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 7 Length always 30 8 Format Code always 0 g 1 1 Total Message Packets Received Total Message Packets Sent 0 to 7 Message Packet Retries 0 1 8to15 Retry Limit Exceeded Non Delivery Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Function Files 3 15 Table 3 12 DH 485 Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 12 0to 7 NAK No Memories Sent 8to 15 NAK No Memories Received 13 0to7 Total Bad Message Packets Received 8to15 Reserved 14 to 22 Reserved Table 3 13 DF1 Full Duplex Diagnostic Counters Block Word 6 Bit Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 Length always 30 Format Code always 1 7 8 9 CTS RTS Reserved Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD By wl np gt Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets ENQuiry Packets Sent NAK Packets Received ENQuiry Packets Received Bad Message Packets Received and NAKed No Buffer Space and NAK ed Duplicate Message Packets Received to 22 Reserved Table 3 14 DF1 Half Word 6 Bit Duplex Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Description Diagnostic Count
257. e User Fault Routine File Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 29 word 0 to 255 status read only This register is used to control which subroutine executes when a User Fault is generated STI Set Point Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 30 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 SPM SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 18 12 for more information STI File Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 31 word 0 to 65535 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 PFN SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 18 12 for more information Channel 0 Communications Incoming Command Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 0 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communicati
258. e From the control program perspective it is unique in that it is automatically scanned based on the STI set point STI Error Code ER Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ER Error Code STI O ER word INT status read only Error codes detected by the STI sub system are displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes Table 18 11 STI Error Code Error Recoverable Fault Description Code Controller 1 Invalid Program File Program file number is less than 3 greater than 255 or does not Number exist Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 14 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Using Interrupts STI User Interrupt Executing UIX User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the STI mechanism completes timing and the controller is scanning the STI PFN The UIX bit is cleared when the controller completes processing the STI subroutine The STI UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an STI interrupt is executing STI User Interrupt Enable UIE User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type UIE User Interrupt Enable STEO UIE binary bit control read write The UI
259. e PV must have a full scale binary range of 0 to 16383 If this value is less than 0 bit 15 set then a value of zero is used for PV and the Process var out of range bit is set bit 12 of word 0 in the control block If the process variable is greater than 16383 bit 14 set then a value of 16383 is used for PV and the Process var out of range bit is set The Control Variable calculated by the PID instruction has the same range of 0 to 16383 The Control Output word 16 of the control block has the range of 0 to 10096 You can set lower and upper limits for the instruction s calculated output values where an upper limit of 100 corresponds to a Control Variable limit of 16383 Process Control Instruction 19 19 Scaling to Engineering Units Scaling lets you enter the setpoint and zero crossing deadband values in engineering units and display the process variable and error values in the same engineering units Remember the process variable PV must still be within the range 0 to 16383 The PV is displayed in engineering units however Select scaling as follows 1 Enter the maximum and minimum scaling values MaxS and MinS in the PID control block The MinS value corresponds to an analog value of zero for the lowest reading of the process variable MaxS corresponds to an analog value of 16383 for the highest reading These values reflect the process limits Setpoint scaling is selected by entering a non zero value for one o
260. e This erases the previous character on the terminal e n Printer Mode when a delete character is encountered the controller echos the slash character then the deleted character Enable the Echo parameter to use Delete Mode Ignore Echo When Echo Mode is enabled all of the characters received are echoed back to the remote device This allows you to view characters on a terminal connected to the controller Toggles between Enabled and Disabled Disabled XON XOFF Allows you to Enable or Disable XON XOFF software handshaking XON XOFF software handshaking involves the XON and XOFF control characters in the ASCII character set When the receiver receives the XOFF character the transmitter stops transmitting until the receiver receives the XON character If the receiver does not receive an XON character after 60 seconds the transmitter automatically resumes sending characters Also when the receive buffer is more than 80 full an XOFF character is sent to the remote device to pause the transmission Then when the receive buffer drops to less than 80 full an XON character is sent to the remote device to resume the transmission Disabled RTS Off Delay x20 ms Allows you to select the delay between when a transmission is ended and when RTS is dropped Specify the RTS Off Delay value in increments of 20 ms Valid range is 0 to 65535 ce RTS Send Delay x20 ms Allows you to select the delay between
261. e destination allowing portions of the destination to be masked The mask bit functions as follows Table 13 5 Mask Function for MVM Instruction Source Bit Mask Bit Destination Bit 1 0 last state 0 0 last state 1 1 1 0 1 0 Mask data by setting bits in the mask to zero pass data by setting bits in the mask to one The mask can be a constant or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address Bits in the Destination that correspond to zeros in the Mask are not altered Using the MVM Instruction When using the MVM instruction observe the following Source Mask and Destination must be of the same data size i e all words or all long words To mask data set the mask bit to zero to pass data set the mask bit to one The mask can be a constant value or you can vary the mask by assigning a direct address NOTE Bits in the destination that correspond to zeros in the mask are not altered as shown in the shaded areas in the following table Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 13 4 Move Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Table 13 6 Mask Example Word Addressing Level Word Value in Value in Binary Hexadecimal 45 14113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value in Destination FFFF 1 11 11 1 41 1 1 11 1 1111111 Before Move Source Value 5555 011 10 1 0 1 1011101110110110 11 Mask FOFO 1 11 41 11 10 JO 00 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Value in Destination 5F5F O 1 JO 11 11 1 110331
262. e HSC sub system whenever the controller is in a run mode Mode Done MD Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access MD Mode HSC 0 MD bi Done t 0 or 1 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The MD Mode Done status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system when the HSC is configured for Mode 0 or Mode 1 behavior and the accumulator counts up to the High Preset Count Down CD Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CD Count Down HSC 0 CD bit 2t07 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The CD Count Down bit is used with the bidirectional counters modes 2 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CD bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CD bit is cleared 0 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 16 Using the High Speed Counter Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Count Up CU Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CU Count Up HSC 0 CU bit 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The CU Count Up bit is used with all of the HSCs modes 0 to 7 If the CE bit is set the CU bit is set 1 If the CE bit is clear the CU bit is cleared 0 HSC Mode MOD Description Address Data Format Type User Program Acces
263. e INT instruction is optional Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 8 Using Interrupts STS Selectable Timed Start STS Selectable Timed Start Time 1 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output Table 18 2 Execution Time for the STS Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 57 5 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 50 7 us 0 0 us The STS instruction can be used to start and stop the STI function or to change the time interval between STI user interrupts The STI instruction has one operand Time This is the amount of time in milliseconds which must expire prior to executing the selectable timed user interrupt A value of zero disables the STI function The time range is from 0 to 65 535 milliseconds The STS instruction applies the specified set point to the STI function as follows If a zero set point is specified the STI is disabled and STI O TIE is cleared 0 If the STI is disabled not timing and a value greater than 0 is entered into the set point the STI starts timing to the new set point and STI 0 TIE is set 1 If the STI is currently timing and the set point is changed the new setting takes effect immediately and the STI continues to time until it reaches the new set point Note that if the new setting is less than the current accumulated time the STI times out immediately For example if the STI has been timing for 15 microseconds and t
264. e action and then clear bit S 5 0 using an OTU instruction with S 5 0 Control Register Error Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 2 binary 0 or 1 status read write The LFU LFL FFU FFL BSL BSR SQO SQC and SQL instructions are capable of generating this error When bit S 5 2 is set 1 it indicates that the error bit of a control word used by the instruction has been set If this bit is ever set upon execution of the END or TND instruction major error 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a control register instruction take appropriate action and then clear bit S 5 2 using an OTU instruction with S 5 2 Mayor Error Detected in User Fault Routine Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 3 binary 0 or 1 status read write When set 1 the major error code S 6 represents the major error that occurred while processing the User Fault Routine due to another major error Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 12 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P System Status File Memory Module Boot Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 8 binary 0 or 1 status read write When this bit is set 1 by the controller it indicates that a memory module program has been transferred due to 1 10 Load Memory Module on Error or Default Program o
265. e helpful if you obtain training on the process control theory and methods used by your company There are a number of techniques that can be used to tune a PID loop The following PID tuning method is general and limited in terms of handling load disturbances When tuning we recommend that changes be made in the MANUAL mode followed by a return to AUTO Output limiting is applied in the MANUAL mode NOTE e This method requires that the PID instruction controls a non critical application in terms of personal safety and equipment damage e The PID tuning procedure may not work for all cases It is strongly recommended to use a PID Loop tuner package for the best result i e RSTune Rockwell Software catalog number 9323 1003D Process Control Instruction 19 23 Procedure 1 Create your ladder program Make certain that you have properly scaled your analog input to the range of the process variable PV and that you have properly scaled your control variable CV to your analog output 2 Connect your process control equipment to your analog modules Download your program to the processor Leave the processor in the program mode USE D Ensure that all possibilities of machine motion have been considered with respect to personal safety and equipment damage It is possible that your output CV may swing between 0 and 100 while tuning NOTE If you want to verify the scaling of your continuous system and or determine the initial loop
266. e is compatible with and supports the reading data A85CIF PLC2 485CIF Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data A85CIF PLC2 PLC5 Read The target device is compatible with and supports the reading data PLC5 command set PLC5 Write The target device is compatible with and supports the sending data PLC5 command set 1 See Important note below IMPORTANT The Common Interface File CIF in the MicroLogix 1200 1500 and SLC 500 processors is File 9 The CIF in the MicroLogix 1000 controller is Integer File 7 Table 21 3 Communication Commands Command Function Description 0x01 unprotected read 0x08 unprotected write OxOF 0x00 word range write 0x01 word range read 0x67 PLC typed write 0x68 PLC typed read OxA1 logical read with 2 address fields 0xA2 logical read with 3 address fields 0xA3 scattered read OxA7 file read 0x49 logical write with 2 address fields OxAA logical write with 3 address fields OxAB logical write with 4 address fields OxAF file write Communications Instructions 21 11 Data Table Address This variable defines the starting address in the local controller Valid file types for the Data Table Address are shown below Message Read Message Write Bit B Output 0 Timer T Input I Counter C Bit B Control R Timer T Integer N Counter C Long Word L Control R Integer
267. e it is running This provides the control program access to PWM status while it is running PWM status is only as fresh as the scan time of the controller Worst case latency is the maximum scan of the controller This condition can be minimized by placing a PWM instruction in the STI selectable timed interrupt file or by adding PWM instructions to your program to increase how often a PWM instruction is scanned Pulse Width Modulation Within the PWM function file are two PWM elements Each element can be set to control either output 2 O0 0 2 on 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB PWM Function File and 1764 28BXB or output 3 O0 0 3 on 1764 28BXB only Function file element PWM 0 is shown below 3 Function Files Cf x Hsc Pto PwM sti jel rRtc oat ve MMi sl E PwM H OUT Output DS Decelerating Status LAS Aun Status L AS Accelerating Status r EP Profile Parameter Select HIS Idle Status r ED Error Detected Status L NS Normal Operation Status EH Enable Hard Stop ES Enable Status follows rung state L EH Error Cade OF Output Frequency Hz OFS Operating Frequency Status Hz LOC Duty Cycle e 8 456 45 6 TE TANI i Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 20 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Width Modulated The variables within each PWM element along with what type of behavior a
268. e4 2 Data Files Function Files Address Address Bas Mode Level N E o B Parameter v Elo g y dM a a e als 3 5 E e cegeseiririmztktiri eBEgmsBl sis o L e mj z 2E ZEIGE BISIS ES 5 a sja s 3 u Source Index ele elele e e Number ele elele e e Destination 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 20 ASCII Instructions Instruction Operation This instruction executes on a true rung The following conditions cause the controller to set the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 e Source string length is less than 1 or greater than 82 Index value is less than 1 or greater than 82 e Number value is less than 1 or greater than 82 Index value greater than the length of the Source string The Destination string is not changed in any of the above error conditions When the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 AHL ASCII Handshake Lines Instruction Type output AHL al eee Lines CEN gt Table 20 21 Execution Time for the AHL Instruction anne AND Mask 0002h CDN 2 Controller When Instruction Is OR Mask 0000h Control R62 CER gt True False Heide ca MicroLogix 1200 Series B FAN 3 or later
269. ead write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The OFI Overflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the overflow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the overflow variable caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the overflow this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes High Preset Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Using the High Speed Counter 5 15 Count Direction DIR Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access DIR Count I HSC O DIR bi Direction t 0 to 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The DIR Count Direction status flag is controlled by the HSC sub system When the HSC accumulator counts up the direction flag is set 1 Whenever the HSC accumulator counts down the direction flag is cleared 0 If the accumulated value stops the direction bit retains its value The only time the direction flag changes is when the accumulated count reverses This bit is updated continuously by th
270. easure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any applied filter offline When a device is not scanning controlling or when a programming device is not communicating with the controller offset A continuous deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point off state leakage current When a mechanical switch is opened Coff state no current flows through the switch Semiconductor switches and transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches have a small current flow when they are in the off state This current is referred to as the off state leakage current To ensure reliable operation the off state leakage current rating must be less than the minimum operating current rating of the device that is connected Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Glossary 6 Publication 1762 RMO001C EN P on delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller one shot A programming technique that sets a bit ON or OFF for one program scan online When a device is scanning controlling or when a programming device is communicating with the controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For out
271. ed deed RGD Re aed UID User Interrupt Disable llle UIE User Interrupt Enable av vox vs Sy eae Gee XxvYS UIF User Interrupt Flush 5 qim et b eC om we ate Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File Using the Event Input Interrupt EID Function File Chapter 19 The PID Conceptes ja toi eo RR po baba ee n The PID Equation Eq as atta sd p35 odi INPS eb RE p HES PD Data PIG ves Si seas be heh Oe oe t dod iii e dpt obo trabes cdi d PID Proportional Integral Derivative Input Parameters 22 30 66 v8 gee ek SOE uo Output Parameters gentes we bleed tepid PROPRE awe EN Tumino Parameters cerie Ge d eodd o cie ed oe ERR R NUMES ETOS Se roe eo qoe ad a ee den uoa cnp ect stg Analog I O Scaling s 93 Eee pec ES ha 8 oad RR Application Notes amp qx ws ado RR RE eR d Application Examples uus idee det ope Wa nado Table of Contents v Chapter 20 ASCII Instructions General Information saoao hot teh ees es 20 1 ASCII Instructions 2 20 1 Instruction Types and Operation 00 20 2 Protocol Overview omae cea bed Mago VIO o eee POE d 20 4 String ST Data DH su eedem te pnta o 09 es ger eani 20 5 Control Data Files aedes tb ep Sep e ete s 20 6 ACbcSCIP Olear BUGIS aci oh e oA Ee UP WAR INO EROR 20 7 AIC ASCII Integer to String lesen 20 8 AWA ASCII Write with Append 04 20 9 AWT ASCII Write 2 20 11 ABL Test Buffer for Tine tenue
272. ed task at the point where it suspended The Micrologix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 support the following User Interrupts User Fault Routine Event Interrupts 4 High Speed Counter Interrupts Selectable Timed Interrupt An interrupt must be configured and enabled to execute When any one of the interrupts is configured and enabled and subsequently occurs the user program 1 suspends its execution 2 performs a defined task based upon which interrupt occurred 3 returns to the suspended operation Program File 2 Interrupt Operation Example ue Program File 10 Program File 2 is the main control program Program File 10 is the interrupt routine rung 123 e An Interrupt Event occurs at rung 123 e Program File 10 is executed e Program File 2 execution resumes immediately after program file 10 is rung 275 scanned 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Using Interrupts 18 3 Specifically if the controller program is executing normally and an interrupt event occurs 1 the controller stops its normal execution 2 determines which interrupt occurred 3 goes immediately to rung 0 of the subroutine specified for that User Interrupt 4 begins executing the User Interrupt subroutine or set of subroutines if the specified subroutine calls a subsequent subroutine 5 completes the subroutine s
273. ed to the destination A length of 0 defaults to 82 This is word 1 in the control data file Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 24 ASCII Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Characters Read POS is the number of characters that the controller moved from the buffer to the string 0 to 82 This field is read only and resides in word 2 of the control data file Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 20 30 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 26 ARL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address iles Function Files Data Files Mode Level N E e T Parameter s E ob K Sle c z a Sizzla lE e 5j m gieggor mstutr issgisLsiss ollo e l a S SE IG Ble S S IE IS IS Ela Ela S la Channel Destination Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN b
274. el 0 al PLCS Read Ignore if timed out TO r Control Bits Awaiting Execution Ew pl Target Device Error ERE Message Timeout 5 Data Table Address M7 50 Local Node Addr dec 2 octal Local Hemote Local Message done DN Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Error Eror Code Hex 0 Description No errors In this example the controller reads 10 elements from the target device s Local Node 2 N7 file starting at word N7 50 The 10 words are placed in the controller s integer file starting at word N7 0 If five seconds elapse before the message completes error bit MG11 0 ER is set indicating that the message timed out Valid File Type Combinations Valid transfers between file types are shown below for MicroLogix messaging Local Data Types Communication Type Target Data Types o 1 BNL lt gt read write 0 1 S B N L T lt gt read write il C lt gt read write C R lt gt read write R 1 Output and input data types are not valid local data types for read messages Chapter 22 Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Data Logging allows you to capture store application data as a record for retrieval at a later time Each record is stored in a user configured queue in bat
275. elay Type Bit Instructions The ONS Storage Bit is the bit address that remembers the rung state from the previous scan This bit is used to remember the false to true rung transition Table 7 9 ONS Instruction Operation Rung Transition Storage Bit Rung State after Execution false to true one scan storage bit is set true true to true storage bit remains set false true to false false to false storage bit is cleared false Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 7 10 ONS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files perd ides Parameter 2 H o E z E z a m a S gt k 3 S 5 E gt jo o l lS le l is gel 5 olm zg5asE hkh5uassk4os a5 js s s iz Storage Bit OSR One Shot Rising OSF One Shot Falling Instruction Type output One Shot Rising Table 7 11 Execution Time for the OSR and OSF Instructions dici Band Controller OSR When Rung Is OSF When Rung Is True False True False Osr MicroLogix 1200 3 4 us 3 0 us 2 8 us 3 7 us One Shot Falling MicroLogix 1500 3 2 us 2 8 us 2 7 us 3 4 us Storage Bit B3 0 0 Output Bit B3 0 1 NOTE The OSR instruction for the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 does
276. em generates an interrupt To load data into the high preset the control program must do one of the following Toggle low to high the Set Parameters CHSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 5 26 The data loaded into the high preset must be less than or equal to the data resident in the overflow HSC 0 OVF parameter or an HSC error is generated Low Preset LOP Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP long word 32 bit INT control read write The LOP Low Preset is the lower setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub system generates an interrupt To load data into the low preset the control program must do one of the following Toggle low to high the Set Parameters CHSC 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system Load new HSC parameters using the HSL instruction See HSL High Speed Counter Load on page 5 26 The data loaded into the low preset must greater than or equal to the data resident in the underflow HSC 0 UNF parameter or an HSC error is generated If the underflow and low preset values are negative numbers the
277. en permission of Rockwell Automation is prohibited Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attention statements help you to identify a hazard avoid a hazard recognize the consequences IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product PLC 5 is a registered trademark and MicroLogix SLC 500 RSLogix and RSLinx are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Modbus is a trademark of Schneider Electric Incorporated DeviceNet is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association ODVA Firmware Revision History MicroLogix 1200 Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to this manual since the last printing as publication 1762 RM001B US P April 2000 To help you locate new and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph Features are added to the controllers through firmware upgrades Use the listing below to be sure that your controller s firmware is at the level you need Firmware upgrades are not required except to allow you access to the new features Catalog Series Revision Firmware Release Date Enhancement Number Letter Letter Release No 1762 L
278. ences between solid state programmable Application Considerations for SGI 1 1 controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices Solid State Controls An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA A complete listing of current documentation including ordering Allen Bradley Publication Index SD499 instructions Also indicates whether the documents are available on CD ROM or in multi languages A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Allen Bradley Industrial Automation AG 7 1 Glossary Common Techniques Used in this Manual steps The following conventions are used throughout this manual Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural e Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information Italic type is used for emphasis Change bars appear beside information that has been changed or added since the last revision of this manual Change bars appear in the margin as shown to the right of this paragraph Publication 1762 RMO01C EN P Rockwell Automation Support Preface 3 Rockwell Automation offers support services worldwide with over 75 Sales Support Offices 512 authorized Distributors and 260 authorized Systems Integrators located throughout the United States alone plus Rockwell Automation representativ
279. ent Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSCI 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 To disable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to disable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UID instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 10 Using Interrupts UIE User Interrupt Enable UIE User Interrupt Enable Interrupt Types Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output Table 18 6 Execution Time for the UIE Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 0 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 8 us 0 0 us The UIE instruction is used to enable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding enable bits Table 18 7 Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIE Instruction Interrupt Element Decima
280. eration deceleration period defines how many pulses are generated during the run phase In this implementation the acceleration deceleration intervals are the same Within the PTO function file there are PTO element s An element can be set to control either output 2 O0 0 2 on 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB or output 3 O0 0 3 on 1764 28BXB only The interface to the PTO sub system is accomplished by scanning a PTO instruction in the main program file file number 2 or by scanning a PTO instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operating sequence of a PTO instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a PTO instruction is on is solved true 2 The PTO instruction is started and pulses are produced based on the accelerate decelerate ACCEL parameters which define the number of ACCEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid 3 The ACCEL phase completes The RUN phase is entered and the number of pulses defined for RUN are output 5 The RUN phase completes 6 Decelerate DECEL is entered and pulses are produced based on the accelerate decelerate parameters which define the number of DECEL pulses and the type of profile s curve or trapezoid 7 The DECEL phase completes Using High Speed Outputs 6 3 8 The PTO instruction is DONE While the PTO instruction is being executed status bits and information are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PTO instru
281. ers Category Identifier Code always 2 Length always 30 Format Code always 2 7 8 9 CTS RTS Reserved Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD gt Il N Reserved Total Message Packets Sent Total Message Packets Received Undelivered Message Packets wk AE oes Ss wy NI C Message Packets Retried Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 3 16 Function Files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Table 3 14 DF1 Half Duplex Slave Diagnostic Counters Block Word Bit Description 1 NAK Packets Received Polls Received No Buffer Space Duplicate Message Packets Received 4 5 16 Bad Message Packets Received 17 8 9 19 to22 Reserved Table 3 15 Modbus RTU Slave Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Word Bit Description Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier Code always 2 Format Code always 4 6 7 Length always 30 8 9 CTS RTS Reserved Channel 0 Reserved Channel 1 DCD Bl wy N gt oo to 15 Reserved 10 Total Message Packets Sent 11 Total Message Packets Received for This Slave 12 Total Message Packets Received 13 Link Layer Error Count 14 Link Layer Error Code 15 to 22 Reserved Table 3 16 ASCII Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Pro
282. es For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level N Parameter E g B 2 ses is e ce eles els zle kan el 2 5 E _ N gt D z e fer fon i fz bo SS eS IE I I IE IS ES SE lS 8 SS S lao Source ele elele e ele ele Destination AWA ASCII Write with Append Instruction Type output AWA ASCI Write Append CEN gt Table 20 7 Execution Time for the AWA Instruction S 1143 lt DN gt Control R6 2 ee Controller When Instruction Is String Length 12 ER Characters Sent cl True False E 0 iud MicroLogix 1200 268 us 12 us character 14 1 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 236 us 10 6 us character 12 5 us Use the AWA instruction to write characters from a source string to an external device This instruction adds the two appended characters that you configure on the Channel Configuration screen The default is a carriage return and line feed appended to the end of the string NOTE You configure append characters via the Channel Configuration screen The default append characters are carriage return and line feed Programming AWA Instructions When programming ASCII output instructions always precede the ASCII instruction with conditional logic that detects when new data needs to be sent or send data on a time interval If sent on a time interval use an interval of 0
283. es B and higher You can use ASCII by configuring the RS 232 port channel 0 for ASCII Controllers only driver For tbe 1 764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 When configured for ASCII all received data is placed in a buffer To access the data use the ASCII instructions in your ladder program See ASCII Instructions on page 20 1 for information on using the ASCII instructions You can also send ASCII string data to most attached devices that accept ASCII data characters NOTE Only ASCII instructions can be used when a channel is configured for ASCII If you use a Message MSG instruction that references the channel an error occurs The channel configuration screen is shown below Channel Configuration x General Channel 0 Channel 1 Driver ASCII z Baud 1200 Parity NONE Termination Characters Termination 1 fad Termination 2 sH Protocol Control Control Line NoHandshaking Delete Mode CRT RTS Off Delay 20 ms 0 ATS Send Delay 20 ms 0 v Echo Cancel Apply Help The controller updates changes to the channel configuration at the next execution of a Service Communications SVC instruction I O Refresh REF instruction or when it performs Communications Servicing whichever comes first Publication 1762 RM001C EN P E 14 Protocol Configuration When the driver is set to ASCII the following parameters can be changed Table E 9 ASCII Channel Configur
284. es and data files The maximum data memory usage is 4K words as shown below 2 e A Data Words e 5 A OK Program Words 3 65K 4 35K MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor The 1764 LRP processor supports 12K of memory Memory can be used for program files and data files The maximum data memory usage is 4K words as shown below Data Words 2 A e ou A A 8 7K e A eo Program Words IMPORTANT For the MicroLogix 1500 the maximum file size of any single ladder file is 6 4K words You can utilize the entire programming space by using multiple ladder files through the use of subroutines The 1764 LRP processor also supports 48K of battery backed memory for Data Logging Operations See Chapter 22 for Data Logging information See MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page B 1 to find the memory usage for specific instructions Data Files Controller Memory and File Types Data files store numeric information including I O status and other data associated with the instructions used in ladder subroutines The data file 2 5 types are File Name File File Words per File Description Identifier Number Element Output File 0 0 1 The Output File stores the values that are written to the physical outputs during the Output Scan Input File 1 1 The Input File stores the values that are read from the physical inputs during the Input Scan Status
285. es in every major country in the world Local Product Support Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for sales and order support product technical training warranty support support service agreements Technical Product Assistance If you need to contact Rockwell Automation for technical assistance please review the Fault Messages and Error Codes on page D 1 and the Troublesbooting appendix in your controller s User Manual first Then call your local Rockwell Automation representative Rockwell Automation phone numbers appear on the back of this manual Your Questions or Comments on this Manual If you find a problem with this manual or you have any suggestions for how this manual could be made more useful to you please contact us at the address below Rockwell Automation Control and Information Group Technical Communication Dept A602V P O Box 2086 Milwaukee WI 53201 2086 or visit our internet page at http www ab com micrologix or http www rockwellautomation com Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Preface 4 Publication 1762 RMO01C EN P Embedded 1 0 1 0 Configuration Chapter 1 This section discusses the various aspects of Input and Output features of the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 controllers Each controller comes with a certain amount of embedded I O which is physically located on the controller The controller also allows for adding expansion I O This section discu
286. et Interrupt HFI High Preset Interrupt UFI Underflow Interrupt OFI Overflow Interrupt LPR Low Preset Reached HPA High Preset Reached DIR Count Direction LIF Underflow OF Overflow MD Mode Done CD Count Down CU Count Up MOD HSC Mode ACC Accumulator HIP High Preset 2147483647 LOP Low Preset 2147483548 OVE Overtlow 2147483547 UNF Underflaw 2147483648 OMB Qutput Mask Bits HPO High Preset Output LPO Low Preset Output coOocoococococoouolcooco ccoccocoocococooccoco i E E E L E E E E L E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E L E The HSC function along with the PTO and PWM instructions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Using the High Speed Counter 5 3 The HSC is extremely versatile the user can select or configure each HSC for any one of eight 8 modes of operation Operating Modes are discussed later in this chapter See section HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 Some of the enhanced capabilities of the High Speed Counters are e 20 kHz operation High speed direct control of outputs e 32 bit signed integer data count range of 2 147 483 647 Programmable High and Low presets an
287. eue Separator Character Choose the character to act as the separator for the data in this queue tab comma or space The separator character may be the same or different for each queue configured Date Stamp optional if selected the date is recorded in mm dd yyyy format Time Stamp optional if selected the time is recorded in hh mm ss format Address to Log Enter the address of an item to be recorded and click onAccept to add the address to the Current Address List The address can be any 16 or 32 bit piece of data Current Address List This is the list of items to be recorded Record size can be up to 80 bytes You can use the Delete button to remove items from this list See page 22 3 for information on record size A record consists of configured Date Stamp Time Stamp Current Address List and Separator Characters 1 If the real time clock is not present on the controller and Date Stamp and Time Stamp are selected enabled the date is recorded as 00 00 0000 and the time as 00 00 00 4 After entering all the information for the data log queue click on OK The queue is added to the Data Log Que window with a corresponding queue number This is the queue number to use in the DLG instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 22 8 Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only DLG Data Log Instruction DLG Data Log queue number 0 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Ty
288. ever retentive data is lost This bit remains set until you clear 0 it The controller validates retentive data at power up If user data is invalid the controller sets the Retentive Data Lost indicator The data in the controller are the values that were in the program when the program was last transferred to the controller If the Retentive Data Lost bit is set a fault occurs when entering an executing mode but only if the Fault Override bit S 1 8 is not set System Status File C 13 Processor Battery Low MicroLogix 1500 only Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 11 binary 0 or 1 status read only This bit is set 1 when the battery is low IMPORTANT Install a replacement battery immediately See your hardware manual for more information See also RTC Battery Operation on page 3 4 Input Filter Selection Modified Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 13 binary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 whenever the discrete input filter selection in the control program is not compatible with the hardware ASCII String Manipulation Error Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 15 binary 0 or 1 status read This bit is set 1 whenever an invalid string length occurs When S 5 15 is set the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6
289. ever you need us Rockwell Automation brings together leading brands in industrial automation including Allen Bradley controls Reliance Electric power transmission products Dodge mechanical power transmission components and Rockwell Software Rockwell Automation s unique flexible approach to helping customers achieve a competitive advantage is supported by thousands of authorized partners distributors and system integrators around the world Allen Bradley SENS DODGE Americas Headquarters 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 ROCKWELL R kw i European Headquarters SA NV avenue Herrmann Debroux 46 1160 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 06 00 Fax 32 2 663 06 40 oc e Asia Pacific Headquarters 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Automation Publication 1762 RM001C EN P November 2000 PN 40072 079 01 C Supersedes Publication 1762 RM001B US P April 2000 2000 Rockwell International Corporation Printed in the U S A
290. f Contents vi Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time System Status File Fault Messages and Error Codes Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Chapter 22 Queues and Records voy 4 4425 riy ESSO RS TES POLES 22 2 Configuring Data Log Queues 000000000 22 6 DLG Data Log Instruction llle 22 8 Data Log Status Be yo ka ve ae Ox ooo SO eek WR OX 22 9 Retrieving Reading Records cse sape be te a 22 11 Accessing Tbe Retrieval File 4 0 vue id ad vb pen Seed 22 11 Conditions that Will Erase the Data Retrieval File 22 13 Appendix A Programming Instructions Memory Usage and Execution Time A 1 MicroLogix 1200 Scan Time Worksheet A 7 Appendix B Programming Instructions Memory usage and Execution Time B 1 MicroLogix 1500 Scan Time Worksheet B 6 Appendix C Status File Overview eoe bt ee bee a hoe eels eee he C 2 Stat s File Details ity ul dri sin iai aide Gok pois to i a eh ps dtt C 3 Appendix D Identifying Controller Paultse 22e odore D 1 Contacting Rockwell Automation for Assistance D 9 Appendix E DH 485 Communication Protocol 2 2 ye a e E 2 DEIlrulbDuplesProtoeOl se 9045339491593 E 5 DF1 Half Duplex Protocol 0 0 00000 eee eee E 6 Modbus RTU Slave Protocol 4 2 Ea Xo EAR cd RS E
291. f string data contains Recoverable Check the first word of the string data LENGTH a negative zero or value greater element for invalid values and correct the than 82 data 1 xx indicates module number If xx 0 problem cannot be traced to a specific module 2 The xx in this error code means that the error occurs at the location of the last properly configured Expansion O module 1 You should use this information in conjunction with the specific error code to determine the source of the problem 3 Applies to MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Fault Messages and Error Codes D 9 Contacting Rockwell If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for Automation for assistance it is helpful to obtain the following information ready Assistance controller type series letter and revision letter of the base unit series letter revision letter and firmware FRN number of the processor on bottom side of processor unit NOTE You can also check the FRN by looking at word 8 59 Operating System FRN in the Status File e controller LED status controller error codes found in S2 6 of status file Rockwell Automation phone numbers are listed on the back cover of this manual To contact us via the Internet go to http www rockwellautomation com Publication 1762 RM001C EN P D 10 Fault Messages and Error Codes Publica
292. g or communication zone problem 90H PCCC Description Remote station cannot buffer command BOH PCCC Description Remote station problem due to download COH PCCC Description Cannot execute command due to active IPBs DOH One of the following e No IP address configured for the network e Bad command unsolicited message error e Bad address unsolicited message error No privilege unsolicited message error D1H Maximum connections used no connections available D2H Invalid internet address or host name D3H No such host Cannot communicate with the name server D4H Connection not completed before user specified timeout D5H Connection timed out by the network Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 22 Communications Instructions Error Code Description of Error Condition D7H Connection refused by destination host D8H Connection was broken DOH Reply not received before user specified timeout DAH No network buffer space available E1H PCCC Description Illegal Address Format a field has an illegal value E2H PCCC Description Illegal Address format not enough fields specified E3H PCCC Description Illegal Address format too many fields specified E4H PCCC Description Illegal Address symbol not found E5H PCCC Description Illegal Address Format symbol is 0 or greater than the maximum number of characters support by this
293. ger The ENC instruction converts the values as shown in the table below Source Bits Destination Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00 15to04 03 02 01 00 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 X X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 X X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 X X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 X X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 X X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 X X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 X X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 X 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 x determines the state of the flag NOTE Updates to Math Status Bits Table 11 6 Math Status Bits If source is zero the destination is zero and the math status is zero the flag is set to 1 With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry always resets 0 1 Overflow sets if more than one bit in the source is set otherwise resets The math overflow bit S 5 0 is not set 0 2 Zero Bit sets If result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit always rese
294. gh 31 are also assigned Ctrl codes Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 32 ASCII Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Messaging Overview Chapter 2 1 Communications Instructions This chapter contains information about the Message MSG and Service Communications SVC communication instructions This chapter provides information on how messaging works what the instructions look like how to configure and use the instructions examples and timing diagrams The communication instructions read or write data to another station Instruction Used To Page MSG Transfer data from one device to another 21 3 SVC Interrupt the program scan to execute the service communications part 21 26 of the operating cycle The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction The communication architecture is comprised of three primary components e Ladder Scan e Communications Buffers e Communication Queue These three components determine when a message is transmitted by the controller For a message to transmit it must be scanned on a true rung of logic When scanned the message and the data defined within the message if it is a write message are placed in a communication buffer The controller continues to scan the remaining user program The message is processed and sent out of the controller via the communications port after the ladder logic completes during the Service Communicati
295. gix 1500 only 1500 only e Retentive Data is lost See page e Contact your local Rockwell Automation C 12 MicroLogix 1200 only representative if the error persists 0003 MEMORY MODULE Memory module memory error This Non User Re program the memory module If the error USER PROGRAM IS ferror can also occur when going to persists replace the memory module CORRUPT the Run mode 0004 MEMORY INTEGRITY While the controller was powered Non User e Cycle power on your unit Then ERROR up ROM or RAM became corrupt re download your program and start up your system e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual e Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 0005 RETENTIVE DATA IS Retentive Data is lost See page Recoverable Contact your local Rockwell Automation LOST MicroLogix 1200 only C 12 representative if the error persists Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Error Code Hex 0006 Advisory Message MEMORY MODULE HARDWARE FAULT Description The memory module hardware faulted or the memory module is incompatible with OS Fault Classification Non User Fault Messages and Error Codes D 3 Recommended Action Upgrade the OS to be compatible with memory module Obtain a new memory module 0007 MEMORY MODULE TRANSFER ERROR Failure during memory module transfer Non User Re attempt the tra
296. h remove pending interrupts from the system selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding flush bits Table 18 9 Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UIF Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSCI 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 To flush interrupts 1 Select which interrupts you want to flush 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UIF instruction For example to disable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 12 Using Interrupts Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI a Ee usc Pro Sil jen mre jew mM par ver alel Function File CEM 0 8 1 H FFN Program File Number 0 H ER Error Code 0 LIE User Interrupt Executing 0 UIE User Interrupt E
297. he Control Bits Sub Element 16 of the MSG File Element are defined below Message File Sub Element 16 Control Bits Bit Address Description Parameter Size UserProgram J Access 15 MG11 0 0 EN Enable N bit read write 1 MSG enabled 0 MSG not enabled 9 to Reserved N bit read write 14 8 MG11 0 0 TO Time Out N bit read write 1 MSG time out by user O no user MSG time out 0 to Reserved N bit read write 7 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 6 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The Status Bits Sub Element 17 of the MSG File Element are defined below Message File Sub Element 17 Status bits Bit Address Description Parameter Size User Program Access 15 Reserved N bit read only 14 MG11 0 0 ST Start N bit read only 1 MSG transmitted and acknowledged by target device 0 MSG has not been received by target 13 MG11 0 0 DN Done N bit read only 1 2 MSG completed successfully 0 MSG not complete 12 MG11 0 0 ER Error N bit read only error detected 0 no error detected 11 Reserved N bit read only 10 MG11 0 0 EW Enabled and Waiting N bit read only 1 MSG Enabled and Waiting O MSG not Enabled and Waiting 1 to Reserved N bit read only 9 0 MG11 0 0 R Range 1 Local 0 Remote Y bit read only Local Messages Communications Instructions 21 7 The controller is capable of communicating using local or re
298. he EII sub system is displayed in this register The table below explains the error codes Table 18 13 Ell Error Codes Error Recoverable Fault Description Code Controller 1 Invalid Program File Program file number is less than 3 greater than 255 or does not Number exist 2 Invalid Input Valid numbers must be 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 Selection 3 Input Selection Ells cannot share inputs Each Ell must have a unique input Overlap Ell User Interrupt Executing UIX Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIX User Interrupt Executing Ell 0 UIX binary bit status read only The UIX User Interrupt Executing bit is set whenever the EII mechanism detects a valid input and the controller is scanning the PFN The EII mechanism clears the UIX bit when the controller completes its processing of the EII subroutine The EII UIX bit can be used in the control program as conditional logic to detect if an EII interrupt is executing Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Using Interrupts 18 19 Ell User Interrupt Enable UIE Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIE User Interrupt Enable EII 0 UIE binary bit control read write The UIE User Interrupt Enable bit is used to enable or disable EH subroutine processing This bit must be set if you want the controller to process the EII subroutine when a
299. he STI set point is changed from 20 microseconds to 10 microseconds an STI user interrupt occurs at the next start of rung Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 18 3 STS Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Add Data Files Function Files 1 E Address 1 Mode Level e Parameter E 29 z E elis e x e F alz S z v 2 alo lS o l lz lE le l ia E Le l5 5g eo oo f fe bs S IE SE IG BE S FE IS S Ela 2 i S S 5 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EH BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Using Interrupts 18 9 UID User Interrupt Disable Instruction Type output al User ea Disable __ Table 18 4 Execution Time for the UID Instruction MEOE ES Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 10 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 8 us 0 0 us The UID instruction is used to disable selected user interrupts The table below shows the types of interrupts with their corresponding disable bits Table 18 5 Types of Interrupts Disabled by the UID Instruction Interrupt Element Decimal Corresponding Value Bit Ell Ev
300. he adapter is not able to communicate with a module F8H PCCC Description The 1771 module response was not valid size checksum etc F9H PCCC Description Duplicated Label FAH Target node cannot respond because another node is file owner has sole file access FBH Target node cannot respond because another node is program owner has sole access to all files FCH PCCC Description Disk file is write protected or otherwise inaccessible off line only FDH PCCC Description Disk file is being used by another application update not performed off line only FFH Local communication channel is shut down NOTE For 1770 6 5 16 DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual users The MSG error code reflects the STS field of the reply to your MSG instruction Codes EO to EF represent EXT STS codes 0 to F Codes FO to FC represent EXT STS codes 10 to 1C Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Communications Instructions 21 23 Timing Diagram forthe The following section describes the timing diagram for a message i instruction MSG Instruction instruction 3 Target node 5 Target node processes packet 1 Rung goes true receives packet successfully and returns data read or acknowledges receipt write m o B 5 ig 1 l I I EN TEEN i I 1 I l EW ga NENNEN NN I I 1 I I ST Qe d bn I I I I DN LUE CEN ER TO 0 r y y 1 If there is room in any of the four active message buffers when the MSG rung become
301. he controller is operating Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 26 Using the High Speed Counter HSL High Speed Counter Load HSC Number L High Speed Counter Load HSCO High Preset N7 0 Low Preset N7 1 Output High Source N7 2 Output Low Source N7 3 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output Controller Data Size Execution Time When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 46 7 us 0 0 us long word 47 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 39 7 us 0 0 us long word 40 3 us 0 0 us The HSL High Speed Load instruction allows the high and low presets and high and low output source to be applied to a high speed counter These parameters are described below Counter Number Specifies which high speed counter is being used 0 HSCO and 1 HSCI MicroLogix 1500 only High Preset Specifies the value in the high preset register The data ranges for the high preset are 32786 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Low Preset Specifies the value in the low preset register The data ranges for the low preset are 32786 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Output High Source Specifies the value in the output high register The data range for the output high source is from 0 to 65 535 Output Low Source Specifies the value in the output low register The data range for the output low source is from 0 to
302. he counter If the counter s accumulated value decrements past the value specified in this variable an underflow interrupt is generated When the underflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system resets the accumulated value to the overflow value and the counter then begins counting from the overflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the underflow position provided it is less than the overflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 To load data into the underflow variable the control program must toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system NOTE Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset HSC 0 HIP or an HSC error is generated Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 24 Using the High Speed Counter Output Mask Bits OMB Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 0MB word 16 bit binary control read only The OMB Output Mask Bits define which outputs on the controller can be directly controlled by the high speed counter The HSC sub system has the ability to directly without control program interaction turn outputs ON or OFF based on the HSC accumulator reaching the High or Low presets The
303. he file number does not exist 2 8 Bad Modbus Address The function attempted to access an invalid Modbus address 3 9 Table Write protected The function attempted to write to a read only file 3 10 File Access Denied Access to this file is not granted 2 11 File Already Owned Data file is already owned by another process 2 1 If Modbus Command is sent with a valid Broadcast address then no exception reply will be sent for Error Codes 2 through 11 2 See Table E 4 on pageE 9 for valid Modbus memory mapping Publication 1762 RM001C EN P E 12 Protocol Configuration When the system driver is Modbus RTU Slave the following communication port parameters can be changed Table E 8 Modbus RTU Slave Communications Configuration Parameters W MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 Series B and higher Processors only Parameter Options Programming Software Default Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even odd none Node Address 1 to 247 decimal 1 Control Line no handshaking Half Duplex modem no handshaking Inter character 0 to 6553 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 3 5 character times 0 Timeout x1 ms Specifies the minimum delay between characters that indicates the end of a message packet Modbus Data Table Coils Discrete outputs Modbus addresses 0001 to 4096 range 3 to 255 0 no file 0 File Number Contacts Discrete inputs Modbus addre
304. hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 20 30 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 12 ABL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address iles Function Files Data Files Mode Level a Parameter a E T a se 2t ec a a e l 3 v E rm ae l9 jo j zE lg ls la lal ElL 5 le lels SMAASAHMHHARAHHENHNAKHHHHSHAAER Channel Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Publication 1762 RM001C EN P ACB Number of Characters in Buffer ACB _ Ascii Chars In Buffer Channel Control Characters Error 0 R6 1 2 lt 0 lt lt EN gt I CDN gt lt ER 5 Instruction Operation ASCII Instructions 20 15 When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit EN is set The instruction is put in the ASCII instruction queue the Queue bit EU is set and program scan continues The instruction is then executed outside of the program scan However if the queue is empty the instruction executes immediately Upon execution the Run bit RN is set The controller determines the number of characters up to and including
305. hift Left BSL Bit Shift Left L C EN gt File B3 1 Control R6 0 CDN gt Bit Address B32 0 0 Length 1 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 14 5 FLL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 I Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level a Parameter E 2 E oOo ec a 8 us 5 E c geleisi mrstrimwEPs s is s o or la lz a S i E5 SIS IE S EE aE u Source eje elele e e e e elele Destination ele elele ole Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DATI TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Table 14 6 Execution Time for the BSL Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 32 us 1 3 us word 1 3 us MicroLogix 1500 26 1 us 1 06 us word 1 4 us The BSL instruction loads data into a bit array on a false to true rung transition one bit at a time The data is shifted left through the array then unloaded one bit at a time The following figure shows the operation of the BSL instruction
306. icroLogix 1200 Series A these instructions only transmit data MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 and later MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 and later ABL Test Buffer for Line ARD ASCII Read Characters ACB Number of Characters in Buffer ARL ASCII Read Line ACL ASCII Clear Buffer AWA ASCII Write with Append AHL ASCII Handshake Lines AWT ASCII Write When the ACL ASCII Clear Buffer instruction is encountered in a ladder logic program it executes immediately and causes all instructions to be removed from the ASCII queue including stopping execution of the ASCII instruction currently executing The ER error bit is set for each instruction that is removed from the ASCII queue ASCII Instructions 20 3 When any of the other port control instructions are encountered in a ladder logic program it may or may not execute immediately depending on the contents of the ASCII queue The ASCII queue is a FIFO first in first out queue which can contain up to 16 instructions The ASCII queue operates as follows When the instruction is encountered on a rung and the ASCII queue is empty the instruction executes immediately It may take several program scans for the instruction to complete When the instruction is encountered on a rung and there are from 1 to 15 instructions in the ASCII queue the instruction is put into the ASCII queue and is executed when the preceding instructions are completed If the
307. ieved first and then deleted The record is deleted as soon as it is queued for transmission If there is a power failure before the transmission is complete the record is lost The data is retrieved as an ASCII string with the following format lt date gt lt UDS gt lt time gt lt UDS gt lt 1 Data gt lt UDS gt lt 2 Data gt lt UDS gt lt UDS gt lt Last Data gt lt NUL gt e where date mm dd yyyy ASCII characters date is optional time hh mm ss ASCII characters time is optional UDS User Defined Separator TAB COMMA or SPACE X Data ASCII decimal representation of the value of the data lt NUL gt record string is null terminated e f the Real Time Clock module is not present in the controller date is formatted as 00 00 0000 and lt time gt is formatted as 00 00 00 e The Communications Device determines the number of sets of data that have been recorded but not retrieved See the Data Log Status File on p age22 9 e The controller performs a the data integrity check for each record If the data integrity check is invalid a failure response is sent to the Communications Device The data set is deleted as soon as the failure response is queued for transmission NOTE For easy use with Microsoft Excel use the TAB character as the separator character Accessing the Retrieval You can use a dedicated retrieval tool or create your own application File Retrieval Tools There are a nu
308. igh Speed Outputs Momentary Logic Enable Example In this example the rung state is a momentary or transitional type of input This means that the false to true rung transition enables the PTO instruction and then returns to a false state prior to the PTO instruction completing its operation If a transitional input to the PTO instruction is used the Done DN bit turns on when the instruction completes but only remains on until the next time the PTO instruction is scanned in the user program The structure of the control program determines when the DN bit goes off So to detect when the PTO instruction completes its output you can monitor the Done DN Idle ID or Normal Operation NO status bits Stage ope ppp pp B pope Rung State Sub Elements Relative Timing Normal Operation NO Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS Decelerate Status DS Enable EN Done DN Idle ID Jog Pulse JP Jog Continuous JC Start of PTO Start of PTO Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Stage Rung State Sub Elements Normal Operation NO Using High Speed Outputs 6 5 Standard Logic Enable Example In this example the rung state is a maintained type of input This means that it enables the PTO instruction Normal Operation NO and maintains its logic state until after the PTO instructi
309. il B3 0 i pum NJO L CDNS Controller Data Size When Rung Is Source 1 0 0 True False felts R60 02 Mi crologix1200 word 735 us 7 1 us Position 0 lt long word 26 3 us 7 1 us MicroLogix 1500 word 20 1 us 6 3 us long word 22 7 us 6 3 us On a false to true rung transition the SQC instruction is used to compare masked source words or long words with the masked value at a reference address the sequencer file for the control of sequential machine operations When the status of all non masked bits in the source word match those of the corresponding reference word the instruction sets the found bit FD in the control word Otherwise the found bit FD is cleared The bits mask data when reset 0 and pass data when set 1 The mask can be fixed or variable If you enter a hexadecimal code it is fixed If you enter an element address or a file address direct or indirect for changing the mask with each step it is variable When the rung goes from false to true the instruction increments to the next step word in the sequencer file Data stored there is transferred through a mask and compared against the source for equality While the rung remains true the source is compared against the reference data for every scan If equal the FD bit is set in the SQCs control counter Applications of the SQC instruction include machine diagnostics Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Sequencer Instructions 15 3 The f
310. in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Table 12 2 Math Status Bits Withthis Bit J TheControle S0 0 Cary Jjalwaysreset S S 0 1 Overflow always resets 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets AND Bit Wise AND AND Bitwise AND Source A N7 0 0000h lt Source B N7 1 0000h lt Dest N7 2 0000h lt Instruction Type output Table 12 3 Execution Time for the AND Instruction Logical Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 2 2 US 0 0 us long word 9 2 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 0 us 0 0 us long word 79 us 0 0 us 12 3 The AND instruction performs a bit wise logical AND of two sources and places the result in the destination Table 12 4 Truth Table for the AND Instruction Destination A AND B Source A 111 11 11 11 10 1 0 J0 0 1 1 10 J0 Source B 111 10 JO J1 41 41 41 1 0 0 lon Destination 1 11 10 JO 1 JO 41 0 JO 0 0 10 10 J0 Tee Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACC for the Destination parameter in the AND OR and XOR instructions For more information see Using Logical Instructions on page 12 1 and Updates to Math Status Bits on p
311. ing and no errors are present e Cleared 0 PTO sub system is not in an idle state Gt is running PTO Error Detected ED Sub Element Address DataFormat Range Type User Program Description Access ED Error Detected Status PTO O ED bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO ED Error Detected Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO instruction is in an error state If an error state is detected the specific error is identified in the error code register PTO 0 ER The ED bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in an error state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in an error state PTO Normal Operation Status NS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access NS Normal Operation Status PTO 0 NS bit Oor1 status read only The PTO NS Normal Operation Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO is in its normal state A normal state is ACCEL RUN DECEL or DONE with no PTO errors The NS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction is in its normal state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not in its normal state Using High Speed Outputs 6 11
312. ing the decel phase Once set the decel phase completes without an error or fault condition Normal Ramp Function without CS Accel Run Decel Controlled Stop CS Set N N N Ramp Function Normal Ramp Decel After CS Function is Set Accel Run Decel If the CS bit is set during the accel phase the accel phase completes and the PTO immediately enters the decel phase Controlled Stop CS Set Ramp Function Normal Ramp Decel After CS Function is Set X Accel Decel Using High Speed Outputs 6 15 PTO Jog Frequency JF Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access JF Jog Frequency Hz PTO 0 JF word INT Oto 20 000 control read write The PTO JF Jog Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PTO output during all Jog phases This value is typically determined by the type of device that is being driven the mechanics of the application or the device components being moved Data less than zero and greater than 20 000 generates a PTO error PTO Jog Pulse JP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access JP Jog Pulse PTO Q JP bit 00r 1 control read write The PTO JP Jog Pulse bit is used to instruct the PTO sub system to generate a single pulse The width is defined by the Jog Frequency parameter in the PTO functio
313. ints Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to output terminals 0 through 15 Output Bit Position 15 14 13 172 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 r w r w r w r w Ir w r w r w Ir w r w Ir w r w fiw rw r w Ir w r w Word r w read and write 1 0 Configuration 1 11 Analog 1 0 Configuration 1769 IF4 Input Data File For each input module words 0 through 3 contain the analog values of the inputs Bit Position 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1 l0 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 0 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 1 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 2 SGN Analog Input Data Channel 3 not used 3 S2 81 S0 UO 00 U1 101 U2 02 U3 03 jSetto0 Word oj e IN gt o The bits are defined as follows e SGN Sign bit in two s complement format e Sx General status bits for channels 0 through 3 This bit is set 1 when an error over or under range exists for that channel Ux Under range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection Ox Over range flag bits for channels 0 through 3 These bits can be used in the control program for error detection 1769 OF2 Output Data File For each module words 0 and 1 in the output data file contain the channel 0 and channel 1 output data Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 1039 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
314. ions in your program when executed true Program Scan Sub Total Output Scan sum of below Overhead if expansion 0 used 29 us Expansion Output Words X 2 ys or X 6 5 us if Forcing is used Output Scan Sub Total Communications Overhead Worst Case 1100 us Typical Case 400 us Use this number if the communications port is configured but not communicating to 150 us any other device Use this number if the communications port is in Shutdown mode Ous Pick one of the four numbers for Channel Pick one of the four numbers for Channel 1 Communications Overhead Sub Total System Overhead Add this number if your system includes a 1764 RTC 1764 MMT1RTC or MM2RTC 80 us Add this number if your system includes a 1764 DAT 530 us Housekeeping Overhead 240 ys 240 System Overhead Sub Total Totals Sum of all Multiply by Communications Multiplier from Table Time Tick Multiplier X1 02 Total Estimated Scan Time 1 Communications Overhead is a function of the device connected to the controller This will not occur every scan Communications Multiplier Table Publication 1762 RMO01C EN P Multiplier at Various Baud Rates Protocol 38 4K 19 2K 9 6K 4 8K 24K 12K 600 300 Inactive DF1 Full Duplex 1 38 1 20 1 13 1 10 1 09 1 08 1 08 1 08 1 00
315. ior at Power Up Program False Don t Care Don t Care Program True Program w Fault Remote False Last State REM Download Download REM Program REM Program Program or Any Test mode REM Suspend or Suspend REM Suspend REM Run or Run REM Run Run Don t Care REM Run True Don t Care Don t Care REM Program w Fault Run False Last State REM Suspend or Suspend Suspend Any Mode except REM Suspend or Suspend Run Run Don t Care Run True Don t Care Don t Care Run w Fault 1 Run w Fault is a fault condition just as if the controller were in the Program w Fault mode outputs are reset and the contrdbr program is not being executed However the controller enters Run mode as soon as the Major Error Halted flag is cleared See also MB Mode Behavior on page 3 8 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 8 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P System Status File Mayor Error Halted Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 13 binary 0 or 1 status read write The controller sets 1 this bit when a major error is encountered The controller enters a fault condition and word S 6 contains the Fault Code that can be used to diagnose the condition Any time bit S 1 13 is set the controller e turns all outputs off and flashes the FAULT LED or enters the User Fault Routine allowing the control program to attempt recovery from the fault condition If the User Fault Routine is able to clear S 1 13 and
316. is bit indicates that data has been overwritten See User Program Transfer Requirements on page 2 7 for more information See Setting Download File Protection on pag e2 6 for more information RTC Year Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 37 word 1998 to 2097 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 YR See Real Time Clock Function File on page 3 3 for more information RTC Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 38 word 1 to 12 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 MON See Real Time Clock Function File on page 3 3 for more information RTC Day of Month Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 39 word 1 to 31 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 DAY See Real Time Clock Function File on page 3 3 for more informatio
317. is present or e an expansion l O cable is configured in the user program and a cable is physically present but the types do not match cable that is not present e Re compile reload the program and enter the Run mode or e Add the missing cable e Cycle power Publication 1762 RM001C EN P D 8 Fault Messages and Error Codes Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex xx8Bl1 2 EXPANSION 1 0 e Either an expansion I O power Non User Correct the user program to eliminate a POWER SUPPLY supply is configured in the user power supply that is not present CONFIGURATION program but no power supply is e Re compile reload the program and enter MISMATCH ERROR present or the Run mode or e an expansion I O power supply is e With power removed add the missing configured in the user program power supply and a power supply is physically present but the types do not match xxgclti2 EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion 1 0 object i e cable Non User e Correct the user program I O configuration OBJECT TYPE power supply or module in the user so that the object types match the actual MISMATCH program I O configuration is not the configuration and same object type as is physically e Re compile reload the program and enter present the Run mode Or e Correct the actual configuration to match the user program 1 0 configuration e Cycle power Ox1F39 INVALID STRING The first word o
318. it is set on completion of the instruction Once the requested number of characters are in the buffer all characters including the Termination characters are moved to the destination string The number of characters moved is stored in the POS word of the control data file The number in the Characters Read field is continuously updated and the Done bit DN is not set until all of the characters have been read Exception If the controller finds termination characters before done reading the Done bit DN is set and the number of characters found is stored in the POS word of the control data file NOTE For information on the timing of this instruction see the timing diagram on page 20 28 ASCII Instructions 20 25 ASC String Search Instruction Type output ASC String Search Table 20 27 Execution Time for the ASC Instruction Source ST10 6 Index 5 Controller When Instruction Is String Search ST10 7 Result N7 1 True False 0 MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 16 2 us 4 0 us matching character 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 13 4 us 3 5 us matching character 0 0 us Use the ASC instruction to search an existing string for an occurrence of the source string This instruction executes on a true rung Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source is the address of the string you want to find Index is the
319. ite 5 13 MD Mode Done HSC 0 MD bit Oor1 status read write 5 15 CD Count Down HSC 0 CD bit 2to7 status read only 5 15 CU Count Up HSC 0 CU bit 0to 7 status read only 5 16 MOD HSC Mode HSC 0 MOD word INT 0to 7 control read only 5 16 ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC long word 32 bit INT 0to 7 control read write 5 22 HIP High Preset HSC 0 HIP long word 32 bit INT 0to 7 control read write 5 22 LOP Low Preset HSC 0 LOP long word 32 bit INT 2to7 control read write 5 22 OVF Overflow HSC 0 0VF long word 32 bit INT 0 to 7 control read write 5 23 UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF long word 32 bit INT 2t07 control read write 5 23 OMB Output Mask Bits HSC 0 0MB word 16 bit binary 0to 7 control read only 5 24 HPO High Preset Output HSC 0 HPO word 16 bit binary 0to 7 control read write 5 25 LPO Low Preset Output HSC O LPO word 16 bit binary 2to7 control read write 5 25 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 n a not applicable Publication 1762 RM001C EN P HSC Function File Sub Elements Using the High Speed Counter 5 5 All examples illustrate HSCO Terms and behavior for HSC1 are identical Program File Number PFN Description Address Data Format usC Modes Type User Program Access PFN Program HSC 0 PFN word INT Oto7 control read only File Number 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The PFN Program File Number variable
320. ition G 7 run mode G 7 rung G 7 S save 6 7 SBR instruction 76 3 scale instruction 10 7 scale with parameters instruction 10 8 scan G 7 scan time G 7 last 100 uSec scan time status C 17 maximum scan time status C 15 scan time worksheet MicroLogix 1200 A 7 MicroLogix 1500 B 6 scan toggle status bit C 17 SCL instruction 10 7 SCP instruction 10 8 selectable timed interrupt STI function file 18 12 selectable timed start instruction 18 8 sequencer compare instruction 15 2 sequencer instructions 15 1 sequencer load instruction 15 8 sequencer output instruction 15 5 service communications instruction 21 26 sign flag C 3 sinking G 7 sourcing G 8 SQC instruction 15 2 SQL instruction 15 8 SQ0 instruction 15 5 SOR instruction 10 9 square root instruction 70 9 startup protection fault bit C 5 static file protection 2 8 status G 8 status file C 1 STI enabled bit C 9 Index 7 executing bit C 9 file number status C 76 function file 78 12 lost status bit C 12 mode status C 9 pending status bit C 9 set point status C 16 string data file 20 5 STS instruction 18 8 SUB instruction 10 4 subroutine label instruction 16 3 subtract instruction 70 4 SUS instruction 16 4 suspend code status C 14 suspend file status C 14 suspend instruction 76 4 SVC instruction 21 26 swap instruction 10 10 SWP instruction 10 10 T target bit file 3 9 3 11 target integer file 3 9 temporary end instruction 16 4 terminal G 8 throughput G 8 timer
321. its The following communication status bits allow you to customize or monitor communications servicing See General Channel Status Block on page 3 14 for additional status information Table 21 5 Communication Status Bits Address Description CS0 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending CS0 4 1 MPP Incoming Message Reply Pending CS0 4 2 MCP Outgoing Message Command Pending CS0 4 4 CAB Communications Active Bit Application Example The SVC instruction is used when you want to execute a communication function such as transmitting a message prior to the normal service communication portion of the operating scan CS0 4 SVC 0000 3 Service Communications MCP Channel Select 0001h You can place this rung after a message write instruction CS0 4 MCP is set when the message instruction is enabled and put in the communications queue When CS0 4 MCP is set 1 the SVC instruction is evaluated as true and the program scan is interrupted to execute the service communication s portion of the operating scan The scan then resumes at the instruction following the SVC instruction The example rung shows a conditional SVC which is processed only when an outgoing message is in the communications queue NOTE You may program the SVC instruction unconditionally across the rungs This is the normal programming technique for the SVC instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 28 Communications Instructions MS
322. l Corresponding Value Bit EIl Event Input Interrupts Event 0 64 bit 6 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 1 32 bit 5 HSC High Speed Counter HSCO 16 bit 4 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 2 8 bit 3 Ell Event Input Interrupts Event 3 4 bit 2 HSC High Speed Counter HSCI 2 bit 1 STI Selectable Timed Interrupts STI 1 bit 0 Note Bits 7 to 15 must be set to zero 1 The MicroLogix 1200 has one HSC Interrupt HSCO The MicroLogix 1500 has two HSCO and HSC1 To enable interrupt s 1 Select which interrupts you want to enable 2 Find the Decimal Value for the interrupt s you selected 3 Add the Decimal Values if you selected more than one type of interrupt 4 Enter the sum into the UIE instruction For example to enable EII Event 1 and EII Event 3 EII Event 1 32 EII Event 3 4 32 4 36 enter this value ATTENTION If you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung Using Interrupts 18 11 UIF User Interrupt Flush Instruction Type output User mm Flush Table 18 8 Execution Time for the UIF Instruction Interrupt Types 1 Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 12 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 6 us 0 0 us The UIF instruction is used to flus
323. l if applicable to a value of 5 to 10 times faster than the natural period For example if the cycle time is 20 seconds and you choose to set the loop update time to 10 times faster than the natural rate set the loop update time to 200 which would result in a 2 second rate Set the gain K value to 1 2 the gain needed to obtain the natural period of the process For example if the gain value recorded in step 9 was 80 set the gain to 40 Set the reset term T to approximate the natural period If the natural period is 20 seconds as in our example you would set the reset term to 3 0 3 minutes per repeat approximates 20 seconds Now set the rate T4 equal to a value 1 8 that of the reset term For our example the value 4 is used to provide a rate term of 0 04 minutes per repeat Place the process in the AUTO mode If you have an ideal process the PID tuning is complete To make adjustments from this point place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode enter the adjustment then place the PID instruction back in the AUTO mode This technique of going to MANUAL then back to AUTO ensures that most of the gain error is removed at the time each adjustment is made This allows you to see the effects of each adjustment immediately Toggling the PID rung allows the PID instruction to restart itself eliminating all of the integral buildup You may want to toggle the PID rung false while tuning to eliminate the effects of previ
324. le CV In manual operation the user control program controls the CV During tuning set this bit to manual NOTE Output limiting is also applied when in manual Control Mode CM Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access CM Control Mode PD10 0 CM binary bit Oor 1 control read write Control mode or forward reverse acting toggles the values E SP PV and E PV SP Forward acting E PV SP causes the control variable to increase when the process variable is greater than the setpoint Reverse acting E SP PV causes the control variable to decrease when the process variable is greater than the setpoint PV in Deadband DB Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access DB PVinDeadband PD10 0 DB binary bit Oor 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the process variable is within the zero crossing deadband range Process Control Instruction 19 13 PLC 5 Gain Range RG Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access RG PLC 5 Gain Range PD10 0 RG binary bit Oor1 control read write When set 1 the reset TD and gain range enhancement bit RG causes the reset minute repeat value and the gain multiplier KC to be divided by a factor of 10 That means a reset multiplier of 0 01 and a gain multiplier of 0
325. le position 9 in this case Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 14 12 File Instructions This instruction uses the following operands FIFO The FIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the FIFO stack The FFU instruction unloads this value from the first location on the FIFO stack and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the FIFO stack If FIFO is a word size file destination must be a word size file If FIFO is a long word size file destination must be a long word size file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words HE m m m m 935 T6 9 18 9 2 09 not used 15 Word 0 Word 1 Length maximum number of words or long words in the stack Word 2 Position the next available location where the instruction unloads data 1 EU Enable Unload Bit is set on false to true transition of the rung and indicates the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit when set indicates that the stack is full 3 EM Empty Bit when set indicates FIFO is empty Length The length operand contains the number of elements in the FIFO stack The length of the stack can range fr
326. lectrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits run mode An executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the logic program rung A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true or false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true energized If all paths are false the outputs are made false de energized RTU Remote Terminal Unit save To save a program to a computer hard disk scan The scan is made up of four elements input scan program scan output scan and housekeeping scan time The time required for the controller to complete one scan sinking A term used to describe current flow between two devices A sinking device provides a direct path to ground Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Glossary 8 Publication 1762 RMO001C EN P sourcing A term used to describe current flow between two devices A sourcing device or circuit provides a power status The condition of a circuit or system terminal A point on an I O module that external devices such as a push button or pilot light are wired to throughput The time between when an input turns on and a corresponding output turns on or off Throughput consists of input delays program scan output delays and overhead true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload
327. led is a status control bit that defines when the HSC interrupt is enabled and that interrupts generated by the HSC are processed based on their priority This bit can be controlled by the user program or is automatically set by the HSC sub system if auto start is enabled See also Priority of User Interrupts on page 18 4 Auto Start AS Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access AS Auto Start HSC 0 AS bit 0 to 7 control read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The AS Auto Start is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit defines if the HSC function automatically starts whenever the controller enters any run or test mode The CE Counting Enabled bit must also be set to enable the HSC Error Detected ED Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access ED Error HSC O ED bi Detected t Oto 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used in the control program to detect if an error is present in the HSC sub system The most common type of error that this bit represents is a configuration error When this bit is set 1 you should look at the specific error code in parameter HSC 0 ER This bit is maintained by the cont
328. loads words or long words from a user created file called a LIFO stack The data is unloaded using last in first out order Instruction parameters have been programmed in the LFL LFU instruction pair shown below Ta LOAD I EN Destination Position Source N7 10 DN 0 Ar dw vn le N7 12 0 Control R6 0 N7 13 1 Length 34 Position 9 LFU instruction N7 14 2 unloads data from 3 Hie UNLOAD eu stack N7 12 at 4 FO d ge position ONAT 5 34 words are allocated Control R6 0 6 for FIFO stack starting Length 34 i ma DUE 9 7 ee ending at LFL and LFU Instruction Pair Source 8 N7 10 Ly 9 LFL instruction loads data into stack N7 12 at the next N7 45 33 available position 9 in this case Loading and Unloading of Stack N7 12 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 14 18 File Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P This instruction uses the following operands LIFO The LIFO operand is the starting address of the stack Destination The destination operand is a word or long word address that stores the value which exits from the LIFO stack The LFU instruction unloads this value from the last location on the LIFO stack and places it in the destination address The address level of the destination must match the LIFO stack If LIFO is a word size file destination must be a word size file If LIFO is a long word size file destination must
329. lot If a given bit position in the mask is a 1 the corresponding bit data from slot is passed to the input data file A O prohibits corresponding bit data in slot from being passed to the input data file The mask value can range from 0 to OxFFFF Bit 15 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J0 Real Input Input Word Mask O JO 10 0 I0 JO 0 0 1 15 1 1 Input Data Data is Not Updated Updated to Match Input Word File Length This is the number of masked words to transfer to the input data file Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 17 2 IIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files EL Address Mode Level a E e T Parameter i E E es S E er o S zje ro E E E Ele 13 eo O Z an Sls e ole o e fen 2 be S ums Eja Slot e e Mask eje e ej e e e e e Length IOM Immediate Output with Mask Length IOM _ Immediate Output w Mask Slot 0 0 0 Mask N7 0 1 Input and Output Instructions 17 3 Instruction Type output NOTE This instruction is used for embedded I O only It is not designed to be used with expansion I O Table 17 3 Execution
330. lot 0 Expansion 1 0 e slots 1 to 6 for MicroLogix 1200 See page 1 3 for an illustration e slots 1 to 8 for MicroLogix 1500 See page 1 7 for an illustration Word delimiter Required only if a word number is necessary as noted below w Word number Required to read write words or if the discrete bit number is above 15 Range 0 to 255 Bit delimiter b Bit number 0 to 15 Addressing Examples Addressing Level Example Address Slot Word Bit Bit Addressing 0 0 4 2 Output Slot 0 Embedded 1 0 word 0 output bit 4 02 7 Output Slot 2 Expansion 1 0 word 0 output bit 7 1 47 Input Slot 1 Expansion 1 0 word 0 input bit 4 1 0 152 Input Slot 0 Embedded 1 0 word 0 input bit 15 Word Addressing 0 1 0 Output Slot 1 Expansion 1 0 word 0 1 7 3 Input Slot 7 Expansion 0 word 3 3 1 Input Slot 3 Expansion 1 0 word 1 1 The optional Data File Number is not shown in these examples 2 A word delimiter and number are not shown Therefore the address refers to word 0 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 14 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Forcing Input Filtering Publication 1762 RM001C EN P I O forcing is the ability to override the actual status of the I O at the user s discretion Input Forcing When an input is forced the value in the input data file is set to a user defined state For discrete inputs you can force an input on or off When an input is forced
331. low preset must be a number with a smaller absolute value Using the High Speed Counter 5 23 Overflow OVF Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access OVF Overflow HSC 0 0VF long word 32 bit INT control read write The OVF Overflow defines the upper count limit for the counter If the counter s accumulated value increments past the value specified in this variable an overflow interrupt is generated When the overflow interrupt is generated the HSC sub system rolls the accumulator over to the underflow value and the counter continues counting from the underflow value counts are not lost in this transition The user can specify any value for the overflow position provided it is greater than the underflow value and falls between 2 147 483 648 and 2 147 483 647 To load data into the overflow variable the control program must toggle low to high the Set Parameters HSC 0 0 SP control bit When the SP bit is toggled high the data currently stored in the HSC function file is transferred loaded into the HSC sub system NOTE Data loaded into the overflow variable must be greater than the data resident in the high preset HSC 0 HIP or an HSC error is generated Underflow UNF Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UNF Underflow HSC 0 UNF llong word 32 bit INT control read write The UNF Underflow defines the lower count limit for t
332. lse Width Modulation 04 6 18 PWM Function 25 9305 edo oda gen e OR NER RO 6 18 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Function File 6 19 Pulse Width Modulated Function File Elements Summary 6 20 Chapter 7 XIC Examine if Closed XIO Examine if Open doa od Op ee d eoe e er EROS 7 1 OTE O tp t Enefgize cre up edits ced ER Pag lg 7 3 OTL Output Latch OTU Output Unlatch 7 4 ONS One Shot ope Exe gt aaa a 7 5 OSR One Shot Rising OSF One Shot Falling 7 6 Chapter 8 Timer Instructions Overview soi swine gav ee Eder e eer 8 1 TON Timer On Delavas scat oss Eee Vom Bee Sexe E 8 4 TOF Timer OMe Delay 4246 m hehe hha i Comme dams 8 5 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay 0005 8 6 How Counters WOrk ea draht d ROO UR OSCAR 8 7 CTU Count Up CTD Count DOWII c1 x RE ES 8 9 RES Reset Le dre fos qu del ah a ar ine Mie eo a d d 8 10 Chapter 9 Using the Compare Instructions llle 9 2 EQU Equal NEQ Not Equal 0 tay v e Rea 9 3 GRT Greater Than LES Less Than 9 4 GEQ Greater Than or Equal To LEQ Less Than or Equal To 9 5 MEQ Mask Compare for Equal noaa aaa aaa 9 6 HOM Linit Test trata rd buo o aed eae E E S Es 9 7 Math Instructions Conversion Instructions Logical Instructions Move Instructions File Instructions Table of Contents Chapter 10 Using the Math Instructions 23 4934 PES 223 ees de 10
333. mary Table 18 10 Selectable Timed Interrupt Function File STI 0 Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program For More Access Information PFN Program File Number STI O PFN word INT control read only 18 13 ER Error Code STI O ER word INT status read only 8 13 UIX User Interrupt Executing STI 0 UIX binary bit status read only 8 14 UIE User Interrupt Enable STI O UIE binary bit control read write 8 14 UIL User Interrupt Lost STI O UIL binary bit status read write 8 14 UIP User Interrupt Pending STI 0 UIP binary bit status read only 8 15 TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled STI O TIE binary bit control read write 8 15 AS Auto Start STI 0 AS binary bit control read only 8 15 ED Error Detected STI 0 ED binary bit status read only 8 16 SPM Set Point Msec STI 0 SPM word INT control read write 8 16 STI Function File Sub Elements STI Program File Number PFN Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access PFN Program File Number STI O PFN word INT control read only The PEN Program File Number variable defines which subroutine is called Cexecuted when the timed interrupt times out A valid subroutine file is any program file 3 to 255 The subroutine file identified in the PFN variable is not a special file within the controller it is programmed and operates the same as any other program fil
334. mber of retrieval tools designed for use with Palm OS Windows CE Windows 9x and Windows NT You can download these free tools from our web site Visit http www w ab com micrologix Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 22 12 Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Information for Creating Your Own Application Controller Receives Communications Packet Table 22 5 Command Structure S76 No Field Function Description DST Destination Node SRC Source Node CMD Command Code STS Status Code Set to zero 0 TNS Transaction Number Always 2 bytes FNC Function Code Byte Size Number of bytes to be read Formatted string length see equation below File Number Always set to zero 0 File Type Must be A5 hex Element Number Queue number Determines the queue to be read 0 to 255 Sub Element Number Always set to zero 0 Table 22 6 Equation Record Field 1 Record Field 2 Record Field 3 Record Field 7 Formatted String Length Table 22 7 Record Field Sizes Data Type Maximum Size Word 7 bytes characters Long Word 12 bytes characters Date Field 11 bytes characters Time Field 9 bytes characters NOTE The formatted string length cannot exceed 80 bytes in length NOTE The last byte will be a zero value representing the terminator character Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Data Logging MicroLogix 1500
335. me contains the value 10 for 100 ms then the STI time interval must also equal 100 for 100 ms NOTE When using timed mode your processor scan time should be at least ten times faster than the loop update time to prevent timing inaccuracies or disturbances Loop Update Time LUT Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access LUT Loop Update Time PD10 0 LUT word INT 1 to 1024 control read write The loop update time word 13 is the time interval between PID calculations The entry is in 0 01 second intervals Enter a loop update time five to ten times faster than the natural period of the load The natural period of the load is determined by setting the reset and rate parameters to zero and then increasing the gain until the output begins to oscillate When in STI mode this value must equal the STI time interval value loaded in STI 0 SPM The valid range is 0 01 to 10 24 seconds Process Control Instruction 19 11 Zero Crossing Deadband ZCD Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access ZCD ZeroCrossing PD10 0 7CD word INT Oto 32 767 control read write Deadband The deadband extends above and below the setpoint by the value entered The deadband is entered at the zero crossing of the process variable and the setpoint This means that the deadband is in effect only after the pro
336. ments 0 to 47 of the specified file on its display screen The next 48 bits words 48 to 50 are used to define the read only or read write privileges for the 48 elements The only integer file that the DAT interfaces with is the file specified in the TIF location The TIF location can only be changed by a program download Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 3 10 Function Files IMPORTANT Use your programming software to ensure that the integer file you specify in the TIF location as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the controller s user program The example table below shows a DAT configured to use integer file number 50 DAT 0 TIF 50 Element Data Address Protection Bit Nod ee n Data Address Protection Bit Number Number 0 N50 0 N50 48 0 16 N50 16 N50 49 0 32 N50 32 N50 50 0 1 N50 1 N50 48 1 17 N50 17 N50 49 1 33 N50 33 N50 50 1 2 N50 2 N50 48 2 18 N50 18 N50 49 2 34 N50 34 N50 50 2 3 N50 3 N50 48 3 19 50 19 N50 49 3 35 N50 35 N50 50 3 4 N50 4 N50 48 4 20 N50 20 N50 49 4 36 N50 36 N50 50 4 5 N50 5 N50 48 5 21 N50 21 N50 49 5 37 50 37 N50 50 5 6 N50 6 N50 48 6 22 N50 22 N50 49 6 38 N50 38 N50 50 6 7 N50 7 N50 48 7 23 N50 23 N50 49 7 39 N50 39 N50 50 7 8 N50 8 N50 48 8 24 N50 24 N50 49 8 40 N50 40 N50 50 8 9 N50 9 N50 48 9 25 N50 25 N50 49 9 41 50 41 N50 50 9 10 N50 10 N50 48 10 26 N50 26 N50 49 10 42 N50 42 N50 50 10 11 N50 11 N50 48 11 27 50 27 N50 49 11 43
337. mmended this be the only output instruction on the rung ATTENTION Never use an output address at more than one place in your logic program Always be fully aware of the load represented by the output coil Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 7 4 Relay Type Bit Instructions OTL Output Latch OTU Output Unlatch B3 0 lt gt Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 7 5 OTE Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 g 1 i Address Address Data Files Function Files gt Mode Level Parameter SB e cc A 25 9 i eec _ alg B oLemczbaskERk m ale E Destination Bit e e e e e e elelelele ele 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Instruction Type output Table 7 6 Execution Time for the OTL and OTU Instructions Controller OTL Whe
338. mmunication Service includes 60 Lis for a time tick To determine the interrupt latency 1 First determine the execution time for the longest executing rung in your control program maximum rung time See MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page B 1 or MicroLogix 1500 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time on page B 1 for more information 2 Multiply the maximum rung time by the Communications Multiplier corresponding to your configuration in the MicroLogix 1200 Scan Time Worksheet on page A 7 or MicroLogix 1500 Scan Time Worksheet on page B 6 Evaluate your results as follows Controller If the time calculated in step 2 is Then the Interrupt Latency is MicroLogix 1200 less than 133 us 411 us greater than 133 us the value calculated in step 2 plus 278 us MicroLogix 1500 less than 100 us 360 us greater than 100 us the value calculated in step 2 plus 260 us Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 6 Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RM001C EN P User Fault Routine The user fault routine gives you the option of preventing a controller shutdown when a specific user fault occurs The fault routine is executed when any recoverable or non recoverable user fault occurs The fault routine is not executed for non user faults Faults are classified as recoverable non recoverable and non user faults A complete list of faults is shown in Fault Messages and Error Codes on p
339. mote messages With a local message all devices are accessible without a separate device acting as a bridge Different types of electrical interfaces may be required to connect to the network but the network is still classified as a local network Remote messages use a remote network where devices are accessible only by passing or routing through a device to another network Remote networks are discussed on page 21 10 Local Networks The following three examples represent different types of local networks Example 1 Local DH 485 Network with AIC 1761 NET AIC Interface DH 485 Network AIC Personal Computer MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 Example 2 Local DeviceNet Network with DeviceNet Interface 1761 NET DNI DNg SLC 5 03 with 1747 SDN DNI gj PanelView 550 r Master DeviceNet Network e personal ar l gt Computer MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 150
340. mple3 on U Toff on Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 Example 4 on U loff off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 0 Example 5 on U off on U Toff Hold accumulator value 1 0 1 0 Example 6 ll Clear accumulator 0 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 Blank cells don t care Te rising edge U fa ling edge NOTE Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 20 Using the High Speed Counter Using the Quadrature Encoder The Quadrature Encoder is used for determining direction of rotation and position for rotating such as a lathe The Bidirectional Counter counts the rotation of the Quadrature Encoder The figure below shows a quadrature encoder connected to inputs 0 1 and 2 The count direction is determined by the phase angle between A and B If A leads B the counter increments If B leads A the counter decrements The counter can be reset using the Z input The Z outputs from the encoders typically provide one pulse per revolution Input 0 A p Input 1 B Quadrature Encoder Input 2 Z Reset input Forward Rotation Reverse Rotation A Y Y Y B 1 LI 1 2 3 2 1 iE C
341. munications Status file CS0 5 0 to C50 5 7 Configure the node address via Channel Configuration using RSLogix 500 Select the Channel 0 tab The node address is listed as Source ID Setting Controller Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19200 This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix devices on the DH 485 network All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 8 to CS0 5 15 Configure the baud rate via Channel Configuration using RSLogix 500 Select the Channel O tab Setting Maximum Node Address Once you have an established network set up and are confident that you will not be adding more devices you may enhance performance by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers It should be set to the highest node address being used IMPORTANT All devices should be set to the same maximum node address MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Remote Packet Support These controllers can respond and initiate with device s communications or commands that do not originate on the local DH 485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between the DH 485 and DH networks DF1 Full Duplex Protocol Protocol Configuration E 5 DF1 Full Duplex protocol provides a point to point connection between two devices DF1 Full Duplex protocol combines data transparency American National Standards Instit
342. n System Status File C 19 RTC Hours Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 40 word 0 to 23 status read only instruction from another device 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC O HR See Real Time Clock Function File on page 3 3 for more information RTC Minutes Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 41 word 0 to 59 status read only instruction f rom another device 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 MIN See Real Time Clock Function File on page 3 3 for more information RTC Seconds Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 42 word 0 to 59 status read only instruction from another device 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC O SEC See Real Time Clock Function File on page 3 3 for more information RTC Day of Week Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 53 word 0 to 6 status read only instruction fr
343. n EII event occurs If you need to restrict when the EII subroutine is processed clear the UIE bit An example of when this is important is if a series of math calculations need to be processed without interruption Before the calculations take place clear the UIE bit After the calculations are complete set the UIE bit and EII subroutine processing resumes Ell User Interrupt Lost UIL Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIL User Interrupt Lost Ell 0 UIL binary bit status read write UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions before it sets the lost bit This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track and clear the lost condition Ell User Interrupt Pending UIP Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access UIP User Interrupt Pending EII 0 UIP binary bit status read only UIP User Interrupt Pending is a status flag that represents an interrupt is pending This status bit can be monitored or used for logic purposes in the control program if you need to determine when a subroutine cannot execute immediately This bit is automatically set and cleared by the controller The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user i
344. n Rung Is OTU When Rung Is True False True False MicroLogix 1200 1 0 us 0 0 us 1 1 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 10 9 us 0 0 us 0 9 us 0 0 us The OTL and OTU instructions are retentive output instructions OTL turns on a bit while OTU turns off a bit These instructions are usually used in pairs with both instructions addressing the same bit vasd Hid lf you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is recommended this be the only output instruction on the rung Since these are latching outputs once set or reset they remain set or reset regardless of the rung condition ATTENTION In the event of a power loss any OTL controlled bit including field devices energizes with the return of power if the OTL bit was set when power was lost Relay Type Bit Instructions 7 5 ONS One Shot N7 1 d ONS ATTENTION Under error conditions physical outputs are turned off Once the error conditions are cleared the controller resumes operation using the data table value Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 7 7 OTL and OTU Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2
345. n Time for the RTO Instructions Controller WhenRungls True False MicroLogix 1200 180us 24gs MicroLogix 1500 15 8 us 22 US Use the RTO instruction to delay turning on an output The RTO begins to count time base intervals when the rung conditions become true As long as the rung conditions remain true the timer increments its accumulator until the preset value is reached The RTO retains the accumulated value when the following occur rung conditions become false you change the controller mode from run or test to program the processor loses power a fault occurs When you return the controller to the RUN or TEST mode and or the rung conditions go true timing continues from the retained accumulated value RTO timers are retained through power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Table 8 10 Counter Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done Is Set When And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs accumulated value gt preset value the appropriate RES instruction is enabled bit 14 T4 0 TT TT timer timing rung state is true and accumulated value lt preset value e rung state goes false or e DN bit is set bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung state is true rung state goes false Publication 1
346. n file Jog Pulse operation is only possible under the following conditions PTO sub system in idle Jog continuous not active e Enable not active The JP bit operates as follows e Set 1 Instructs the PTO sub system to generate a single Jog Pulse Cleared 0 Arms the PTO Jog Pulse sub system PTO Jog Pulse Status JPS Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access JPS Jog Pulse Status PTO 0 JPS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO JPS Jog Pulse Status bit is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program to detect when the PTO has generated a Jog Pulse The JPS bit operates as follows Set 1 Whenever a PTO instruction outputs a Jog Pulse Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction exits the Jog Pulse state NOTE The output Gog pulse is normally complete with the JP bit set The JPS bit remains set until the JP bit is cleared 0 off Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 16 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P PTO Jog Continuous JC Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access JC Jog Continuous PTO 0 JC bit 0 or 1 control read write The PTO JC Jog Continuous bit instructs the PTO sub system to generate continuous pulses The frequency generated is defined by the Jog Frequency par
347. n may be smaller or greater than the specified String Length CLEN as described below Characters Sent POS may be smaller than String Length CLEN if the length of the string sent is less than what was specified in the String Length LEN field Characters Sent POS can be greater than the String Length CLEN if the appended characters or inserted values from in line indirection are used If the String Length CLEN is greater than 82 the string written to the destination is truncated to 82 characters plus the number of append characters this number could be 82 83 or 84 depending on how many append characters are used Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 20 30 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 8 AWA Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address 1 Data Files Function Files Mode Laval a E B 2 Parameter E E e s E Gee S Eu pam s ges c coe n a 9E os e e m le SE SIE 5 Ela EIS 218 SS Els 2 la lS Sia Channel Source Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element AWT
348. n the battery during storage RTC Battery Operation The real time clock has an internal battery that is not replaceable The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator bit RTC 0 BL which represents the status of the RTC battery When the battery is low the indicator bit is set 1 This means that the battery will fail in less than 14 days and the real time clock module needs to be replaced When the battery low indicator bit is clear 0 the battery level is acceptable or a real time clock is not attached ATTENTION Operating with a low battery indication for more than 14 days may result in invalid RTC data if power is removed from the controller Table 3 4 RTC Battery Life Expectancy Battery State Temperature Time Duration Operating 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 5 years Storage 40 C to 25 C 40 F to 77 F 5 years minimum 26 C to 60 C 79 F to 140 F 3 years minimum 1 The operating life of the battery is based on 6 months of storage time before the real time clock is used Trim Pot Information Function File Function Files 3 5 The composition of the Trim Pot Information TPD Function File is described below Table 3 5 Trim Pot Function File Data Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access TPD Data O TPI 0 POTO Word 0 250 Status Read Only 16 bit integer TPD Data 1 TPI 0 POT1 Word 0 250 Status Read Only 16 bit integer TPO Error Code
349. nable 0 r UIL User Interrupt Lost 0 UIP User Interrupt Pending i TIE Timed Interrupt Enabled it LAS Auto Start i H ED Error Detected 0 i L SPM Set Point Msec between interrupts The Selectable Timed Interrupt STD provides a mechanism to solve time critical control requirements The STI is a trigger mechanism that allows you to scan or solve control program logic that is time sensitive Example of where you would use the STI are e PID type applications where a calculation must be performed at a specific time interval e A motion application where the motion instruction PTO needs to be scanned at a specific rate to guarantee a consistent acceleration deceleration profile e A block of logic that needs to be scanned more often How an STI is used is typically driven by the demands requirements of the application It operates using the following sequence 1 The user selects a time interval 2 When a valid interval is set and the STI is properly configured the controller monitors the STI value 3 When the time period has elapsed the controller s normal operation is interrupted 4 The controller then scans the logic in the STI program file 5 When the STI file scan is completed the controller returns to where it was prior to the interrupt and continues normal operation Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Using Interrupts 18 13 Selectable Time Interrupt STI Function File Sub Elements Sum
350. nd File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 9 12 LIM Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files a Address Address unction Files SC Model Level 5 Parameter E 2 E e s ec amp a amp T 5 S sc z c ale lS joj _j Slel jn wlE Sis _is e oo fen fe bs S PE IG I S S E18 le ale lale la l S la LowLimit elejej je e e ejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ele Test eljelelelele ejejojojojojojojojojojojojojojoj o eje High Limit e e ej e e e ejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Chapter 10 Math Instructions Use these output instructions to perform computations using an expression or a specific arithmetic instruction ADD Add Adtwovaes 1004 SUB Subtract Subtract two values 10 4 MUL M
351. nd access the control program has to those variables are listed Function File Elements n below Eee Summary Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program For More Access Information OUT PWM Output PWM 0 0UT word INT 2or3 status read only 6 20 DS Decelerating Status PWM 0 DS bit Oor1 status read only 6 21 RS PWM Run Status PWM 0 RS bit Oor1 status read only 6 21 AS Accelerating Status PWM 0 AS bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 21 PP Profile Parameter Select PWM 0 PP bit 0 or 1 control read write 6 22 IS PWM Idle Status PWM 0 IS bit Oor1 status read only 6 22 ED PWM Error Detection PWM 0 ED bit 0 or 1 status read only 6 22 NS PWM Normal Operation PWM 0 NS bit 0or 1 status read only 6 23 EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM 0 EH bit Oor1 control read write 6 23 ES PWM Enable Status PWM 0 ES bit Oor1 status read only 6 23 OF PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 0F word INT 0to 20 000 control read write 6 24 OFS PWM Operating Frequency Status PWM 0 0FS word INT 0to20 000 status read only 6 24 DC PWM Duty Cycle PWM 0 DC word INT 1to1000 control read write 6 24 DCS PWM Duty Cycle Status PWM 0 DCS word INT 1to1000 status read only 6 24 ADD Accel Decel Delay PWM 0 ADD word INT 0 to 32 767 control read write 6 25 ER PWM Error Codes PWM 0 ER word INT 2to5 status read only 6 25 PWM Output OUT Element Address Data Range Type User Program Access Descri
352. nd with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Message Retries 0 to 255 3 Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the master device For use in noisy environments where message packets may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to no handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Ha f Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Publication 1762 RM001C EN P E 8 Protocol Configuration Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi drop Link When communication is between either your programming software and a controller or between two controllers via a slave to slave connection on a larger multi drop link the devices depend on a DF1 Master to give each of them polling permission to transmit in a timely manner As the number of slaves increases on the link up to 254 the time between when your programming software or controller is polled also increases This increase in time may become larger if you are using low baud rates As these time periods grow the following val
353. nect to the hardware that is specified MISMATCH selected in the user program in the user program or configuration but did not match the e Reconfigure the program to match the actual controller type attached hardware 0051 BASE TYPE A particular hardware type AWA Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified MISMATCH BWA BXB was selected in the user in the user program or program configuration but did no e Reconfigure the program to match the match the actual base attached hardware 0052 MINIMUM SERIES The hardware minimum series Non User e Connect to the hardware that is specified ERROR selected in the user program in the user program or configuration was greater than the e Reconfigure the program to match the series on the actual hardware attached hardware 0070 EXPANSION 1 0 The required expansion I O Non Recoverable e Check the expansion I O terminator on the TERMINATOR terminator was removed last REMOVED 1 0 module MicroLogix 1500 only e Cycle power xx EXPANSION 1 0 The controller cannot communicate Non Recoverable e Check connections HARDWARE ERROR _ with an expansion 1 0 module e Check for a noise problem and be sure proper grounding practices are used e Replace the module e Cycle power xx79g EXPANSION 1 0 An expansion I O module generated Non Recoverable Refer to the I O Module Status 105 file MODULE ERROR an error e Consult the documentation for your specific I O module to determine possible
354. neral Channel Status Block MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 3 14 6t022 DLL Diagnostic Counters Block MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 3 14 23 to 42 DLL Active Node Table Block MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 3 17 words 43 to 70 when using DF1 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex DH 485 or ASCII 1 43 End of List Category Identifier Code MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 always 0 43 to 70 Reserved e MicroLogix 1200 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors words 43 to 70 when using Modbus RTU Slave 43 to 69 Modbus Slave Diagnostic Counters Block e MicroLogix 1200 3 18 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors 70 End of List Category Identifier Code e MicroLogix 1200 always 0 e MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors 1 ASCII can only be used with the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors The following tables show the details of each block in the Communications Status File Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 3 14 Function Files Table 3 11 General Channel Status Block Word Bit Description 0 Communications Channel General Status Information Category Identifier Code 1 Length 2 Format Code 3 Communications Configuration Error Code 4 0 ICP Incoming Command Pending Bit This bit is set 1 when the controller determines that another device has requested information from this controller Once the request has been satisfie
355. nly and resides in the POS field in the control data file The following shows how to determine the channel status value In this example the value is 001F Channel 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Status Bit Handshake reseved n pept RTS CTS wwe fo fo fo jp pppey n fy Channel 0 0 1 F Status Word 2 of the Control Element 001F 1 The DCD handshake line is only supported on Channel 1 Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 20 30 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 22 AHL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 1 Function Files Address Address Data Files Mode Level N 2 T Parameter 7 Elo g S Q a S TS S 5 E e SSP l2 l lz E l l la wo EILlselelele ol len lon fe b S I IE IE BB IS SE 1S e Ela lela l Sia Channel AND Mask eje elele ele e OR Mask ele elele ele e Control e e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation This instruction executes on either a false or true rung However a false to true rung tran
356. ns Eror Enor CodelHes 0 NOTE The table below is not intended to illustrate file compatibility only the maximum number of elements that can be exchanged in each case Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Message Type File Type Element Size Maximum Number of Elements per Message A85CIF 0 1 B N 1 word 103 L 2 word 51 T C R 3 word 34 ST 42 word 2 write only 500CPU 0 1 B N 1 word 103 L 2 word 51 T C R 3 word 34 RTC 8 word 1 write only PLC5 0 1 B N 1 word 103 L 2 word 51 T 5 word 20 Channel This variable defines the communication channel that is used to transmit the message request For controllers with only one communication channel this value is factory set to channel 0 and cannot be changed For controllers with 2 channels 1764 LRP processor installed the channel can be 0 or 1 Target Device Parameters Message Timeout This value defines how long in seconds the message instruction has to complete its operation once it has started Timing begins when the false to true rung transition occurs enabling the message If the timeout period expires the message errors out The default value is 5 seconds The maximum timeout value is 255 seconds If the message timeout is set to zero the message instruction will never timeout Set the Time Out bit TO 1 to flush a message instruction from its buffer if the destination device does not respon
357. nsfer If the error persists replace the memory module 0008 FATAL INTERNAL SOFTWARE ERROR An unexpected software error occurred Non User Cycle power on your unit Then re download your program and re initialize any necessary data Start up your system Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 0009 FATAL INTERNAL HARDWARE ERROR An unexpected hardware error occurred Non User Cycle power on your unit Then re download your program and re initialize any necessary data Start up your system Refer to proper grounding guidelines and using surge suppressors in your controller s User Manual Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative if the error persists 000A 0 MISSING OR CORRUPT The operating system required for the user program is corrupt or missing Non User Download a new OS using ControlFlash Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about available operating systems your controller 000B BASE HARDWARE FAULT The base hardware faulted or is incompatible with the OS Non User Upgrade the OS using ControlFlash Replace the Controller MicroLogix 1200 only Replace the Base Unit MicroLogix 1500 only Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for more information about
358. nsition Storage Bit Output Bit true to false one scan bitis reset bit is set false to false bitis reset bit is reset false to true and true to true bitis set bit is reset Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 7 14 OSR and OSF Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address Data Files Function Files Mode Level N Ej e Parameter a S E os m 5 cc a e i alz E E 2 S o o SP o lZ E lg s la lw lElSislelelje s la la fe S I IE IG S IS esles B ele la S S la Storage Bit Output Bit LUE elele z e Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 7 8 Relay Type Bit Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Chapter 8 Timer and Counter Instructions Timers and counters are output instructions that let you control operations based on time or a number of events The following Timer and Counter Instructions are described in this chapter Instruction Used To Page TON Timer On Delay Delay turning on an output on a true rung 8 4 TOF Timer Off Delay Delay turning off an output on a false rung 8 5 RTO Retentive Timer On Delay turning on an output from a true rung 8 6 The accumulator is retentive CTU Count Up Count
359. nstructions 20 19 AEX String Extract AEX String Extract Source ST10 0 Index 1 Number 5 Dest ST10 3 Instruction Type output Table 20 19 Execution Time for the AEX Instruction Controller When Instruction Is True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3orlater 14 8 ps 2 9 us character O0us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4orlater 12 4 us 2 6 us character 0 0 us The AEX instruction creates a new string by taking a portion of an existing string and storing it in a new string Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source is the existing string The Source value is not affected by this instruction Index is the starting position from 1 to 82 of the string you want to extract An index of 1 indicates the left most character of the string Number is the number of characters from 1 to 82 you want to extract starting at the indexed position If the Index plus the Number is greater than the total characters in the source string the Destination string will be the characters from the Index to the end of the Source string Destination is the string element ST where you want the extracted string stored Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 20 AEX Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on pag
360. nterrupt conditions before it sets the pending bit Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 20 Using Interrupts Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Ell Event Interrupt Enable EIE User Program Access Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type EIE Event Interrupt Enabled EII O EIE binary bit control read write EIE Event Interrupt Enabled allows the event interrupt function to be enabled or disabled from the control program When set 1 the function is enabled when cleared 0 default the function is disabled This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle Ell Auto Start AS Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access AS Auto Start EII0 AS binary bit control read only AS Auto Start is a control bit that can be used in the control program The auto start bit is configured with the programming device and stored as part of the user program The auto start bit automatically sets the EII Event Interrupt Enable ETE bit when the controller enters any executing mode Ell Error Detected ED Sub Element Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ED Error Detected EII 0 ED binary bit status read only The ED Error Detected flag is a status bit that can be used by the control program to detect if an error is present in the EII sub system The most
361. o 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Relay Type Bit Instructions 7 3 OTE Output Energize Instruction Type output Table 7 4 Execution Time for the OTE Instructions Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 4 us 1 1 us MicroLogix 1500 1 2 us 0 0 us Use an OTE instruction to turn a bit location on when rung conditions are evaluated as true and off when the rung is evaluated as false An example of a device that turns on or off is an output wired to a pilot light addressed as O0 0 4 OTE instructions are reset turned OFF when You enter or return to the program or remote program mode or power is restored The OTE is programmed within an inactive or false Master Control Reset MCR zone NOTE A bit that is set within a subroutine using an OTE instruction remains set until the OTE is scanned again Wala Hd l you enable interrupts during the program scan via an OTL OTE or UIE this instruction must be the last instruction executed on the rung last instruction on last branch It is reco
362. o 255 status read only 1 This byte can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 5 0 through CSx 0 5 7 See General Channel Status Block on page 3 14 for more information Baud Rate Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 15 high byte byte 0 to 255 status read only 1 This byte can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File CSx 0 5 8 through CSx 0 5 15 See General Channel Status Block on page 3 14 for more information Maximum Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 22 word 0 to 32 767 status read write This word indicates the maximum observed interval between consecutive program scans The controller compares each scan value to the value contained in S 22 If a scan value is larger than the previous the larger value is stored in 8 22 This value indicates in 100 us increments the time elapsed in the longest program cycle of the controller Resolution is 100 us to 0 ps For example the value 9 indicates that 800 to 900 us was observed as the longest program cycle Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 16 System Status Fil
363. o 256 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types It determines the next location in the stack to be masked and moved to the destination Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Position is incremented on each false to true transition Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 15 8 Sequencer Instructions SQL Sequencer Load SOL Sequencer Load EN gt File N7 0 Source 1 0 0 cDN gt Control R6 0 Length 1 Position 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 15 4 SQO Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files ND jones Parameter 2 Nu E E E e S S n 3 E E ej f fos SE SE le ES lS Se les lls File ele ele ele Mask ele elele elele ele Destination 2 ele elele ele ele Control 3 Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 File Direct and File Indirect addressing also applies 3 Control file only MG PD THe You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EH BHI
364. o consecutive scans before it executes the FRD This prevents the FRD from converting a non BCD value during an input value change Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 11 6 Conversion Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P NOTE To convert numbers larger than 9999 BCD the source must be the Math Register S 13 You must reset the Minor Error Bit S 5 0 to prevent an error Example The BCD value 32 760 in the math register is converted and stored in N7 0 The maximum source value is 32767 BCD FRD 4 From BCD Source 13 00032760 lt Dest N7 0 32760 lt S 14 13 0000 0000 0000 0011 0010 0111 0110 0000 15 0 15 0 5 digit BCD 0 0 0 3 2 7 6 0 3 2 7 6 0 N7 0 Decimal 0111 1111 1111 1000 You should convert BCD values to integer before you manipulate them in your ladder program If you do not convert the values the controller manipulates them as integers and their value may be lost NOTE If the math register S 13 and S 14 is used as the source for the FRD instruction and the BCD value does not exceed four digits be sure to clear word S 14 before executing the FRD instruction If 14 is not cleared and a value is contained in this word from another math instruction located elsewhere in the program an incorrect decimal value is placed in the destination word Conversion Instructions 11 7 Clearing S 14 before executing the FRD instruction is shown below
365. o string instruction 20 8 ASCII number of characters in buffer instruction 20 15 Index ASCII protocol parameters 20 4 ASCII read characters instruction 20 22 ASCII read line instruction 20 23 ASCII string compare instruction 20 26 ASCII string concatenate 20 18 ASCII string extract 20 19 ascii string manipulation error C 13 ASCII string search instruction 20 25 ASCII string to integer instruction 20 16 ASCII test buffer for line instruction 20 14 ASCII timing diagram 20 28 ASCII write instruction 20 17 ASCII write with append instruction 20 9 ASR instruction 20 26 AWA and AWT timing diagram 20 28 AWA instruction 20 9 AWT instruction 20 71 base hardware information file 3 12 battery life expectancy 3 4 operation 3 4 battery low status bit C 13 baud rate G 1 baud rate status C 15 BHI Function File 3 12 bit G 1 bit instructions 7 1 bit shift left instruction 14 4 bit shift right instruction 14 6 bit wise AND instruction 72 3 block diagrams G 1 Boolean operators G 1 branch G 1 BSL instruction 14 4 BSR instruction 14 6 C carry flag C 3 catalog number status C 20 channel 0 communications status C 16 CSO communications status file 3 13 channel configuration DF1 full duplex parameters 5 DF1 half duplex parameters 7 DH485 parameters F 3 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 2 Index Modbus RTU Slave parameters F 12 clear instruction 10 6 clearing controller faults D 7 controller memory 2 10 clock free running C
366. of range Change FF so it is within the range 16383 to 16383 23H Scaled setpoint min Change scaled setpoint min MinS to MinS gt Scaled setpoint max MaxS 32768 lt MinS lt MaxS lt 432767 31H If you are using setpoint scaling and If you are using setpoint scaling then change MinS gt setpoint SP gt Maxs or the setpoint SP to MinS lt SP lt MaxS or If you are not using setpoint scaling and If you are not using setpoint scaling then change 0 gt setpoint SP gt 16383 the setpoint SP to 0 lt SP lt 16383 then during the initial execution of the PID loop this error occurs and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set However during subsequent execution of the PID loop if an invalid loop setpoint is entered the PID loop continues to execute using the old setpoint and bit 11 of word 0 of the control block is set 41H Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected Scaling Selected Scaling Deselected 1 Deadband lt 0 or 1 Deadband 0 or Change deadband to Change deadband to 0 lt deadband lt 0 lt deadband lt 16383 2 Deadband gt 3 Deadband gt 16383 x s MaxS Mins MaxS MinS lt 16383 51H 1 Output high limit lt 0 or Change output high limit to 2 Output high limit gt 100 0 lt output high limit lt 100 52H 1 Output low limit lt 0 or Change output low limit to 2 Output low limit gt 100 0 lt output low limit lt output high limit lt 100 53H Output low limit output high limit Change output l
367. ogix 1200 Series B and higher When Rung Is True 13 7 us 2 2 us swapped word False 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B and higher 11 7 us 1 8 us swapped word 0 0 us Use the SWP instruction to swap the low and high bytes of a specified number of words in a bit integer or string file The SWP instruction has 2 operands e Source is the word address containing the words to be swapped Length is the number of words to be swapped regardless of the file type The address is limited to integer constants For bit and integer filetypes the length range is 1 to 128 For the string filetype the length range is 1 to 41 Note that this instruction is restricted to a single string element and cannot cross a string element boundary Math Instructions 10 11 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 10 14 SWP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 de os Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level eo Parameter E 2 E oO k ec a 8 Fjale 5 E c lelei lE lg l lo Elez 5 2 5 ler foo f a S ISIE B I S S IF IS 9 B ls ela le S la Source e ele e e Length 1 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTA
368. ogram Access UIL User HSC 0 UIL bi Interrupt Lost t Oto7 status read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The UIL User Interrupt Lost is a status flag that represents an interrupt has been lost The controller can process 1 active and maintain up to 2 pending user interrupt conditions This bit is set by the controller It is up to the control program to utilize track if necessary and clear the lost condition Low Preset Mask LPM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access LPM Low HSC O0 LPM lbi Preset Mask t 2 to7 control read write 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The LPM Low Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a low preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Low Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 10 Using the High Speed Counter Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Low Preset Interrupt LPI Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access LPI Low HSC 0 LPI bi Preset Interrupt t 2 to7 status read write 1 For Mode desc
369. ol Configuration E 9 Modbus RTU Slave This section shows the configuration parameters for Modbus RTU Slave Remote Terminal Unit transmission mode protocol For more Protocol MicroLogix information about the Modbus Slave protocol see the Modbus Protocol 1200 Controllers and Specification available from http www modicon com techpubs MicroLogix 1500 Series The Modbus RTU slave driver maps the four Modbus data types Coils Band higher Processors Contacts Input Registers and Holding Registers into four binary and or only integer data table files created by the user The coil and contact files can contain up to 4096 coils or contacts in each register when the data table file is configured for a maximum size of 256 words The input register and holding register files can contain up to 256 registers when the data table file is configured for a maximum size of 256 words The modbus Memory map is summarized in Table E 4 and detailed in Table E 5 below Table E 4 Modbus to MicroLogix Memory Map Summary MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series B and 1764 LRP Processors only Modbus Description Valid MicroLogix Addressing 8 Addressing File Type Data File Number Address 10001 to 14096 Read Only Modbus Contact Data space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 bits 0 to 4095 30001 to 30256 Read Only Modbus Input Register space Bit B or Integer N 3 to 255 words 0 to 255 30501 to
370. ollers Read this Document MicroMentor Document Number 1761 MMB Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1200 Programmable MicroLogix 1200 Programmable 1762 INOO6C MU P Controller including a mounting template and door labels Controllers Installation Instructions Detailed information on planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting MicroLogix 1200 Programmable 1762 UM001B EN P your MicroLogix 1200 system Controllers User Manual Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1500 Base Units including a mounting template for easy installation MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers Base Unit Installation Instructions 1764 IN001A ML P Detailed information on planning mounting wiring and troubleshooting your MicroLogix 1500 system MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers User Manual 1764 UM001A US P A description on how to install and connect an AlC This manual also Advanced Interface Converter AIC User 1761 6 4 contains information on network wiring Manual Information on how to install configure and commission a DNI DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 6 5 Information on DF1 open protocol DF1 Protocol and Command Set 1770 6 5 16 Reference Manual In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley Allen Bradley Programmable Controller 1770 4 1 programmable controllers Grounding and Wiring Guidelines A description of important differ
371. ollowing figure explains how the SQC instruction works Word B10 11 B10 12 B10 13 B10 14 B10 15 v Sequencer Ref File B10 11 0010 0000 SQC Sequencer Compare CEN gt File B10 11 Mask FFF CDN gt Source 3 0 Control R6 21 cCFD gt Length 4 lt Position 2 lt Input Word 1 3 0 0010 10100 1001 1101 v Mask Value FFFO 1111 1111 1111 0000 Step Aa wD SQC FD bit is set when the instruction detects that an input word matches through mask its corresponding reference word The FD bit R6 21 FD is set in the example since the input word matches the sequencer reference value using the mask value Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 15 4 Sequencer Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P This instruction uses the following operands e File This is the sequencer reference file Its contents on an element by element basis are masked and compared to the masked value stored in source NOTE If file type is word then mask and source must be words If file type is long word mask and source must be long words Mask The mask operand contains the mask constant word or file which is applied to both file and source When mask bits are set to 1 data is allowed to pass through for comparison When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to for comparison
372. om 1 to 128 word or 1 to 64 long word Position Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 127 Gword or 0 to 63 long word The position is decremented after each unload Data is unloaded at position zero Publication 1762 RM001C EN P File Instructions 14 13 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 14 13 FFU Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files m Pel Parameter 2 T ec amp 8 S E E 5 E ollaa Eel ERER EERE SIE iz a i FIFO eje e ele ele Destination eje ele Control 2 e e Length Position 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EH BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 14 14 File Instructions LFL Last In First Out LIFO Load Instruction Type output LFL i Load or CEN2 Table 14 14 Execution Time for the LFL Instru
373. om another device 1 This word can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message This address is duplicated in the Real Time Clock Function File at RTC 0 DOW See Real Time Clock Function File on page 3 3 for more information Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 20 System Status File OS Catalog Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 57 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the Operating System in the controller Publication 1762 RM001C EN P OS Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 58 ASCII AtoZ status read only This register identifies the Series letter for the Operating System in the controller OS FRN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 59 word 0 to 32 767 status read only This register identifies the FRN of the Operating System in the controller Processor Catalog Number Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 60 ASCII A to ZZ status read only This register identifies the Catalog Number for the processor Processor Series Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 61 ASCII AtoZ status read only This register identifies the Series of the processor Processor
374. on BXB units only Selectable Timed Interrupt STI This file type is associated with the Selectable Timed Interrupt function See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STI Function File on page 18 12 for more information Event Input Interrupt Ell This file type is associated with the Event Input Interrupt instruction See Using the Event Input Interrupt Ell Function File on page 18 17 for more information Real Time Clock RTC This file type is associated with the Real Time Clock time of day function See Real Time Clock Function File on page 3 3 for more information Trim Pot Information TPI This file type contains information about theTrim Pots SeeTrim Pot Information Function File on page 3 5 for more information Memory Module MMI This file type contains information about the Memory Module See Memory Module Information Information Function File on page 3 6 for more information Data Access Tool DAT This file type contains information about the Data AccessTerminal See DAT Function File Information MicroLogix 1500 only on page 3 9 for more information MicroLogix 1500 only Base Hardware Information BHI This file type contains information about the controller s hardware See Base Hardware Information Function File on page 3 12 for the file structure Communications Status CS This file type contains information about the Communications with the controller See File Communications Status File on page 3 13 for the file structure
375. on completes its operation With this type of logic status bit behavior is as follows The Done DN bit becomes true 1 when the PTO completes and remains set until the PTO rung logic is false The false rung logic re activates the PTO instruction To detect when the PTO instruction completes its output monitor the done DN bit Te EEE ee Pee Relative Timing Accelerate Status AS Run Status RS Decelerate Status DS Enable EN Done DN Idle ID Jog Pulse JP Jog Continuous JC A A Start of PTO Start of PTO Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 6 X Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Outputs Within the RSLogix 500 Function File Folder you see a PTO Function File PTO Function File with two elements PTOO 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB and PTO1 1764 28BXB only These elements provide access to PTO configuration data and also allow the control program access to all information pertaining to each of the Pulse Train Outputs NOTE If the controller mode is run the data within sub element fields may be changing 7 3 Function Files Hsc PTO pwM stl jen mrc oat tr MM Lall E PTO 0 L GUT Output LDN Done LDS Decelerating Status LAS Run Status HAS Accelerating Status H RF Ramp Profile LCS Control
376. on from inadvertent alteration of your selection program an unconditional OTL instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the new math overflow operation Program an unconditional OTU instruction at address S 2 14 to ensure the original math overflow operation Watchdog Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 3H Byte 2 to 255 control read write This byte value contains the number of 10 ms intervals allowed to occur during a program cycle The timing accuracy is from 10 ms to 0 ms This means that a value of 2 results in a timeout between 10 and 20 ms If the program scan time value equals the watchdog value a watchdog major error is generated code 0022H Free Running Clock Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 4 binary 0 to FFFF status read write This register contains a free running counter that is incremented every 100 us This word is cleared 0 upon entering an executing mode System Status File C 11 Minor Error Bits Overflow Trap Bit Address __ Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 0 binary 0 or 1 status read write If this bit is ever set 1 upon execution of the END or TND instruction a major error 0020H is generated To avoid this type of major error from occurring examine the state of this bit following a math instruction CADD SUB MUL DIV NEG SCL TOD or FRD take appropriat
377. on is used to improve communications performance throughput but also causes the ladder scan to be longer Simply place the SVC instruction on a rung within the control program When the rung is scanned the controller services any communications that need to take place You can place the SVC instruction on a rung without any preceding logic or you can condition the rung with a number of communications status bits The table on page 21 27 shows the available status file bits NOTE The amount of communications servicing performed is controlled by the Communication Servicing Selection Bit CSS and Message Servicing Selection Bit MSS in the Channel 0 Communication Configuration File For best results place the SVC instruction in the middle of the control program You may not place an SVC instruction in a Fault DII STI or I O Event subroutine Channel Select When using the SVC instruction you must select the channel to be serviced The channel select variable is a one word bit pattern that determines which channel is serviced Each bit corresponds to a specific channel For example bit 0 equals channel 0 When any bit is set 1 the corresponding channel is serviced Communications Instructions 21 27 Controller Channel Select Setting Channel s Serviced MicroLogix 1200 1 0 MicroLogix 1500 with 1764 LSP Processor 1 0 MicroLogix 1500 with 1764 LRP Processor 1 0 2 1 3 both 0 and 1 Communication Status B
378. on of the scan when the controller performs internal checks and services Communications input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies an electrical signal to the controller input scan The controller reads all input devices connected to the input terminals inrush current The temporary surge of current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Glossary 4 Publication 1762 RMO001C EN P instruction A mnemonic defining an operation to be performed by the processor A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of instructions available within a controller I O Input and Output jump Changes the normal sequence of program execution In ladder programs a JUMP JMP instruction causes execution to jump to a specific rung in the user program ladder logic A graphical programming format resembling a ladder like diagram The ladder logic programing language is the most common programmable controller language least significant bit LSB The element or bit in a binary word that carries the smallest value of weight LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs LIFO Last In First Out The order tha
379. on will error out with an error code of 5 See Table E 2 on page E 5 for the DF1 Full Duplex protocol parameters that you set via the Channel O configuration screens in your programming software Configuration of the two append characters for the AWA instruction can be found in the General tab of Channel Configuration option in RSLogix 500 MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 and later and MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 and later For the AWA and AWT instructions you can use DF1 Full Duplex protocol as described above To use the full ASCII instruction set use ASCII protocol as described below See Table E 9 on page E 14 for the ASCII parameters that you set via the Channel 0 and Channel 1 for the 1764 LRP configuration screens in your programming software Configuration of the two append characters for the AWA instruction can be found in the General tab of Channel Configuration option in RSLogix 500 String ST Data File File Description ASCII Instructions 20 5 The string data file is used by the ASCII instructions to store ASCII character data The ASCII data can be accessed by the source and destination operands in the ASCII instructions The string data file can also be used by the copy COP and move MOV MVM instructions String files consist of 42 word elements One string file element is shown below You can have up to 256 of these elements in the string file Table 20 1 String Data File Structure String Element
380. ons see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The UFM Underflow Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a underflow interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a Underflow Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit Underflow Interrupt UFI Using the High Speed Counter 5 13 Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access UFI Underflow HSC O UFI bit 2 t07 status read write Interrupt 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The UFI Underflow Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator counts through the underflow value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the underflow condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the underflow this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes High Preset Interrupt executes Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Overflow OF Description Address
381. ons Status File at CS0 0 4 0 See General Channel Status Block on page 3 14 for more information Message Reply Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 1 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 1 See General Channel Status Block on page 3 14 for more information Publication 1762 RM001C EN P System Status File C 17 Outgoing Message Command Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 2 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 2 See General Channel Status Block on page 3 14 for more information Communications Mode Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 3 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 3 See General Channel Status Block on page 3 14 for more inf
382. ons on page 12 1 and Updates to Math Status Bits on page 12 2 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Chapter 13 Move Instructions The move instructions modify and move words Instruction Used to Page MOV Move Move the source value to the destination 13 1 MVM Masked Move Move data from a source location to a selected 13 3 portion of the destination MOV Move Instruction Type output MOV Move Table 13 1 Execution Time for the MOV Instruction Source N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Dest N7 1 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 word 2 4 us 0 0 us long word 8 3 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 2 3 US 0 0 us long word 6 8 us 0 0 us The MOV instruction is used to move data from the source to the destination As long as the rung remains true the instruction moves the data each scan Using the MOV Instruction When using the MOV instruction observe the following Source and Destination can be different data sizes The source is converted to the destination size when the instruction executes If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination the overflow is handled as follows If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Source is positive the Destination is 32767 word If the result is negative the Destination is 32768 If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set
383. ons part of the operating cycle unless an SVC is executed If a second message instruction is processed before the first message completes the second message and its data are placed in one of the three remaining communication buffers This process repeats whenever a message instruction is processed until all four buffers are in use When a buffer is available the message and its associated data are placed in the buffer immediately If all four buffers for the channel are full when the next fifth message is processed the message request not the data is placed in the channel s communications queue The queue is a message Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 2 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P storage area that keeps track of messages that have not been allocated a buffer The queue operates as a first in first out FIFO storage area The first message request stored in the queue is the message that is allocated a buffer as soon as a buffer becomes available The queue can accommodate all MSG instructions in a ladder program When a message request in a buffer is completed the buffer is released back to the system If a message is in the queue that message is then allocated a buffer At that time the data associated with the message is read from within the controller NOTE If a message instruction was in the queue the data that is actually sent out of the controller may be different than what was present
384. ons such as DH 485 using 1761 NET AIC DeviceNet using 1761 NET DND or DF1 Half Duplex Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 14 Communications Instructions 4MSG Rung 2 34 MG11 0 Mime T Control Bie Ignore if imed out TO 5 s Contcler Communication Command Data Table Address SeeinElemeris 5 Charret D Aveling Execution EWE B Taget Device Message Timeo E Data Table Addes VEZ Local Node Add dec cota Local Remote Enor CodelHes 0 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Control Bits Parameters Ignore if Timed Out TO Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 TO Binary On or Off Control Read Write The Timed Out Bit TO can be set in your application to remove an active message instruction from processor control You can create your own timeout routine by monitoring the EW and ST bits to start a timer When the timer times out you can set the TO bit which removes the message from the system The controller resets the TO bit the next time the associated MSG rung goes from false to true An easier method is to use the message timeout variable described on page 21 12 because it simplifies the user program This built in timeout control is in effect whenever the message timeout is non zero It defaults to 5 seconds so unless you change it the internal timeout control is automatically enabled When the internal timeout is
385. ords that are allocated for this queue The number of records is set when the data log queue is configured FSZ can be used with RST to determine how full the queue is To address this word in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q FSZ where Q is the queue number Records Stored RST Records Stored RST specifies how many data sets are in the queue RST is decremented when a record is read from a communications device To address this word in ladder logic use the format DLSO Q RST where Q is the queue number NOTE If a queue is full and another record is saved the oldest record is over written Queue behavior is the same as a FIFO stack first in first out If a queue is full and an additional record is saved the first record is deleted DLS information can be used in the following types of instructions Instruction Type Operand Relay Bit Destination Output Bit Compare Source A Source B Low Limit LIM instruction Test LIM instruction High Limit LIM instruction Source MEQ instruction Mask MEQ instruction Compare MEQ instruction Math Source A Source B Input SCP instruction Logical Source A Source B Move Source Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 22 11 Retrieving Reading Data is retrieved from a data logging queue by sending a logical read Records command that addresses the Data Log retrieval file The oldest record is retr
386. ormation Communications Active Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 4 binary 0 or 1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated in the Communications Status File at CS0 0 4 4 See General Channel Status Block on page 3 14 for more information Scan Toggle Bit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 33 9 binary 0 or 1 status read write The controller changes the status of this bit at the end of each scan It is reset upon entry into an executing mode Last 100 pSec Scan Time Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 8 35 word 0 to 32 767 status read write This register indicates the elapsed time for the last program cycle of the controller Cin 100 us increments Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 18 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P System Status File Data File Overwrite Protection Lost Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 36 10 binary 0 or 1 status read write When clear 0 this bit indicates that at the time of the last program transfer to the controller protected data files in the controller were not overwritten or there were no protected data files in the program being downloaded When set CD th
387. ot present the controller faults with error code 0017H on any attempt to enter an executing mode An RTC module does not support program compare If program compare is enabled and an RTC only module is installed the controller does not enter an executing mode See also LPC Load Program Compare on page 3 7 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 10 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P System Status File Math Overflow Selection Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 14 binary 00r 1 control read write Set 1 this bit when you intend to use 32 bit addition and subtraction When S 2 14 is set and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow the overflow bit S 0 1 is set the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set and the destination address contains the unsigned truncated least significant 16 or 32 bits of the result The default condition of S 2 14 is cleared 0 When S 2 14 is cleared 0 and the result of an ADD SUB MUL or DIV instruction cannot be represented in the destination address underflow or overflow the overflow bit S 0 1 is set the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is set e the destination address contains 32 767 word or 2 147 483 647 long word if the result is positive or 32 768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word if the result is negative To provide protecti
388. ou cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Updates to Math Status Bits After a MOV instruction is executed the arithmetic status bits in the status file are updated The arithmetic status bits are in word 0 bits 0 3 in the processor status file S2 Table 13 3 Math Status Bits With this Bit The Controller S 0 0 Carry always resets S 0 1 Overflow sets when an overflow condition is detected otherwise resets S 0 2 Zero Bit sets if result is zero otherwise resets 0 3 Sign Bit sets if result is negative MSB is set otherwise resets 5 0 Math Overflow Trap sets Math Overflow Trap minor error if the Overflow bit is set Bit otherwise it remains in last state 1 Control bit NOTE If you want to move one word of data without affecting the math flags use a copy COP instruction with a length of 1 word instead of the MOV instruction MVM Masked Move MVM Masked Move Source N7 0 0 lt Mask N7 1 0000h lt Dest N7 2 0 lt Instruction Type output Table 13 4 Execution Time for the MVM Instruction Move Instructions 13 3 Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 78 us 0 0 us long word 11 8 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 word 12 us 0 0 us long word 10 0 us 0 0 us The MVM instruction is used to move data from the source to th
389. ount HSC Mode 6 Quadrature Counter phased inputs A and B Table 5 10 HSC Mode 6 Examples Input Terminals 1 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count A Count B Not Used Not Used Example 12 f off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 U off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 off 0 Hold accumulator value Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 2 Count input A leads count input B 3 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care f rising edge j falling edge Publication 1762 RM001C EN P NOTE Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Using the High Speed Counter 5 21 HSC Mode 7 Quadrature Counter phased inputs A and B With External Reset and Hold Table 5 11 HSC Mode 7 Examples Input 11 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Comments Terminals _ 1 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 I1 0 0 7 HSC1 Bit Function Count A Count B Z reset Hold Example 12 T off 0 off 0 fon 1 HSC Accumulator 1 co
390. ous tuning adjustments Process Control Instruction 19 25 Verifying the Scaling of Your Continuous System To ensure that your process is linear and that your equipment is properly connected and scaled do the following 1 Place the PID instruction in MANUAL and enter the following parameters type 0 for MinS type 100 for MaxS type 0 for CO Enter the REM RUN mode and verify that PV 0 Type 20 in CO Record the PV Type 40 in CO96 Record the PV Type 60 in CO96 Record the PV Type 80 in CO96 Record the PV Oo Anta wn kW I j M c The values you recorded should be offset from CO by the same amount This proves the linearity of your process The following example shows an offset progression of fifteen CO 20 PV 35 CO 40 PV 55 CO 60 PV 7596 CO 80 PV 95 If the values you recorded are not offset by the same amount Either your scaling is incorrect or the process is not linear or your equipment is not properly connected and or configured Make the necessary corrections and repeat steps 2 10 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 26 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P Determining the Initial Loop Update Time To determine the approximate loop update time that should be used for your process perform the following 1 Place the normal application values in MinS and Maxs 2 Type 50 in CO96
391. ow limit to 0 output low limit output high limit 100 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Analog 1 0 Scaling Process Control Instruction 19 17 To configure an analog input for use in a PID instruction the analog data must be scaled to match the PID instruction parameters In the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 the process variable PV in the PID instruction is designed to work with a data range of 0 to 16 383 The 1769 Compact I O analog modules 1769 IF4 and 1769 OF2 are capable of on board scaling Scaling data is required to match the range of the analog input to the input range of the PID instruction The ability to perform scaling in the I O modules reduces the amount of programming required in the system and makes PID setup much easier The example shows a 1769 IF4 module The IF4 has 4 inputs which are individually configurable In this example analog input 0 is configured for 0 to 10V and is scaled in engineering units Word 0 is not being used in a PID instruction Input 1 word 1 is configured for 4 to 20 mA operation with scaling configured for a PID instruction This configures the analog data for the PID instruction Field Device Input Signal Analog Register Scaled Data 20 0 mA 16 384 to 17 406 20 0 mA 16 383 4 0 mA 0 40 mA 819 to 1 The analog configuration screen is accessed from within RSLogix 500 Simply double click on the I O configuration item in the Controller folder and
392. p NOTE If a password is lost or forgotten there is no way to bypass the password to recover the program The only option is to clear the controllers memory If the Memory Module User Program has the Load Always functionality enabled and the controller User Program has a password specified the controller compares the passwords before transferring the User Program from the Memory Module to the controller If the passwords do not match the User Program is not transferred and the program mismatch bit is set S 5 9 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 2 10 Controller Memory and File Types Clearing the Controller Memory Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock Publication 1762 RM001C EN P If you are locked out because you do not have the password for the controller you can clear the controller memory and download a new User Program You can clear the memory when the programming software prompts you for a System or Master Password to go on line with the controller To do SO 1 Enter 65257636 the telephone keypad equivalent of MLCLRMEM MicroLogix Clear Memory 2 When the Programming Software detects this number has been entered it asks if you want to clear the memory in the controller 3 If you reply yes to this prompt the programming software instructs the controller to clear Program memory The controller supports a feature which allows you to select if future access to the User Program should be allowed or di
393. pe output Table 22 3 Execution Time for the DLG Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP 167 5 us 11 8 us date stamp 6 7 us 124 us time stamp 9 1 us word logged 16 2 us long word logged IMPORTANT oU must configure a data log queue before programming a DLG instruction into your ladder program The DLG instruction triggers the saving of a record The DLG instruction has one operand Queue Number Specifies which data log queue captures a record The DLG instruction only captures data on a false to true rung transition The DLG rung must be reset scanned false before it will capture data again Never place the DLG instruction alone on a rung It should always have preceding logic as shown below DLG Data Log queue number 0 Data Log Status File Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only 22 9 There is a Data Log Status DLS file element for each Data Log Queue The DLS file does not exist until a data log queue has been configured The Data Log Status file has 3 word elements Word 0 is addressable by bit only through ladder logic Words 1 and 2 are addressable by word and or bit through ladder logic The number of DLS file elements depends upon the number of queues specified in the application The status bits and words are described below Table 22 4 Data Log Status DLS File Elements Control Element Word 15 14 3113
394. performing very high speed operations Instruction Type output Table 6 1 Execution Time for the PTO Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 75 6 us 24 4 us MicroLogix 1500 72 6 us 21 1 us Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 2 Using High Speed Outputs Pulse Train Output Function Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P The MicroLogix 1200 1762 L24BXB and 1762 L40BXB controllers each support one high speed output A MicroLogix 1500 controller utilizing a 1764 28BXB Base Unit supports two high speed outputs These outputs can be used as standard outputs not high speed or individually configured for PTO or PWM operation The PTO functionality allows a simple motion profile or pulse profile to be generated directly from the controller The pulse profile has three primary components Total number of pulses to be generated Accelerate decelerate intervals e Run interval The PTO instruction along with the HSC and PWM functions are different than most other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these functions In this implementation the user defines the total number of pulses to be generated which corresponds to distance traveled and how many pulses to use for each acceleration deceleration period The number of pulses not used in the accel
395. ption Format OUT PWM Output PWM O OUT word INT 20r3 status readonly Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The PWM OUT Output variable defines the physical output that the PWM instruction controls This variable is set within the function file folder when the control program is written and cannot be set by the user program The outputs are defined as O0 0 2 or O0 0 3 as listed below O0 0 0 2 PWM modulates output 2 of the embedded outputs 1762 L24BXB 1762 L40BXB and 1764 28BXB O0 0 0 3 PWM modulates output 3 of the embedded outputs 1764 28BXB only Using High Speed Outputs 6 21 PWM Decelerating Status DS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access t Oor1 status read only DS Decelerating Status PWM 0 DS bi The PWM DS Decel bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It can be used by an input instruction on any rung within the control program The DS bit operates as follows e Set 1 Whenever a PWM output is within the deceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM output is not within the deceleration phase of the output profile PWM Run Status RS Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access RS PWM Run Status PWM 0 RS_ bit 0 or 1 status read only The PWM RS Run Status bit is controlled by the PWM sub system It
396. puts the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device A device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that receives a signal or command from the controller output scan The controller turns on off or modifies the devices connected to the output terminals PCCC Programmable Controller Communications Commands processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU processor files The set of program and data files resident in the controller program file Areas within a processor that contain the logic programs MicroLogix controllers support multiple program files program mode When the controller is not scanning the control program program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the program scan the logic program is processed and the Output Image is updated programming device Programming package used to develop ladder logic diagrams protocol The rules of data exchange via communications Glossary 7 read To acquire data For example the processor reads information from other devices via a read message relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic A representation of binary or discrete logic restore To transfer a program from a device to a controller reserved bit A location reserved for internal use retentive data Information data that is preserved through power cycles RS 232 An EIA standard that specifies e
397. puts on the base unit The mask bit pattern can be configured only during initial setup Using the High Speed Counter 5 25 High Preset Output HPO Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HPO High Preset Output HSC O HPO word 16 bit binary control read write The HPO High Preset Output defines the state 1 ON or 0 OFF of the outputs on the controller when the high preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 5 24 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the high preset being reached The high output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while the controller is operating Low Preset Output LPO Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access LPO Low Preset Output HSC 0 LPO word 16 bit binary control read write The LPO Low Preset Output defines the state 1 on 0 off of the outputs on the controller when the low preset is reached See Output Mask Bits OMB on page 5 24 for more information on how to directly turn outputs on or off based on the low preset being reached The low output bit pattern can be configured during initial setup or while the controller is operating Use the HSL instruction or the SP bit to load the new parameters while t
398. r Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 3 is restored when execution resumes Publication 1762 RM001C EN P C 4 System Status File Control ler Mode User Application Mode Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 1 0 to S 1 4 binary 0to 11110 status read only Bits 0 through 4 function as follows 1 0 to 1 4 Mode Controller Mode Use by MicroLogix Controller S1 4 SAB S172 san so P 1200 1500 0 0 0 0 0 0 remote download in progress 0 0 0 0 1 1 remote program mode 0 0 0 1 1 3 remote suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction 0 0 1 1 0 6 remote run mode 0 0 1 1 1 7 remote test continuous mode 0 1 0 0 0 8 remote test single scan mode 1 0 0 0 0 16 download in progress N A 0 0 0 1 17 program mode N A 1 0 1 1 27 suspend mode N A operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction 1 1 1 0 30 run mode N A Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 Valid modes are indicated by the symbol N A indicates an invalid mode for that controller Forces Enabled Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 5 binary 1 status read only This bit is always set 1 by the controller to indicate that forces are enabled Forces Installed
399. r Error Bits C 11 8 6 Major Error Code C 13 7 Suspend Code C 14 8 Suspend File C 14 9 Active Nodes Nodes 0 to 15 C 14 S 10 Active Nodes Nodes 16 to 31 C 14 8 13 14 Math Register C 15 S 15L Node Address C 15 15H Baud Rate C 15 22 Maximum Scan Time C 15 29 User Fault Routine File Number C 16 30 STI Set Point C 16 8 31 STI File Number C 16 33 Channel 0 Communications C 16 35 Last 100 uSec Scan Time C 17 36 10 Data File Overwrite Protection Lost C 18 37 RTC Year C 18 8 38 RTC Month C 18 8 39 RTC Day of Month C 18 40 RTC Hours C 19 S 41 RTC Minutes C 19 42 RTC Seconds C 19 8 53 RTC Day of Week C 19 57 OS Catalog Number C 20 58 OS Series C 20 59 OS FRN C 20 S 60 Processor Catalog Number C 20 61 Processor Series C 20 62 Processor Revision C 20 9 63 User Program Functionality Type C 21 S 64L Compiler Revision Build Number C 21 S 64H Compiler Revision Release C 21 Status File Details System Status File C 3 Arithmetic Flags The arithmetic flags are assessed by the processor following the execution of any math logical or move instruction The state of these bits remains in effect until the next math logical or move instruction in the program is executed Carry Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 0 binary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 if a mathematical carry or borrow is generated Otherwise the bit remains clea
400. r S 1 11 Load Memory Module Always being set in an attached memory module user program This bit is not cleared 0 by the controller Your program can examine the state of this bit on the first scan using bit S 1 15 on entry into an Executing mode to determine if the memory module user program has been transferred after a power up occurred This information is useful when you have an application that contains retentive data and a memory module has bit S 1 10 or bit S 1 11 set Memory Module Password Mismatch Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 9 binary 0 or 1 status read write At power up if Load Always is set and the controller and memory module passwords do not match the Memory Module Password Mismatch bit is set 1 See Password Protection on pag e2 9 for more information STI Lost Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 5 10 binary 0 or 1 status read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIL SeeUsing the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 18 12 for more information Retentive Data Lost MicroLogix 1200 only Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 5 11 binary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when
401. r both parameters If you enter the same value for both parameters setpoint scaling is disabled For example if measuring a full scale temperature range of 73 C PV 0 to 1156 C PV 16383 enter a value of 73 for MinS and 1156 for MaxS Remember that inputs to the PID instruction must be 0 to 16383 Signal conversions could be as follows Example Values Process limits 73 to 1156 C Transmitter output if used 4 to 20 mA Output of analog input module 0 to 16383 PID instruction MinS to MaxS 73 to 1156 C 2 Enter the setpoint word 2 and deadband word 9 in the same scaled engineering units Read the scaled process variable and scaled error in these units as well The control output percentage word 16 is displayed as a percentage of the 0 to 16383 CV range The actual value transferred to the CV output is always between 0 and 16383 When you select scaling the instruction scales the setpoint deadband process variable and error You must consider the effect on all these variables when you change scaling Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 20 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P Zero Crossing Deadband DB The adjustable deadband lets you select an error range above and below the setpoint where the output does not change as long as the error remains within this range This lets you control how closely the process variable matches the setpoint without changing the output
402. r each output module the output data file contains the controller directed state of the discrete output points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to output terminals 0 through 15 Bit Position 15 174 13 172 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 r w r w r w r w r w jr w Ir w Ir w Ir w r w ir w r w Ir w r w Ir w r w Word r w read and write 1 0 Configuration 1 5 Analog 1 0 Configuration 1762 IF20F2 Input Data File For each input module slot x words 0 and 1 contain the analog values of the inputs The module can be configured to use either raw proportional data or scaled for PID data The input data file for each configuration is shown below Table 1 1 Raw Proportional Format T Bit Position n5 14 13 112 J1 J10 9 B8 7 je 5 4 3 2 n Jo 0 0 Channel 0 Data 0 to 32768 0 0 1 10 Channel 1 Data 0 to 32768 0 0 J0 2 reserved 3 reserved 4 reserved S1 SO 5 JUO O0 U1 01 reserved Table 1 2 Scaled for PID Format T Bit Position 15 j4 J13 J12 j1 j0 J9 8 7 le 5 Ja 33 2n p 0 0 JO Channel 0 Data 0 to 16 383 0 J0 1 0 10 Channel 1 Data 0 to 16 383 0 0 2 reserved 3 reserved 4 reserved 1 ISO 5 UO 0O0 U1 01 reserved The bits are defined as follows Sx General status bits for channels 0 and 1 This bit is set when an error over or un
403. r information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 19 13 Rate Term T Tuning Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access TD Rate Term Ty PD 10 0 TD word INT Oto 32 767 control read write Rate Tg word 5 is the Derivative term The adjustment range is 0 to 327 67 minutes Set this value to 1 8 of the integral gain Tj NOTE This word is not effected by the reset and gain range RG bit For information see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on page 19 13 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 10 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Time Mode TM Tuning Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access TM Time Mode PD10 0 TM binary 0 or 1 control read write The time mode bit specifies when the PID is in timed mode 1 or STI mode 0 This bit can be set or cleared by instructions in your ladder program When set for timed mode the PID updates the CV at the rate specified in the loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT When set for STI mode the PID updates the CV every time the PID instruction is scanned in the control program When you select STI program the PID instruction in the STI interrupt subroutine The STI routine should have a time interval equal to the setting of the PID loop update parameter PD10 0 LUT Set the STI period in word STI 0 SPM For example if the loop update ti
404. red 0 When a STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 0 is restored when execution resumes OverFlow Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 1 binary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation does not fit in the destination Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 Whenever this bit is set 1 the overflow trap bit S 5 0 is also set 1 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 1 is restored when execution resumes Zero Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access S 0 2 binary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is zero Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When an STI High Speed Counter Event Interrupt or User Fault Routine interrupts normal execution of your program the original value of S 0 2 is restored when execution resumes Sign Flag Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 0 3 binary 0 or 1 status read write This bit is set 1 when the result of a mathematical operation or data handling instruction is negative Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 When a STI High Speed Counte
405. reference file Word 2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled 2 DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false 3 ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative or zero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file this is also the length of source if it is a file data type The length of the sequencer can range from 1 to 256 Position This is the current location or step in the sequencer file as well as source if it is a file data type It determines the next location in the stack to receive the value or constant found in source Position is a component of the control register The position can range from 0 to 255 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 15 10 Sequencer Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 15 6 SOL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2
406. riptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 t Oto7 control read write The HPM High Preset Mask control bit is used to enable allow or disable not allow a high preset interrupt from occurring If this bit is clear 0 and a High Preset Reached condition is detected by the HSC the HSC user interrupt is not executed This bit is controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle It is up to the user program to set and clear this bit High Preset Interrupt HPI Description Address Data Format WSC Modes Type User Program Access HPI High HSC 0 HPI bi Preset Interrupt 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 t Oto7 status read write The HPI High Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the high preset value and the HSC interrupt is triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the high preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the high preset this bit is used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected Low Preset Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt executes Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 1
407. riptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The LPI Low Preset Interrupt status bit is set 1 when the HSC accumulator reaches the low preset value and the HSC interrupt has been triggered This bit can be used in the control program to identify that the low preset condition caused the HSC interrupt If the control program needs to perform any specific control action based on the low preset this bit would be used as conditional logic This bit can be cleared 0 by the control program and is also be cleared by the HSC sub system whenever these conditions are detected High Preset Interrupt executes Underflow Interrupt executes Overflow Interrupt executes Controller enters an executing mode Low Preset Reached LPR Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access LPR Low HSC 0 LPR bi Preset Reached t 2 t0 7 status read only 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 The LPR Low Preset Reached status flag is set 1 by the HSC sub system whenever the accumulated value HSC 0 ACO is less than or equal to the low preset variable HSC 0 LOP This bit is updated continuously by the HSC sub system whenever the controller is in an executing mode Using the High Speed Counter 5 11 High Preset Mask HPM Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access HPM High HSC 0 HPM bi Preset Mask 1 For Mode desc
408. rity interrupt is being serviced executed the currently executing interrupt routine is suspended and the higher priority interrupt is serviced Then the lower priority interrupt is allowed to complete before returning to normal processing If an interrupt occurs while a higher priority interrupt is being serviced executed and the pending bit has been set for the lower priority interrupt the currently executing interrupt routine continues to completion Then the lower priority interrupt runs before returning to normal processing The priorities from highest to lowest are User Fault Routine highest priority Event Interrupt 0 Event Interrupt 1 High Speed Counter Interrupt 0 Event Interrupt 2 Event Interrupt 3 High Speed Counter Interrupt 1 MicroLogix 1500 only Selectable Timed Interrupt lowest priority Interrupt Latency Using Interrupts 18 5 Interrupt Latency is defined as the worst case amount of time elapsed from when an interrupt occurs to when the interrupt subroutine starts to execute The tables below show the interaction between an interrupt and the controller operating cycle Program Scan Activity When an Interrupt Can Occur Input Scan Between word updates Ladder Scan Start of Rung Output Scan Between word updates Communications Service Anytime 92 Housekeeping Anytime 1 Communications Services includes 80 us to get into a subroutine 2 Co
409. rksheet B 6 programming device G 6 proportional integral derivative application notes 19 18 PID instruction 19 3 PID tuning 19 22 runtime errors 19 16 the PID concept 19 1 the PID equation 19 2 protocol G 6 DF1 full duplex F 5 DF1 half duplex 6 DH485 communication F 2 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Modbus slave RTU F 9 protocol configuration F 1 PTO function file 6 6 instruction 6 1 publications related P 2 pulse train output function file 6 6 instruction 6 1 pulse width modulation function file 6 19 instruction 6 18 Purpose of this Manual P 1 PWM function file 6 19 instruction 6 18 0 quadrature encoder 5 20 RAC instruction 5 27 read G 7 real time clock accuracy 3 3 battery low indicator bit 3 4 disabling 3 4 function file 3 3 REF instruction 77 4 refresh instruction 17 4 related publications P 2 relay G 7 relay logic G 7 relay type instructions 7 7 remote messages 21 16 remote packet support 4 RES instruction 8 10 reserved bit G 7 reset accumulated value instruction 5 27 reset instruction 8 10 restore G 7 RET instruction 16 3 retentive data G 7 retentive data lost status bit C 12 retentive timer on delay instruction 8 6 return from subroutine instruction 16 3 RS 232 definition G 7 RTC day of month status C 18 day of week status C 19 function file 3 3 hours status C 19 minutes status C 19 month status C 18 seconds status C 19 year status C 18 RTO instruction 8 6 RTU defin
410. rogram did not have protected files or the files did not match The data protection lost indicator S 36 10 is then set The data protection lost indicator represents that the protected files within the controller have had values downloaded and the user application may need to be re configured NOTE The controller will not clear the Data Protection Lost indicator It is up to the user to clear this bit Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 2 8 Controller Memory and File Types Static File Protection Data File Properties General When a data file is Static File Protected the values contained in it cannot be changed via communications except during a program download to the controller Using Static File Protection with Data File Download Protection Static File Protection and Data File Download Protection can be used in combination with any MicroLogix 1200 Controller Series B and higher and MicroLogix 1500 Processor Series B and higher Setting Static File Protection Static File Protection can be applied to the following data file types Output O Input D e Status S Binary B e Timer T Counter C Control R Integer N e String ST Long Word L Proportional Integral Derivative PD Message MG Access the Static File Protect feature using RSLogix 500 programming software For each Fie 7 data file you want protected select the Static Type N protection in the Data File Properties screen as
411. rol 19 1 PID ASCII The ASCII instructions convert and write ASCII strings They cannot be used with MicroLogix 1500 20 1 1764 LSP Series A processors ABL ACB ACI ACL ACN AEX AHL AIC ARD ARL ASC ASR AWA AWT Communications The communication instructions read or write data to another station 21 1 MSG SVC Data Logging The data logging instruction allow you to capture time stamped and date stamped data 22 1 MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP only DLG Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 4 2 Programming Instructions Overview Using the Instruction Descriptions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Throughout this manual each instruction or group of similar instructions has a table similar to the one shown below This table provides information for all sub elements or components of an instruction or group of instructions This table identifies the type of compatible address that can be used for each sub element of an instruction or group of instructions in a data file or function file The definitions of the terms used in these tables are listed below this example table Table 4 1 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types Example Table Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level 7 Parameter E sso P a Bless 3 Sz ec a a o TlBisis MEE 8 A gt zr dle e ceiesgsesei j SSE l 4 e IV E Lislelole E la e e co S 54 2 fa fe S fa
412. roller and is set and cleared automatically Using the High Speed Counter 5 7 Counting Enabled CE Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access CE Counting HSC O CE i Enabled 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 t 0to7 control read write The CE Counting Enabled control bit is used to enable or disable the High Speed Counter When set 1 counting is enabled when clear 0 default counting is disabled If this bit is disabled while the counter is running the accumulated value is held if the bit is then set counting resumes This bit can be controlled by the user program and retains its value through a power cycle This bit must be set for the high speed counter to operate Set Parameters SP Description Address Data Format HSC Modes Type User Program Access SP Set HSC O SP bi Parameters 1 For Mode descriptions see HSC Mode MOD on page 5 16 t 0to7 control read write The SP Set Parameters control bit is used to load new variables to the HSC sub system When an OTE instruction with the address of HSC 0 SP is solved true Coff to on rung transition all configuration variables currently stored in the HSC function are checked and loaded into the HSC sub system The HSC sub system then operates based on those newly loaded settings This bit is controlled by the user program
413. rs as Appendix E well as the MicroLogix 1500 Updated Instruction Execution Times Appendix A and B and throughout manual Publication 1762 RM001C EN P November 2000 Summary of Changes 6 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P November 2000 Table of Contents Preface Who Should Use this Manual 0 0 00 00 00a ee P 1 Purpose of this Manual y u ace ais Vy dte Sut P 1 Common Techniques Used in this Manual P 2 Rockwell Automation Support boe Ree e P 3 Chapter 1 1 0 Configuration Embedded Oo ask utter rao Erb ECRIRE Se god 1 1 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion O i o8 664 ek n Eo RAE OS GS 1 3 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O Memory Mapping 1 4 MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O 1 7 MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O Memory Mapping 1 9 VO Addr ssing s 2d eset d ped oA rae dui o2 oe oda e pgs 1 13 VO FOTONES YA esa ik Bln IPEA ERE DE EEE SAPE 1 14 Input Filtering qon ae rti qe a ser ble eoe E es ot p BERLE 1 14 Latchitio Inputs nea vu Resin steel E eb e sa e t ey 1 15 Configuring Expansion I O Using RSLogix 500 1 18 Chapter 2 Controller Memory and File Controller Memory 1 loe 2 2 Types Data eS ou ioi oed ars SERE iPod Hagen PEG he 2 5 Protecting Data Files During Download 2 6 Static File Protection 4 xa pc ACRES Cd 2 8 Password Protection s og Ft Arpa GC EA ESL e a 2 9 Clearing the Controller Memory iced ace peer s 2 10 Allow Future
414. ruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 295 8 us 11 0 us MicroLogix 1500 251 8 us 8 9 us It is recommended that you place the PID instruction on a rung without any conditional logic If conditional logic exists the Control Variable output remains at its last value and the CVP CV term and integral term are both cleared when the rung is false NOTE In order to stop and restart the PID instruction you need to create a false to true rung transition The example below shows a PID instruction on a rung with RSLogix 500 programming software B3 0 PID 0047 3t PID 0 PID File PD8 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N71 Setup Screen When programming the setup screen provides access to the PID instruction configuration parameters The illustration below shows the RSLogix 500 setup screen PID Setup Ea Tunning Parameters 4 j Inputs _ Flags Controller Gain Kc od E Setpoint SP a TM Rech ih Setpoint MAXIS max fo AM TRUE Setpoint MIN Smin 0 ci aE Process Variable PV p Control Mode Output PID Control Control Output CY 0 Time Mode DupuMax Cv ge D D Limit Output CV OupuMin Cv g D Deadband D ScaledEmoSE D pead Foret Blass jo Cancel oOa 8 DW bE Tn 0O D 1 a e Sol i u SITES TST T TS T TS TET
415. ruction is sent to the master The master recognizes that the message is not intended for it but for another slave so the master immediately forwards the message to the intended slave This slave to slave transfer is a function of the master device and is also used by programming software to upload and download programs to processors on the DF1 Half Duplex link The MicroLogix controllers can only act as slave devices A device that can act as a master is required Several Allen Bradley products support DF1 Half Duplex master protocol They include the SLC 5 03 and higher processors enhanced PLC 5 processors and Rockwell Software RSLinx version 2 0 and higher also support DF1 Half Duplex master protocol DF1 Half Duplex supports up to 255 devices address 0 to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts The MicroLogix controllers support broadcast reception but cannot initiate a broadcast command The MicroLogix controllers support Half Duplex modems using RTS CTS hardware handshaking Protocol Configuration E 7 When the system driver is DF1 Half Duplex Slave the following parameters can be changed Table E 3 DF1 Half Duplex Slave Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 1200 Parity none even none Source ID 0 to 254 decimal 1 Node Address Control Line no handshaking Half Duplex modem no handshaking
416. s 20 26 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 2 ASCII Instructions Instruction Types and Operation Publication 1762 RM001C EN P There are two types of ASCII instructions ASCII string control and ASCII port control The string control instruction type is used for manipulating data and executes immediately The port control instruction type is used for transmitting data and makes use of the ASCII queue More details are provided below ASCII String Control These instructions are used to manipulate string data When a string control instruction is encountered in a ladder logic program it executes immediately It is never sent to the ASCII queue to wait for execution The following tables list the ASCII string control instructions used by the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers MicroLogix 1200 Series A AIC Integer to String MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 and later MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 and later ACI String to Integer AIC Integer to String ACN String Concatenate ASC String Search AEX String Extract ASR ASCII String Compare ASCII Port Control These instructions use or alter the communication channel for receiving or transmitting data The following tables list the ASCII port control instructions used by the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers MicroLogix 1200 Series A ACL ASCII Clear Buffer AWA ASCII Write with Append AWT ASCII Write 1 For the M
417. s 32767 word or 2 147 483 647 long word If the result is negative the Destination is 32768 word or 2 147 483 648 long word If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is set the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination Sources can be constants or an address but both sources cannot be constants Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 10 1 Math Instructions Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files a Address Address unction Files SC Mode Level 5 Parameter E g 2 e S cc amp e zi zl n 5 S 5 z c ale lllo l l zElLF L wleEIPT SLE ol e ln f le l SE ISIE IG BB SIS ES S lela lela lS Sia Source A elelelel ele ejejojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ele Source B elelelel ele ejejeoejojojojojojojojojojojojojojo ele Destination elelelel ele elelelelelele e ele e 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor for the following math instructions ADD
418. s MOD HSC Mode HSC 0 MOD word INT control read only The MOD Mode variable sets the High Speed Counter to one of 8 types of operation This integer value is configured through the programming device and is accessible in the control program as a read only variable Table 5 3 HSC Operating Modes Mode Type Number 0 Up Counter The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode 1 Up Counter with external reset and hold The accumulator is immediately cleared 0 when it reaches the high preset A low preset cannot be defined in this mode 2 Counter with external direction 3 Counter with external direction reset and hold 4 Two input counter up and down 5 Two input counter up and down with external reset and hold 6 Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B 7 Quadrature counter phased inputs A and B with external reset and hold Table 5 4 HSC Mode 0 Examples HSC Mode 0 Up Counter Using the High Speed Counter 5 17 Input Terminals 1 0 0 0 HSCO 11 0 0 1 HSCO 11 0 0 2 HSCO 11 0 0 3 HSCO CE Bit Comments 11 0 0 4 HSC1 11 0 0 5 HSC1 11 0 0 6 HSC1 11 0 0 7 HSC1 Function Count Not Used Not Used Not Used Example 1 T on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example 2 T lon U off 0 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 1 HS
419. s a 5 s STI Program Slels Files z S zs El ztE 2 E E RTC E EMT 8 E Ti Specialty 0 amp E amp 8 MMI Files T sg E 1 a al B E e Dar s 23 a aa 51 Le el eo E 3255 ZEE cs Siz L F l s5 o c 0 Ble e 2 8 5 10S oo E lw Sar 2 s o g jE j SEX 3 oS iru Leis e BS s 21255 SJEN lei cz S a Le Litaje amp o c g Dm e 5 S832 g ols ccc a a siS o aA z Oiss 2 s LS a 1 The string file is available in MicroLogix 1200 controllers and MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSPSeries B and 1764 LRP processors f 2 The DAT files are only used in MicroLogix 1500 controllers The PTO and PWM files are only used in MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 3 Specialty files for Data Logging are only used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP processor Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Controller Memory and File Types 2 3 User Memory User memory is the amount of storage available to a user for storing ladder logic data table files I O configuration etc in the controller User data files consist of the system status file I O image files and all other user creatable data files bit timer counter control integer string long word MSG and PID A word is defined as a unit of memory in the controller The amount of memory available to the user for data files and program files is measured in user words Memory consumption is allocated as follows For data files a word is the
420. s are set to 1 data is allowed to pass through to destination When mask bits are reset to 0 the data is masked does not pass through to destination The immediate data ranges for mask are from 0 to OxFFFF word or 0 to OxFFFFFFFF long word NOTE If mask is direct or indirect the position selects the location in the specified file Destination The destination operand is the sequencer location or file Control This is a control file address The status bits stack length and the position value are stored in this element The control element consists of 3 words CERERI S CRUCES IS EAD notused FD not used Word 1 Length contains the index of the last element in the sequencer reference file Word2 Position the current position in the sequence 1 2 3 EN Enable Bit is set by a false to true rung transition and indicates that the instruction is enabled DN Done Bit is set after the instruction has operated on the last word in the sequencer file It is reset on the next false to true rung transition after the rung goes false ER Error Bit is set when the controller detects a negative position value or a negative orzero length value When the ER bit is set the minor error bit S2 5 2 is also set Length The length operand contains the number of steps in the sequencer file as well as Mask and or Destination if they are file data types The length of the sequencer can range from 1 t
421. s and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files Address Address ata Files Mode Level a Parameter E 2 E O E e a als 3 v E e SIP IS loj lz Elgiz lale Elez l l len fon fis os S fe 2 EE IB le S SE 1S S Ela lela 3 la Source ele elelelele sure gt Destination ejo elelelele aia Length 1 The ST file is not valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors 2 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI and DLS files EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS The source and destination file types must be the same except bit B and integer ND they can be interchanged It is the address that determines the maximum length of the block to be copied as shown in the following table Table 14 3 Maximum Lengths for the COP Instruction Source Destination Data Type Range of Length Operand 1 word elements ie word 1 to 128 2 word elements ie long word 1 to 64 3 word elements ie counter 1 to 42 42 word elements ie string 1to3 File Instructions 14 3 FLL Fill File Instruction Type output FLL Fill File Table 14 4 Execution Time for the FLL Instruction
422. s true and the MSG is scanned the EN and EW bits for this message are set If this is a MSG write instruction the source data is transferred to the message buffer at this time Not shown in the diagram If the four message buffers are in use the message request is put in the message queue and only the EN bit is set The message queue works on a first in first out basis that allows the controller to remember the order in which the message instructions were enabled When a buffer becomes available the first message in the queue is placed into the buffer and the EW bit is set 1 NOTE The control program does not have access to the message buffers or the communications queue Once the EN bit is set 1 it remains set until the entire message process is complete and either the DN ER or TO bit is set 1 The MSG Timeout period begins timing when the EN bit is set 1 If the timeout period expires before the MSG instruction completes its function the ER bit is set 1 and an error code 37H is placed in the MG File to inform you of the timeout error Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 24 Communications Instructions Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P 2 At the next end of scan REF or SVC instruction the controller determines if it should examine the communications queue for another instruction The controller bases its decision on the state of the channel s Communication Servicing Selection CSS and Message Servicing Selection
423. s within the acceleration phase of the output profile Cleared 0 Whenever a PTO instruction is not within the acceleration phase of the output profile PTO Ramp Profile RP Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access t 0 or 1 control read write RP Ramp Profile PTO 0 RP bi The PTO RP Ramp Profile bit controls how the output pulses generated by the PTO sub system accelerate to and decelerate from the Output Frequency that is set in the PTO function file PTO 0 OF It can be used by an input or output instruction on any rung within the control program The RP bit operates as follows e Set 1 Configures the PTO instruction to produce an S Curve profile Cleared 0 Configures the PTO instruction to produce a Trapezoid profile Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 10 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P PTO Idle Status IS Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access IS Idle Status PTO 0 IS bit 0 or 1 status read only The PTO IS Idle Status is controlled by the PTO sub system It can be used in the control program by an input instruction The PTO sub system must be in an idle state whenever any PTO operation needs to start The IS bit operates as follows e Set 1 PTO sub system is in an idle state The idle state is defined as the PTO is not runn
424. sallowed after it has been transferred to the controller This type of protection is particularly useful to an OEM Coriginal equipment manufacturer who develops an application and then distributes the application via a memory module or within a controller The Allow Future Access setting is found in the Controller Properties window as shown below Controller Properties x General Compiler Passwords Controller Communications T Allow Iidesinig Across les 5 Enable Single Step Test Jo Enable Force Protection Cancel Epp Help When Allow Future Access is deselected the controller requires that the User Program in the controller is the same as the one in the programming device If the programming device does not have a matching copy of the User Program access to the User Program in the controller is denied To access the User Program clear controller memory and reload the program NOTE Functions such as change mode clear memory restore program and transfer memory module are allowed regardless of this selection Controller passwords are not associated with the Allow Future Access setting Chapter 3 Function Files This chapter describes controller function files The chapter is organized as follows Overview on page 3 2 Real Time Clock Function File on page 3 3 Trim Pot Information Function File on page 3 5 e Memory Module Information Function File on page 3 6 DAT Function File MicroLogix
425. scription Format Program Access TOP Total Output PTO 0 TOP long word Oto 2 147 483 647 control read write Pulses To Be Generated 32 bit INT The PTO TOP Total Output Pulses defines the total number of pulses to be generated for the pulse profile accel run decel inclusive PTO Output Pulses Produced OPP Sub Element Address Data Range Type User Program Description Format Access OPP Output PTO 0 0PP longword 0to02 147 483 647 status read only Pulses Produced 32 bit INT The PTO OPP Output Pulses Produced is generated by the PTO sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor how many pulses have been generated by the PTO sub system PTO Accel Decel Pulses ADP Using High Speed Outputs 6 13 Sub Element Address Data Format Range Type User Program Description Access ADP Accel Decel PTO 0 ADP long word 32 bit see below control read write Pulses INT The PTO ADP Accel Decel Pulses defines how many of the total pulses TOP variable will be applied to each of the ACCEL and DECEL components The illustration below shows the relationship where TOP total output pulses 12 000 ADP accelerate decelerate pulses 3 000 If you need to determine the ramp period accelerate decelerate ramp duration 2 x ADP OF duration in seconds OF output frequency The following formul
426. se MicroLogix 1200 126 6 us 24 7 us MicroLogix 1500 107 4 us 21 1 us The PWM function allows a field device to be controlled by a PWM wave form The PWM profile has two primary components Frequency to be generated Duty Cycle interval The PWM instruction along with the HSC and PTO functions are different than all other controller instructions Their operation is performed by custom circuitry that runs in parallel with the main system processor This is necessary because of the high performance requirements of these instructions The interface to the PWM sub system is accomplished by scanning a PWM instruction in the main program file file number 2 or by scanning a PWM instruction in any of the subroutine files A typical operating sequence of a PWM instruction is as follows 1 The rung that a PWM instruction is on is solved true the PWM is started 2 A waveform at the specified frequency is produced 3 The RUN phase is active A waveform at the specified frequency with the specified duty cycle is output 4 The rung that the PWM is on is solved false 5 The PWM instruction is IDLE While the PWM instruction is being executed status bits and data are updated as the main controller continues to operate Because the PWM Using High Speed Outputs 6 19 instruction is actually being executed by a parallel system the status bits and other information are updated each time the PWM instruction is scanned whil
427. sed to test for values within or outside of a specified range The LIM instruction is evaluated based on the Low Limit Test and High Limit values as shown in the following table Table 9 11 LIM Instruction Operation Based on Low Limit Test and High Limit Values When AMd5 J RugStette Low Limit High Limit Low Limit Test High Limit true Low Limit High Limit Test Low Limit or Test gt High Limit false High Limit Low Limit High Limit Test Low Limit false High Limit Low Limit Test gt High Limit or Test Low Limit true Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 9 8 Compare Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The Low Limit Test and High Limit values can be word addresses or constants restricted to the following combinations If the Test parameter is a constant both the Low Limit and High Limit parameters must be word or long word addresses If the Test parameter is a word or long word address the Low Limit and High Limit parameters can be either a constant a word or a long word address But the Low Limit and High Limit parameters cannot both be constants When mixed sized parameters are used all parameters are put into the format of the largest parameter For instance if a word and a long word are used the word is converted to a long word The data ranges are e 32768 to 32767 word e 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Addressing Modes a
428. ser faults can cause the user fault subroutine to be executed If the fault is recoverable the subroutine can be used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S 1 13 The controller then continues in the Run or test mode The subroutine does not execute for non user faults See User Fault Routine on page 18 6 for information on creating a user fault subroutine Fault Messages This section contains fault messages that can occur during operation of the MicroLogix 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 programmable controllers Each table lists the error code description the probable cause and the recommended corrective action Error Advisory Message Description Fault Recommended Action Code Classification Hex 0001 NVRAM ERROR The default program is loaded to the Non User e Re download or transfer the program controller memory This occurs e Verify battery is connected MicroLogix e ifa power down occurred during 1500 only program download or transfer e Contact your local Rockwell Automation from the memory module representative if the error persists e RAM integrity test failed e FLASH integrity test failed MicroLogix 1200 only 0002 UNEXPECTED RESET e The controller was unexpectedly Non User e Refer to proper grounding guidelines and reset due to a noisy environment using surge suppressors in your controller s or internal hardware failure User Manual e The default program is loaded e Verify battery is connected MicroLogix MicroLo
429. signal to the control valve The greater the error between the setpoint and process variable input the greater the output signal Alternately the smaller the error the smaller the output signal An additional value feed forward or bias can be added to the control output as an offset The PID result control variable drives the process variable toward the set point Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 2 Process Control Instruction The PID Equation PD Data File instruction set ASS EJ Project Fam Help E3 Controller Jg Program Figs Data Files H B Cross Reference El CO OUTPUT CE 1 INPUT EI 82 STATUS E ss BINARY El T4 TIMER cs COUNTER wf PRS CONTROL INTEGER EH E PD file created by RSLogix 500 Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P The PID instruction uses the following algorithm Standard equation with dependent gains 1 d PV Output K E rx Tpy dd t bias Standard Gains constants are Term Range Low to High Reference Controller Gain Ke 0 01 to 327 67 dimensionless Proportional Reset Term 1 T 327 67 to 0 01 minutes per repeat Integral Rate Term Tp 0 01 to 327 67 minutes Derivative 1 Applies to MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 PID range when Reset and Gain Range RG bit is setto 1 For more information on reset and gain see PLC 5 Gain Range RG on pa ge19 13 The derivative term rate provides smoo
430. sing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files F ion Files z Address Address unction Files E Model Level P Er Parameter E 2 e E E z ec a F Flg 9 o E c alo lS joj _ zmElLF kb wi eEI sse ler fen f os a S 2 EG Bl IS SE 1S le lela lela Sila Source eljelel elele ejejojeoejojojojojojojojojoj o eje eje Mask elelelel ele ejejojojojojoejojojojojojojojojojo ele Compare elelel elele ejejejeoejojojoejojojojojojojojojoj jo eje 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 3 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files LIM Limit Test Instruction Type input LIM Limit Test Table 9 10 Execution Time for the LIM Instructions Low Lim N7 0 0 lt Controller Data Size When Rung Is Test 0 0 lt True False S iro MicroLogix 1200 word 64 us 6 1 us long word 14 4 us 13 6 us MicroLogix 1500 word 5 5 us 53 us long word 12 2 us 11 7 us The LIM instruction is u
431. sing the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files EL Address Mode Level a E e T Parameter 7 E E e s n Hd a a e s 3 5 E e cioOger i i iki iEsg umrIs sise e fen 2 be S ums Eja Slot e e Mask ele e e e ele e Length REF 1 0 Refresh Instruction Type output lt REF gt Table 17 5 Execution Time for the REF Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 see p A 7 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 see p B 6 0 0 us The REF instruction is used to interrupt the program scan to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle for all communication channels This includes write outputs service communications all communication channels communications toggle push button DAT MicroLogix 1500 only and comms housekeeping and read inputs The REF instruction has no programming parameters When it is evaluated as true the program scan is interrupted to execute the I O scan and service communication portions of the operating cycle The scan then resumes at the instruction following the REF instruction The REF instruction cannot be executed from an STI subroutine HSC subroutine EII subroutine or a user fault subroutine NOTE Using an REF instruction may result in input data changing in the middle of a program scan This condi
432. sition is required to set the EN bit to repeat the instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 20 22 ASCII Instructions ARD ASCII Read Characters ARD ASCII Read C EN gt Channel 0 Dest ST10 4 lt DN gt Control R6 3 String Length 10 lt lt ER gt Characters Read 0 lt Error 0 lt Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output Table 20 23 Execution Time for the ARD Instruction True False MicroLogix 1200 Series B FRN 3 or later 132 3 us 49 7 us character 11 8 us MicroLogix 1500 Series B FRN 4 or later 108 us 44 us character 10 7 us Use the ARD instruction to read characters from the buffer and store them in a string To repeat the operation the rung must go from false to true Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Channel is the number of the RS 232 port Channel 0 For the 1764 LRP only you can select either Channel O or Channel 1 Destination is the string element where you want the characters stored Control is the control data file See page 20 6 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to read from the buffer The maximum is 82 characters If you specify a length larger than 82 only the first 82 characters will be read If you specify 0 characters LEN defaults to 82 This is word 1 in the control data file Characters Read POS is the number of characters
433. sses 10001 to 14096 range 3 to 255 0 no file 0 assignment Input Registers Read Only Modbus addresses 30001 to 30256 range 3 to 255 0 no file 0 Holding Registers Read Write Modbus addresses 40001 to 40256 range 3 to 255 0 no 0 file RTS Off Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 20 ms increments 0 x20 ms Specifies the time delay between setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Pre Transmit Delay 0 to 65535 can be set in 1 ms increments 0 x1 ms When the Control Line is set to no handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs delay time to change from transmit to receive mode When the Control Line is set to Ha f Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Protocol Configuration E 13 ASCII Driver The ASCII driver provides connection to other ASCII devices such as bar Mi croLo gix 1200 and code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices 1500 Seri
434. sses the following I O functions Embedded I O on page 1 1 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O on page 1 3 MicroLogix 1200 Expansion I O Memory Mapping on page 1 4 MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O on page 1 7 e MicroLogix 1500 Compact Expansion I O Memory Mapping on page 1 9 I O Addressing on page 1 13 e I O Forcing on page 1 14 Input Filtering on page 1 14 Latching Inputs on page 1 15 The MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 provide discrete I O that is built into the controller as listed in the following table These I O points are referred to as Embedded I O Controller Family Inputs Outputs Quantity Type Quantity Type MicroLogix 1200 1762 L24BWA 14 24V dc 10 relay Controllers 1762 L24AWA 14 120V ac 10 relay 1762 L24BXB 14 24V dc 10 5 relay 5 FET 1762 LA0BWA 24 24V dc 16 relay 1762 LA0AWA 24 120V ac 16 relay 1762 LA0BXB 24 24V dc 16 8 relay 8 FET MicroLogix 1500 1764 24BWA 12 24V dc 12 relay Base Units 1764 24AWA 12 120V ac 12 relay 1764 28BXB 16 24V dc 12 6 relay 6 FET Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 2 0 Configuration AC embedded inputs have fixed input filters DC embedded inputs have configurable input filters for a number of special functions that can be used in your application These are high speed counting event interrupts and latching inputs The 1764 28BXB has two high speed outputs for use as pulse train output
435. ssing a message then MG11 0 is processed If one of the four buffers is available the message and its associated data are processed immediately How quickly the message is actually sent to the destination device depends on a number of issues including the selected channel s communication protocol the baud rate of the communications port the number of retries needed if any and the destination device s readiness to receive the message Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 21 4 Communications Instructions The Message File The MSG instruction built into the controller uses a MG data file to process the message instruction The MG data file shown at left is accessed using the MG prefix Each message instruction utilizes an element within a MG data file For example MG11 0 is the first element in message data file 11 TEST ASS ni x E43 Data Files BE Cross Reference E o0 OUTPUT E i input E s2 STATUS E B3 BINARY E T4 Timer E cs COUNTER E R6 CONTROL E N7 INTEGER E mar zl Message File Sub Elements Each MSG instruction must use a unique Element in a MSG File The MSG element for each MSG instruction holds all of the parameters and status information for that particular MSG instruction Each MSG File Element consists of Sub Elements 0 through 24 as shown in the following table Message File Element
436. ssing level does not apply Subtract SUB 0 0 34 3 3 0 0 12 9 3 5 Suspend SUS n a n a 1 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Service Communications SVC 0 0 208 1 6 1 0 word Swap SWP 0 0 13 7 2 2 11 5 swapped word Temporary End TND 0 0 0 9 0 5 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P A 4 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time Table A 1 MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time for Programming Instructions Programming Instruction Instruction Word Long Word Mnemonic Execution Time in ps Memory Execution Time in ps Memory False True Usage in False True Usage in Words Words Convert to BCD TOD 0 0 17 2 1 8 Long Word addressing level does not apply Off Delay Timer TOF 13 0 29 3 9 On Delay Timer TON 3 0 18 0 3 9 User Interrupt Disable UID 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Enable UIE 0 0 0 8 0 9 User Interrupt Flush UIF 0 0 12 3 0 9 Examine if Closed XIC 0 8 0 9 1 0 Examine if Open XIO 0 8 0 9 1 0 Exclusive Or XOR 0 0 3 0 2 8 0 0 9 9 3 0 1 Only valid for MicroLogix 1200 Series B Controllers 2 This value for the SVC instruction is for when the communica Publication 1762 RM001C EN P ions servicing function is accessing a data file The time increases when accessing a function file MicroLogix 1200 Memory Usage and Instruction Execution Time A 5 Indirect Addressing The following sections describe how indirect
437. status file or FAULT ROUTINE S 29 but either the fault routine e create a fault routine for the file number VALUE was not physically created or reference in the status file S 29 The file e the fault routine number was less number must be greater than 2 and less than 3 or greater than 255 than 256 0029 INSTRUCTION An indirect address reference in the Recoverable Correct the program to ensure that there are INDIRECTION ladder program is outside of the no indirect references outside data file space OUTSIDE OF DATA entire data file space Re compile reload the program and enter the SPACE Run mode 002E Ell ERROR An error occurred in the Ell Recoverable See the Error Code in the Ell Function File for configuration the specific error 0030 SUBROUTINE The JSR instruction nesting level Non User Correct the user program to reduce the NESTING EXCEEDS exceeded the controller memory nesting levels used and to meet the LIMIT space restrictions for the JSR instruction Then reload the program and Run 0031 UNSUPPORTED The program contains an Non User e Modify the program so that all instructions INSTRUCTION instruction s that is not supported are supported by the controller DETECTED by the controller e Re compile and reload the program and enter the Run mode 0032 S00 SQC SQL A sequencer instruction length Recoverable e Correct the program to ensure that the OUTSIDE OF DATA position parameter references length and position parameters do not
438. struction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address iles ion Fi Data Files Function Files Mode Level N Parameter E g B a sess t a a olF sls o sla E e coOoggrr imisetEirmaebi 5ss e eo mo fe bs l E E 2 E 5 la S 5 EIS Ela e ia 3 Channel Source e Control e e 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Example I1 AWT 1 od ASCII WRITE EN 10 Channel 0 Source ST3720 XDN Control R6 23 If input slot 1 bit 10 is set write 40 characters from String Length 40 ER ST37 20 to the display device Characters Sent 0 Error 0 In this example when the rung goes from false to true the control element Enable EN bit is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Forty characters from string ST37 40 are sent through channel 0 The Done bit DN is set and a value of 40 is present in the POS word of the ASCII control data file When an error is detected the error code is written to the Error Code Byte and the Error Bit ER is set See ASCII Instruction Error Codes on page 20 30 for a list of the error codes and recommended action to take NOTE For information on the timing of this instruction see
439. struction detected an error such as entering a negative number for the length or source operand 4 UL Unload Bit is the instruction s output Avoid using the UL unload bit when the ER error bit is set Publication 1762 RM001C EN P File Instructions 14 7 e Bit Address The source is the address of the bit to be transferred into the bit array at the last highest bit position Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The data range for length is from 0 to 2048 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 14 9 BSR Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 has Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level a Parameter E 2 E o s a S Bale S 5 z E lelg le j l lS e al lo lE e ls l5 F S la la le lz b S I IE I ala Es E18 S lE l Z jag File ele e ele e o ele Control 2 Length Source eje elelele e ej e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001C
440. struction on page 19 1 for more information 1 File Number in BOLD is the default Additional data files of that type can be configured using the remaining numbers Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 2 6 Controller Memory and File Types Protecting Data Files During Download Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Data File Download Protection Once a user program is in the controller there may be a need to update the ladder logic and download it to the controller without destroying user configured variables in one or more data files in the controller This situation can occur when an application needs to be updated but the data that is relevant to the installation needs to remain intact This capability is referred to as Data File Download Protection The protection feature operates when A User Program is downloaded via programming software A User Program is downloaded from a Memory Module Setting Download File Protection Download File Protection can be applied to the following data file types Output O Input D Binary B e Timer T Counter C Control R Integer N e String ST Long Word L Proportional Integral Derivative PD Message MG NOTE The data in the Status File cannot be protected Controller Memory and File Types 2 7 Data File Properties x General Access the Download Data File Protect feature using RSLogix 500 programming software For Fie
441. t Device Message Timeout 5 Data Table Address N50 0 Local Bridge Addr dec 17 octal 21 Local Remote Remote Remote Bridge Addr dec 15 Remote Station Address dec 51 Remote Bridge Link ID 100 r Control Bits Awaiting Execution Ew Error ERE Message done DH Message Transmitting ST Message Enabled EN Ignore if timed out TO Sjaal Eror Code Hex 0 pe Error Description No errors Communications Instructions 21 19 Figure 21 3 DH 485 and DH Example Network a AICH SLC 5 03 DH 485 Network Node 5 Node 22 Link ID 1 AIC Node 12 AIC Node 10 Node 11 AIC AlC Node 17 Node 23 octal 19 decimal lle IEE MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 04 DH Network Link ID 100 Node 40 octal 32 decimal Node 63 octal 51 decimal PLC 5 SLC 5 04 This Controller Parameters See Target Device Parameters on page 21 12 Control Bits Parameters See Control Bits Parameters on page 21 14 Target Device Parameters Message Timeout Message Transmitting ST 0 See Message Timeout on page 21 12 Enor CodelHes 0 Data Table Address
442. t be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIP See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 18 12 for more information STI Enabled Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 1 binary Oor1 control read write 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 TIE See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 18 12 for more information STI Executing Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 2 binary 0 or 1 control read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It cannot be accessed via communications such as a Message instruction from another device This address is duplicated at STI 0 UIX See Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 18 12 for more information Memory Module Program Compare Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 9 binary 0 or 1 control read only When this bit is set 1 in the controller its user program and the memory module user program must match for the controller to enter an executing mode If the user program does not match the memory module program or if the memory module is n
443. t data is stored and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 to 7 of a word logic A general term for digital circuits or programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions Master Control Relay MCR A hard wired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex or lengthy set of information Modbus RTU Slave A half duplex serial communication protocol Glossary 5 modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line modes Selected methods of operation Example run test or program negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the desired voltage level network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The typical amount of current seen at nominal input voltage normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or deactivated They are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated normally open Contacts on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated They are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated off delay time The OFF delay time is a m
444. t used as an operand for an instruction in a ladder program or access via Comms while in any mode other than download via Programming Software or Memory Module Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Communications Instructions 21 5 The Target file information contained in Sub Elements 12 through 15 of the MSG File Element depend upon the message type as shown in the tables below Message File Target Location Information Target Device 485 CIF Sub Name Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 12 Reserved Y Word read only 13 MG11 0 TFN Target File Number Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE Offset in elements into CIF Y Word read write 15 Reserved Y Word read only Message File Target Location Information Target Device 500CPU or PLC 5 Sub X Address Description Parameter Size User Program Element Access 12 Target File Type Y Word read only 13 MG11 0 TFN Target File Number Y Word read write 14 MG11 0 ELE Target File Element Number for B Y Word read write S N T C R L ST and RTCU files or Target File Slot Number for O and I files 15 Target File Element Number for O Y Word read only and files Setto zero for any file other than Oorl 1 The file number for RTC fu nction files is set to 0 by the programming software 2 RTC and ST are only permitted in the MSG instruction for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series B Controllers T
445. table Table 10 10 SCP Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files BE Address Mode Level an Parameter 2 E o eo fi fe bs S E E Eus ES EAE Input x elelelelele elelelelelelel elelelelele ele ele Input Min xg ele elele e elele ele Input Max x4 ele elele e elele ele Scaled Min yg ele elele e elele ele Scaled Max y4 ele elele e elele ele Output y elelelelele elele elele e ele ele 1 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are only recommended for use with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 2 See Important note about indirect addressing IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Tae Do not use the High Speed Counter Accumulator HSC ACO for the Scaled Output parameter in the SCP instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P SOR Square Root SOR Dest Square Root Source N7 0 0 lt N7 1 0 lt Instruction Type output Table 10 11 Execution Time for the SOR Instruction Math Instructions Controller Data Size When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 word 26 0 us 0 0 us long word 30 9
446. tandards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your devices download The transfer of program or data files to a device DTE Data Terminal Equipment EMI Electromagnetic interference embedded I O Embedded I O is the controller s on board I O For MicroLogix controllers embedded I O is all I O residing at slot 0 expansion I O Expansion I O is I O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable MicroLogix 1200 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I O MicroLogix 1500 controllers use Bulletin 1769 expansion I O For MicroLogix controllers embedded I O is all I O residing at slot 1 and higher Glossary 3 encoder A device that detects position and transmits a signal representing that position executing mode Any run or test mode false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FET Field Effect Transistor DC output capable of high speed operation FIFO First In First Out The order that data is stored and retrieved from a file file A collection of data or logic organized into groups full duplex A mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex half duplex A mode of communication where data transmission is limited to one direction at a time hard disk A storage device in a personal computer high byte Bits 8 to 15 of a word housekeeping The porti
447. tery backed memory B Ram Records are retrieved from the 1764 LRP processor via communications This chapter explains how Data Logging is configured and used This chapter contains the following topics Queues and Records on page 22 2 Configuring Data Log Queues on pag e22 6 DLG Data Log Instruction on pa ge22 8 Data Log Status File on pag e22 9 Retrieving Reading Records on page 22 11 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 22 2 Data Logging MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor only Queues and Records Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The 1764 LRP processor has 48K bytes 48 x 1024 of additional memory for data logging purposes Within this memory you can define up to 256 0 to 255 data logging queues Each queue is configurable by size maximum number of records stored and by length each record is 1 to 80 characters The length and the maximum number of records determine how much memory is used by the queue You can choose to have one large queue or multiple small queues The memory used for data logging is independent of the rest of the processor memory and cannot be accessed by the User Program Each record is stored as the instruction is executed and is non volatile battery backed to prevent loss during power down Program Files Data Files 2 0 3 peer vi 6 to 255 4 to 255 Function Files HSC Specialty Files PTO
448. that the controller moved from the buffer to the string 0 to 82 This field is updated during the execution of the instruction and is read only This is word 2 in the control data file Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 20 30 for error code descriptions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 24 ARD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Data Files Function Files Address Address ata Files Mode Level o E g T Parameter 2 E E e s 3 E e ee o S zje ric E E E Ele E oO ceo O Z 0 5 ols o len leo le zit I EIS 21S S Els E la S Sia Channel Destination Control 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element ASCII Instructions 20 23 Instruction Operation When the rung goes from false to true the Enable bit EN is set When the instruction is placed in the ASCII queue the Queue bit EU is set The Running bit RN is set when the instruction is executing The DN bit is set on completion of the instruction Once the requested number of characters are in the buffer the characters are moved to the destination string The number of characters moved is
449. the Control field is invalid Enter a valid length and retry operation either a negative number or a number greater than 82 14 OxOE Execution of an ACL instruction caused this None required instruction to abort 15 OxOF Communications channel configuration was changed None required while instruction was in progress Publication 1762 RM001C EN P ASCII Instructions 20 31 ASCII Character Set The table below lists the decimal hexadecimal octal and ASCII conversions Table 20 31 Standard ASCII Character Set Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Column 4 Ctrl DEC HEX JOCT ASC DEC HEX OCT ASC DEC HEX OCT ASC DEC HEX OCT IASC 00 00 000 INUL 132 20 040 ISP 64 40 100 96 60 140 A 01 01 001 SOH 133 21 041 65 41 101 A 97 61 141 a AB 02 02 002 STX 434 22 042 66 42 102 B 98 62 142 b AC 03 03 003 ETX 35 23 043 67 43 103 JC 99 63 143 Ic D 04 04 004 EOT 36 24 044 I 68 44 104 ID 100 64 144 Jd E 05 05 005 JENQ 37 25 045 1 69 45 105 JE 101 65 145 Ie F 06 06 006 JACK 138 26 046 J amp 70 46 106 F 102 166 146 f AG 07 07 007 BEL 139 27 047 71 47 107 JG 103 167 14 Jg H 08 08 010 BS 40 28 050 72 48 110 JH 104 168 150 Jh 09 09 011 HT 41 29 051 73 49 111 105 169 151 i J 10 0A 012 JLF 42 2A 052 74 4A 112 J 106 6A 152 j K 11 0B 013 IVT 43 2B 053 l 75 4B 1133 IK 107 6B 153 k L 12 0C 014 FF 44 2C 054 76 4C 114 L 108 6C 154 M 13 0D 015 ICR 45 2
450. the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 7 correspond to input terminals 0 through 7 bits 8 through 15 are not used Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 X x Ix X X X x Ix r r r r r r r r Word e oo e c ow N e r read x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 IM12 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 11 correspond to input terminals 0 through 11 bits 12 through 15 are not used Bit Position 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 X x x x r r r r r r r r r r r r Word r read x not used always at a 0 or OFF state 1769 IA16 and 1769 1016 Input Image For each input module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 15 correspond to input terminals 0 through 15 v Bit Position 5 14 13 12 11 10 19 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r r read Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1 10 1 0 Configuration Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 1769 IQ6XOW4 Input Image For each module the input data file contains the current state of the field input points Bit positions 0 through 5 correspond to input terminals 0 through 5 bits 6 through 15 are not use
451. the data to be loaded into the HSC accumulator The data range is from 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Valid Addressing Modes and File Types are shown below Table 5 14 RAC Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page 4 2 s Address Address Data Files Function Files p Mode Level E Parameter E E T a leil is sz ec a a T 7 9 8 9 Ts ce coegesi Sle le l lol Ele lelo a IE Bm o qu m o lv la le z e la lv la S a E lo S ES a S S Counter Number Source ejojo Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 28 Using the High Speed Counter Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Chapter 6 Using High Speed Outputs The high speed output instructions allow you to control and monitor the PTO and PWM functions which control the physical high speed outputs Instruction Used To Page PTO Pulse Train Output Generate stepper pulses 6 2 PWM Pulse Width Modulation Generate PWM output 6 18 PTO Pulse Train Output PTO IMPORTANT The PTO function can only be used with the controller s Fuis Tran Output al embedded I O It cannot be used with expansion I O modules IMPORTANT The PTO instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units Relay outputs are not capable of
452. the fault condition the controller continues to execute the control program If the fault cannot be cleared the outputs are cleared and the controller exits its executing mode and the FAULT LED flashes ATTENTION Bi you clear the Major Error Halted bit S 1 13 when the controller mode switch MicroLogix 1500 only is in the RUN position the controller immediately enters the RUN mode Future Access OEM Lock Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 81 14 binary 00r 1 Status read only When this bit is set 1 it indicates that the programming device must have an exact copy of the controller program See Allow Future Access Setting OEM Lock on page 2 10 for more information First Scan Dit Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 1 15 binary 0 or 1 status read write When the controller sets 1 this bit it indicates that the first scan of the user program is in progress following entry into an executing mode The controller clears this bit after the first scan NOTE The First Scan bit S 1 15 is set during execution of the start up protection fault routine Refer to S 1 9 for more information System Status File C 9 STI Mode STI Pending Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access 2 0 binary Oor1 status read only 1 This bit can only be accessed via ladder logic It canno
453. the result stored in the destination Entering Parameters Enter the following parameters when programming this instruction Source A is the first string in the concatenation procedure Source B is the second string in the concatenation procedure e Destination is where the result of Source A and B is stored Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 18 ACN Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address iles Function Files Data Files Mode Level a E sg T Parameter 2 E E o 5 p 5 fe el E _ E El e ci eger rlzzeEktiiieEs5gEmsi is zls e len fe b S ISIE I Ge S S E18 9 B le B mS Source A Source B Destination 1 The Control data file is the only valid file type for the Control Element Instruction Operation This instruction executes on a false to true rung transition Source B is appended to Source A and the result is put in the Destination Only the first 82 characters 0 to 81 are written to the destination If the string length of Source A Source B or Destination is greater than 82 the ASCII String Manipulation Error bit S 5 15 is set and the Invalid String Length Error 1F39H is written to the Major Error Fault Code word S 6 ASCII I
454. the string element you want to write Control is the control data file See page 20 6 String Length LEN is the number of characters you want to write from the source string 0 to 82 If you enter a 0 the entire string is written This is word 1 in the control data file Characters Sent POS is the number of characters that the controller sends to an external device This is word 2 in the control data file Characters Sent C POS is updated after all characters have been transmitted The valid range for POS is from 0 to 82 The number of characters sent to the destination may be smaller or greater than the specified String Length CLEN as described below Characters Sent POS may be smaller than String Length CLEN if the length of the string sent is less than what was specified in the String Length CLEN field Characters Sent POS can be greater than the String Length CLEN if inserted values from in line indirection are used If the String Length CLEN is greater than 82 the string written to the destination is truncated to 82 characters Error displays the hexadecimal error code that indicates why the ER bit was set in the control data file See page 20 30 for error code descriptions ASCII Instructions 20 13 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown below Table 20 10 AWT Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the In
455. the unsigned truncated value of the Source is stored in the Destination e Source can be a constant or an address Valid constants are 32768 to 32767 word and 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 long word Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 13 2 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Move Instructions Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 13 2 MOV Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 Address Address 1 2 Data Files Function Files S Mode Level m 5 Parameter E 2 e E z cc a 8 TEls 9 ls E S ale jSjo l l lz Ele l lal al Ele 5 Jes la le l lh a S Ne SE S la EEs E8 e ale lale la Sila Source ejejojoejojojojoejojojojojojojoejojojojojojojojoj jo eje Destination e e elelel elelele 5 5 5 5 ele 1 The ST file is not valid for MicroLogix 1500 1764 LSP Series A processors 2 DAT files are valid for the MicroLogix 1500 only PTO and PWM files are valid for MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units 3 The Data Log Status file can only be used by the MicroLogix 1500 1764 LRP Processor 4 See Important note about indirect addressing b Some elements can be written to Consult the function file for details IMPORTANT Y
456. then double click on the specific I O module The configuration for the analog output is virtually identical Simply address the PID control variable CV to the analog output address and configure the analog output to Scaled for PID behavior Module H1 1769 IF4 Analog 4 Channel Input Module Expansion General Configuration Analog Input Configuration Generic Extra Data Contig Mord Word 1 Filter Fe M Enable 5n Hz M Enable feo Hz z Input Range Input Range oto in vpc fa to 20 me Data Format Data Format Engineering Units z Scaled for PID wand M a 3 4 Filter Filter Enable jo Hz Enable jo Hz z Input Range Input Range fi to 10 VOC zj po to 10 VDC si Data Format Data Farmat F aw Proportional F Faw Proportional E OK Cancel Help Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 18 Process Control Instruction Application Notes Publication 1762 RM001C EN P The following paragraphs discuss Input Output Ranges e Scaling to Engineering Units Zero crossing Deadband Output Alarms Output Limiting with Anti reset Windup The Manual Mode e Feed Forward DIES HUM Do not alter the state of any PID control block value unless you fully understand its function and how it will affect your process Unexpected operation could result with possible equipment damage and or personal injury Input Output Ranges The input module measuring the process variabl
457. thin the operating system or your program When a fault occurs you have various options to determine what the fault is and how to correct it This section describes how to clear faults and provides a list of possible advisory messages with recommended corrective actions Automatically Clearing Faults You can automatically clear a fault by cycling power to the controller when the Fault Override at Power Up bit S 1 8 is set in the status file You can also configure the controller to clear faults and go to RUN every time the controller is power cycled This is a feature that OEMs can build into their equipment to allow end users to reset the controller If the controller faults it can be reset by simply cycling power to the machine To accomplish this set the following bits in the status file e 52 1 8 Fault Override at Power up e 2 1 12 Mode Behavior If the fault condition still exists after cycling power the controller re enters the fault mode For more information on status bits see System Status File on page C 1 NOTE You can declare your own application specific major fault by writing your own unique value to S 6 and then setting bit S 1 13 to prevent reusing system defined codes The recommended values for user defined faults are FFOO to FFOF Publication 1762 RM001C EN P D 2 Fault Messages and Error Codes Manually Clearing Faults Using the Fault Routine The occurrence of recoverable or non recoverable u
458. thing by means of a low pass filter The cut off frequency of the filter is 16 times greater than the corner frequency of the derivative term The PID instruction implemented by the MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 controllers is virtually identical in function to the PID implementation used by the Allen Bradley SLC 5 03 and higher processors Minor differences primarily involve enhancements to terminology The major difference is that the PID instruction now has its own data file In the SLC family of processors the PID instruction operated as a block of registers within an integer file The Micrologix 1200 and 1500 PID instruction utilizes a PD data file You can create a PD data file by creating a new data file and classifying it as a PD file type RSLogix automatically creates a new PD file or a PD sub element whenever a PID instruction is programmed on a rung The PD file then appears in the list of Data Files as shown in the illustration Each PD data file has a maximum of 255 elements and each PID instruction requires a unique PD element Each PD element is composed of 20 sub elements which include bit integer and long integer data All of the examples in this chapter use PD file 10 sub element 0 PID Proportional Integral Derivative PID PID PID File PD8 0 Process Variable N7 0 Control Variable N7 1 Setup Screen Process Control Instruction 19 3 Instruction Type output Table 19 1 Execution Time for the PID Inst
459. ting on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH 485 network offers interconnection of 32 devices multi master capability token passing access control the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network e maximum network length of 1219 m 4000 ft The DH 485 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used The following section describes the protocol used to control message transfers on the DH 485 network DH 485 Token Rotation A node holding the token can send a message onto the network Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions based on the Token Hold Factor each time it receives the token After a node sends a message it passes the token to the next device The allowable range of node addresses 0 to 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network such as a MicroLogix controller or an SLC 5 02 or higher processor Protocol Configuration E 3 DH 485 Configuration Parameters When communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed Table E 1 Parameter Options Programming Software Default Baud Rate 9600 19 2K 19 2K Node Address 1 to 31 decimal 1 Token Hold Factor 1t04 2 Max Node Address 1 to 31 31
460. tion needs to be evaluated when using the REF instruction Vaid Hd B Ihe watchdog and scan timers are reset when executing the REF instruction You must insure that the REF instruction is not placed inside a non terminating program loop Do not place the REF instruction inside a program loop unless the program is thoroughly analyzed Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Chapter 18 Using Interrupts Interrupts allow you to interrupt your program based on defined events This chapter contains information about using interrupts the interrupt instructions and the interrupt function files The chapter is arranged as follows Information About Using Interrupts on page 18 2 User Interrupt Instructions on page 18 7 Using the Selectable Timed Interrupt STD Function File on page 18 12 Using the Event Input Interrupt EID Function File on page 18 17 See also Using the High Speed Counter on page5 1 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 18 2 Using Interrupts Information About Using The purpose of this section is to explain some fundamental properties of Interrupts the User Interrupts including e What is an interrupt e When can the controller operation be interrupted Priority of User Interrupts Interrupt Latency User Fault Routine What is an Interrupt An interrupt is an event that causes the controller to suspend the task it is currently performing perform a different task and then return to the suspend
461. tion 1762 RM001C EN P Appendix E Protocol Configuration Use the information in this appendix for configuring communication protocols The following protocols are supported from any RS 232 communication channel DH 485 DF1 Full Duplex e DF1 Half Duplex Slave Modbus RTU Slave e ASCII This appendix is organized into the following sections e DH 485 Communication Protocol on page E 2 e DF1 Full Duplex Protocol on page E 5 e DF1 Half Duplex Protocol on page E 6 Modbus RTU Slave Protocol MicroLogix 1200 Controllers and MicroLogix 1500 Series B and higher Processors only on page E 9 ASCII Driver MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 Series B and higher Controllers only on page E 13 See your controller s User Manual for information about required network devices and accessories Publication 1762 RM001C EN P E 2 Protocol Configuration DH 485 Communication Protocol Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P The information in this section describes the DH 485 network functions network architecture and performance characteristics It also helps you plan and operate the controller on a DH 485 network DH 485 Network Description The DH 485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a single pair of wires DH 485 protocol uses RS 485 Half Duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical characteristics it is not a protocol RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co exis
462. tion is enabled Publication 1762 RMO 01C EN P Timer and Counter Instructions 8 9 CTU Count Up CTD Count Down Instruction Type output comp or CCU Table 8 14 Execution Time for the CTU and CTD Instructions ree lt DN gt Controller ICTU When Rung Is CTD When Rungis True False True False Count a ep MicroLogix 1500 6 4 us 8 5 us 75ys 8 5 us Counter C5 0 A E The CTU and CTD instructions are used to increment or decrement a counter at each false to true rung transition When the CTU rung makes a false to true transition the accumulated value is incremented by one count The CTD instruction operates the same except the count is decremented NOTE If the signal is coming from a field device wired to an input on the controller the on and off duration of the incoming signal must not be more than twice the controller scan time assuming 50 duty cycle This condition is needed to enable the counter to detect false to true transitions from the incoming device Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 8 10 Timer and Counter Instructions RES Reset R6 0 C RES 2 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Instruction Type output Table 8 15 Execution Time for the RES Instructions Controller WhenRungls True False MicroLogix 1500 4 8 us 0 0 us The RES instruction resets timers counters and control elements When the RES instruction is execute
463. total output pulses to be generated TOP e Accel Decel exceeds limit See page 6 13 This error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine 5 No No Yes Jog Error PTO is in the idle state and two or more of the following are set e Enable EN bit set e Jog Pulse JP bit set e Jog Continuous JC bit set This error does not fault the controller It is automatically cleared when the error condition is removed 6 No Yes No Jog The jog frequency JF value is less than 0 or greater than 20 000 This error Frequency faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Error 7 No Yes No Length The total output pulses to be generated TOP is less than zero This error Error faults the controller It can be cleared by logic within the User Fault Routine Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 18 Using High Speed Outputs PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM Number PWM Function Publication 1762 RM001C EN P IMPORTANT The PWM function can only be used with the controller s embedded I O It cannot be used with expansion I O modules IMPORTANT The PWM instruction should only be used with MicroLogix 1200 and 1500 BXB units Relay outputs are not capable of performing very high speed operations Instruction Type output Table 6 4 Execution Time for the PWM Instruction Controller When Rung Is True Fal
464. tput Frequency OF Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OF PWM Output Frequency PWM 0 0F word INT 0 to 20 000 control read write The PWM OF Output Frequency variable defines the frequency of the PWM function This frequency can be changed at any time PWM Operating Frequency Status OFS Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access OFS PWM Operating PWM 0O OFS word INT Oto 20 000 status read only Frequency Status The PWM OFS Output Frequency Status is generated by the PWM sub system and can be used in the control program to monitor the actual frequency produced by the PWM sub system PWM Duty Cycle DC Element Description Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access DC PWM Duty Cycle PWM O DC word INT 1to 1000 control read write The PWM DC Duty Cycle variable controls the output signal produced by the PWM sub system Changing this variable in the control program changes the output waveform Typical values and output waveform DC 1000 10096 Output ON constant no waveform e DC 750 75 Output ON 25 output OFF e DC 500 50 Output ON 5096 output OFF e DC 250 25 Output ON 75 output OFF DC 0 096 Output OFF constant no waveform PWM Duty Cycle Status DCS Element Description Address Data Range
465. train output PTO 6 6 pulse width modulation PWM 6 79 real time clock RTC 3 3 selectable timed interrupt STI 18 12 trim pot information TPI 3 5 future access status bit C 8 f f X f G GEO instruction 9 5 greater than instruction 9 4 greater than or equal to instruction 9 5 Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 4 Index GRT instruction 9 4 H half duplex G 3 hard disk G 3 high byte G 3 high speed counter function file 5 2 high speed counter load instruction 5 26 high speed outputs 6 1 housekeeping G 3 HSC function file 5 2 HSL instruction 5 26 1 0 G 4 1 0 addressing 1 7 1 0 configuration 7 7 1 0 forcing 1 14 I O refresh instruction 17 4 identifying controller faults D 1 IIM instruction 17 7 immediate input with mask instruction 77 1 immediate output with mask instruction 17 3 in line indirection 20 29 input and output instructions 77 1 input device G 3 input filter selection modified status bit C 73 input filtering 7 74 input scan G 3 input output status file 3 78 inrush current G 3 instruction G 4 instruction execution time B 7 instruction set definition G 4 MicroLogix 1200 execution times A 1 MicroLogix 1500 execution times B 7 overview 4 7 INT instruction 18 7 interrupt subroutine instruction 18 7 interrupts interrupt instructions 18 7 interrupt subroutine INT instruction 18 7 latency 16 5 overview 18 1 selectable timed start STS instruction 18 8 user fault routine 18 6 user
466. transferred into the bit array at the first lowest bit position Length The length operand contains the length of the bit array in bits The valid data range for length is from 0 to 2048 Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 14 7 BSL Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 ES Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level a Parameter E 2 E o s A E o S zje B ni E E g E c gdosoesi i lw fis slela e oe fe SE SIE IG I BE S FS e B iS Ela S S la File ele e e e eje ele Control 2 e Length Source ele elele e e ej e 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 Control file only Not valid for Timers and Counters IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EI BHI MMI DATI TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 14 6 File Instructions BSR Bit Shift Right Instruction Type output BSR Bi Shift Right iss CEN gt Table 14 8 Execution Time for the BSR Instruction lle Control R6 0 DN Controller When Rung Is Bit Address 1 0 15 Length 1 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 32 us 1 3 us word 1
467. ts Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 11 4 Conversion Instructions FRD Convert from Binary Coded Decimal BCD Instruction Type output FRD Tom BCD A Table 11 7 Execution Time for the FRD Instructions ource i 0000h Controller When Rung Is Dest N7 0 0 lt True False MicroLogix 1200 14 1 us 0 0 us MicroLogix 1500 12 3 us 0 0 us The FRD instruction is used to convert the Binary Coded Decimal BCD source value to an integer and place the result in the destination Addressing Modes and File Types can be used as shown in the following table Table 11 8 FRD Instruction Valid Addressing Modes and File Types For definitions of the terms used in this table see Using the Instruction Descriptions on page4 2 m Address Address Data Files Function Files 1 Mode Level a Parameter E E ole z eo zje o n E E z ce ceo o Z Te 9iEILISZzs e eo fe fe a S SE IG EIS IES IS Els Ela lS S la Source elelelelele ele e 2 Destination ele ejojo eje 1 See Important note about indirect addressing 2 See FRD Instruction Source Operand on page 11 5 IMPORTANT You cannot use indirect addressing with S ST MG PD RTC HSC PTO PWM STI EII BHI MMI DAT TPI CS IOS and DLS files Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Conversion Instructions 11 5 F
468. ts accumulator until the preset value is reached The accumulator is reset 0 when rung conditions go true regardless of whether the timer is timed out TOF timers are reset on power cycles and mode changes Timer instructions use the following control and status bits Table 8 8 Timer Control and Status Bits Timer Word 0 Data File 4 is configured as a timer file for this example Bit bit 13 T4 0 DN DN timer done Is Set When rung conditions are true And Remains Set Until One of the Following Occurs rung conditions go false and the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value bit14 T 0 TT TT timertiming rung conditions are false and accumulated value rung conditions go true or when the done bit is is less than the preset value reset bit15 T4 0 EN EN timer enable rung conditions are true rung conditions go false ATTENTION Because the RES instruction resets the accumulated value and status bits do not use the RES instruction to reset a timer address used in a TOF instruction If the TOF accumulated value and status bits are reset unpredictable machine operation may occur Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 8 6 Timer and Counter Instructions RTO Retentive Timer On Delay RTO Retentive Timer On L CEN gt Timer 4 0 Time Base 1 0 lt DN gt Preset 0 lt Accum 0 lt Instruction Type output Table 8 9 Executio
469. ty to exchange information with a device that is not connected to the local network This type of connection requires a device on the local network to act as a bridge or gateway to the other network Remote Networks DH 485 and DH Networks The illustration below shows two networks a DH 485 and a DH network The SLC 5 04 processor at DH 485 node 17 is configured for passthru operation Devices that are capable of remote messaging and are connected on either network can initiate read or write data exchanges with devices on the other network based on each device s capabilities In this example node 12 on DH 485 is a MicroLogix 1500 The MicroLogix 1500 can respond to remote message requests from nodes 40 or 51 on the DH network and it can initiate a message to any node on the DH network NOTE The MicroLogix 1000 can respond to remote message requests but it cannot initiate them NOTE The MicroLogix 1200 capabilities are the same as the MicroLogix 1500 in this example This functionality is also available on Ethernet by replacing the SLC 5 04 at DH 485 node 17 with an SLC 5 05 processor Figure 21 1 DH 485 and DH Networks SLC 5 04 DH 485 Network AIC AIC AIC Node 17 Node 12 AIC E MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 SLC 5 04 DH Network Node 19 Node 51 SLC 5 04 PLC 5 Communications Instructions 21 17
470. ue Usage in Words Words LIFO Load LFL 9 7 22 2 34 9 7 27 4 3 9 LIFO Unload LFU 9 7 25 6 3 4 9 7 27 4 34 Limit LIM 5 3 5 5 2 3 11 7 12 2 40 Master Control Reset MCR Start 0 8 0 8 1 0 Long Word addressing level does not apply MCR End 1 0 1 0 1 5 Masked Comparison for Equal MEQ 17 17 1 8 29 3 5 3 5 Move MOV 0 0 2 3 2 5 0 0 6 8 2 0 l Message Steady State MSG 6 0 17 0 2 9 Long Word addressing level does not apply Message False to True 198 0 Transition for Reads Message False to True 226 1 4 Transition for Writes word Multiply MUL 0 0 5 8 2 0 0 1 27 6 3 5 Masked Move MVM 0 0 72 2 0 0 0 10 0 3 0 Negate NEG 0 0 19 3 0 0 0 10 4 3 0 Not Equal NEO 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 5 2 3 2 5 Not NOT 0 0 24 2 5 0 0 8 1 2 5 One Shot ONS 17 2 2 3 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Or OR 0 0 2 0 2 8 0 0 79 3 0 One Shot Falling OSF 3 4 2 7 5 4 Long Word addressing level does not apply One Shot Rising OSR 2 8 3 2 5 4 Output Enable OTE 0 0 1 2 1 6 Output Latch OTL 0 0 0 9 0 6 Output Unlatch OTU 0 0 0 9 0 6 Proportional Integral Derivative PID 8 9 251 8 24 Pulse Train Output PTO 21 1 72 6 1 9 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 21 1 107 4 1 9 l Reset Accumulator RAC Word addressing level does not 0 0 17 8 2 0 apply 1 0 Refresh REF 0 0 see p B 6 0 5 Long Word addressing level does not apply Reset RES 0 0 4 8 1 0 Return RET 0 0 1 0 0 3 Retentive Timer On RTO 2 2 15 8 3 4 Subroutine SBR 1 0 1 0 0 3 Scale SCL 0 0 8 7 2 5 Scale with Parameters SCP 0 0 27 0
471. ues may need to be changed to avoid loss of communication programming software increase poll timeout and reply timeout values MicroLogix controller increase poll timeout Ownership Timeout When a program download sequence is started by a software package to download a ladder logic program to the controller the software takes program ownership of the controller Program ownership prevents other devices from reading from or writing to the controller while the download is in process Once the download is completed the programming software returns the program ownership to the controller so other devices can communicate with it again The controller clears the program ownership if no supported commands are received from the owner within the timeout period If the program ownership were not cleared after a download sequence interruption the controller would not accept commands from any other device because it would assume another device still had program ownership IMPORTANT If a download sequence is interrupted due to electromagnetic interference or other events discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership timeout period and then restart the program download The ownership timeout period is 60 seconds After the timeout you can re establish communications with the controller and try the program download again The only other way to remove program ownership is to cycle power to the controller Protoc
472. ultiply Multiply two values 10 5 DIV Divide Divide one value by another 10 5 NEG Negate Change the sign of the source value and place it 10 6 in the destination CLR Clear Set all bits of a word to zero 10 6 SOR Square Root Find the square root of a value 10 9 SCL Scale Scale a value 10 7 SCP Scale with Parameters Scale a value to a range determined by creating 10 8 a linear relationship SWP Swap Swap low byte with high byte in a specified 10 10 cannot be used with MicroLogix number of words 1200 and 1500 Series A controllers Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 10 2 Math Instructions Using the Math Instructions Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Most math instructions use three parameters Source A Source B and Destination additional parameters are described where applicable later in this chapter The mathematical operation is performed using both Source values The result is stored in the Destination When using math instructions observe the following e Source and Destination can be different data sizes Sources are evaluated at the highest precision word or long word of the operands Then the result is converted to the size of the destination If the signed value of the Source does not fit in the Destination the overflow shall be handled as follows If the Math Overflow Selection Bit is clear a saturated result is stored in the Destination If the Source is positive the Destination i
473. ung within the control program to detect when the PWM is in its normal state A normal state is defined as ACCEL RUN or DECEL with no PWM errors e Set 1 Whenever a PWM instruction is in its normal state e Cleared 0 Whenever a PWM instruction is not in its normal state PWM Enable Hard Stop EH Element Description Address Data Range Type User Program Format Access EH PWM Enable Hard Stop PWM O EH bit Oor1 control read write The PWM EH Enable Hard Stop bit stops the PWM sub system immediately A PWM hard stop generates a PWM sub system error e Set 1 Instructs the PWM sub system to stop its output modulation immediately output off 0 Cleared 0 Normal operation PWM Enable Status ES Element Description Address Data Format Range Type X User Program Access ES PWM Enable Status PWM O ES bit Oor1 status read only The PWM ES Enable Status is controlled by the PWM sub system When the rung preceding the PWM instruction is solved true the PWM instruction is enabled and the enable status bit is set When the rung preceding the PWM instruction transitions to a false state the enable status bit is reset 0 immediately e Set 1 PWM is enabled Cleared 0 PWM has completed or the rung preceding the PWM is false Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 6 24 Using High Speed Outputs Publication 1762 RM001C EN P PWM Ou
474. unt Example 23 y off 0 off 0 off 0 on 1 HSC Accumulator 1 count Example3 v off 0 off 0 jon 1 Reset accumulator to zero Example 4 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 5 on 1 Hold accumulator value Example 6 off 0 jon 1 Hold accumulator value Example 7 off 0 off 0 Hold accumulator value 1 HSC1 only applies to the MicroLogix 1500 2 Count input A leads count input B 3 Count input B leads count input A Blank cells don t care fT rising edge j falling edge NOTE Inputs 11 0 0 0 through 11 0 0 7 are available for use as inputs to other functions regardless of the HSC being used Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 5 22 Using the High Speed Counter Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Accumulator ACC Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access ACC Accumulator HSC 0 ACC long word 32 bit INT control read write The ACC Accumulator contains the number of counts detected by the HSC sub system If either mode 0 or mode 1 is configured the value of the software accumulator is cleared 0 when a high preset is reached or when an overflow condition is detected High Preset HIP Description Address Data Format Type User Program Access HIP High Preset HSC O HIP long word 32 bit INT control read write The HIP High Preset is the upper setpoint in counts that defines when the HSC sub syst
475. update time of your system go to the procedure on page 19 25 3 Enter the following values the initial setpoint SP value a reset Tj of 0 a rate Ty of 0 a gain K of 1 and a loop update of 5 Set the PID mode to STI or Timed per your ladder diagram If STI is selected ensure that the loop update time equals the STI time interval Enter the optional settings that apply output limiting output alarm MaxS MinS scaling feed forward 4 Get prepared to chart the CV PV analog input or analog output as it varies with time with respect to the setpoint SP value 5 Place the PID instruction in the MANUAL mode then place the processor in the RUN mode 6 While monitoring the PID display adjust the process manually by writing to the CO percent value 7 When you feel that you have the process under control manually place the PID instruction in the AUTO mode 8 Adjust the gain while observing the relationship of the output to the setpoint over time 9 When you notice that the process is oscillating above and below the setpoint in an even manner record the time of 1 cycle That is obtain the natural period of the process Natural Period 4x deadtime Record the gain value Return to the MANUAL mode stop the process if necessary Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 24 Process Control Instruction Publication 1762 RM001 C EN P 10 11 12 13 14 15 Set the loop update time and STI time interva
476. used and communications are interrupted the MSG instruction will timeout and error after the set period of time expires This allows the control program to retry the same message or take other action if desired To disable the internal timeout control enter zero for the MSG instruction timeout parameter If communications are interrupted the processor waits indefinitely for a reply If an acknowledge ACK is received indicated by the ST bit being set but the reply is not received the MSG instruction appears to be locked up although it is actually waiting for a reply from the target device Enable EN Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 EN Binary On or Off Control Read Write The Enable Bit EN is set when rung conditions go true and the MSG is enabled The MSG is enabled when the command packet is built and put into one of the MSG buffers or the request is put in the MSG queue It remains set until the message transmission is completed and the rung goes false You may clear this bit when either the ER or DN bit is set in order to re trigger a MSG instruction with true rung conditions on the next scan Tae DO not set this bit from the control program Enabled and Waiting EW Communications Instructions 21 15 Address Data Format Range Type User Program Access MG11 0 EW Binary On or Off Status Read Only The Enabled and
477. used to correct the problem and clear the fault bit S 1 13 The controller then continues in its current executing mode The routine does not execute for non user faults User Interrupt Instructions INT Interrupt Subroutine INT 1 0 Interrupt Using Interrupts 18 7 Instruction Used To Page INT Interrupt Subroutine Use this instruction to identify a program file as an 18 7 interrupt subroutine INT label versus a regular subroutine SBR label This should be the first instruction in your interrupt subroutine STS Selectable Timed Use the STS Selectable Timed Interrupt Start 18 8 Start instruction to the start the STI timer from the control program rather than starting automatically UID User Interrupt Disable Use the User Interrupt Disable UID and the User 18 9 UIE User Interrupt Enable Interrupt Enable UIE instructions to create zones in 18 10 which I O interrupts cannot occur UIF User Interrupt Flush Use the UIF instruction to remove selected pending interrupts from the system Instruction Type input Table 18 1 Execution Time for the INT Instruction Controller When Rung Is True False MicroLogix 1200 1 0 us 1 0 us MicroLogix 1500 1 0 us 1 0 us The INT instruction is used as a label to identify a user interrupt service routine ISR This instruction is placed as the first instruction on a rung and is always evaluated as true Use of th
478. ute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory F1 The MicroLogix controllers support the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computers or other controllers that support DF1 Full Duplex DF1 is an open protocol Refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual Allen Bradley publication 1770 6 5 16 for more information DF1 Full Duplex Operation DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication is required This type of protocol supports simultaneous transmissions between two devices in both directions DF1 protocol controls message flow detects and signals errors and retries if errors are detected When the system driver is DF1 Full Duplex the following parameters can be changed Table E 2 DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Programming Software Default Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K 19 2K Parity none even none Source ID Node Address 0 to 254 decimal 1 Control Line no handshaking Full Duplex modem no handshaking Error Detection CRC BCC CRC Embedded Responses auto detect enabled auto detect Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled disabled enabled ACK Timeout x20 ms 1 to 65535 counts 20 ms increments 50 counts NAK retries 0 to
479. when RTS is raised and the transmission is initiated Specify the RTS Send Delay value in increments of 20 ms Valid range is 0 to 65535 ce Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary Publication Number AG 7 1 fora complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory address for data located in Input file word 1 bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter A device that provides RS 232 isolation to an RS 485 Half Duplex communication link Catalog Number 1761 NET AIC application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific purposes ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard for defining codes for information exchange between equipment produced by different manufacturers The basis of character sets used in most microcomputers a string of 7 binary digits represents each character baud rate The speed of communication between devices Baud rate is typically displayed in K baud For example 19 2K baud 19 200 bits per second bit The smallest unit of memory used in discrete or binary logic where the value 1 represents ON and 0 represents OFF block diagrams A method used to illustrate logic components
480. with address S 5 0 in your program The rung must be between the overflow point and the END or TND statement The following illustration shows the rung you can use to unlatch the overflow trap bit S 5 dE Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 10 4 Math Instructions ADD Add SUB Subtract Instruction Type output ADD Add Table 10 3 Execution Time for the ADD and SUB Instructions Source A N7 0 0 lt Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is Source B N7 1 0 lt True False Pest a MicroLogix 1200 ADD word 2 7 us 00 us long word 11 9 us 0 0 us an SUB word 3 4 us 0 0 us Subtract long word 12 9 us 0 0 us QUERAS T NAD MicroLogix 1500 ADD word 2 5 us 0 0 us Source B i long word 10 4 us 0 0 us lt Dest N7 2 SUB word 2 9 us 0 0 us Us long word 11 2 us 0 0 us Use the ADD instruction to add one value to another value Source A Source B and place the sum in the Destination Use the SUB instruction to subtract one value from another value Source A Source B and place the result in the Destination Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Math Instructions 10 5 MUL Multiply DIV Divide Instruction Type output MUL Multiply Table 10 4 Execution Time for the MUL and DIV Instructions Source A N7 0 0 lt Controller Instruction Data Size When Rung Is Source B N7 1 0 lt True False Dest d MicroLogix
481. with the intended value prior to the execution of an indexed instruction Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 4 8 Programming Instructions Overview Publication 1762 RM001C EN P Indirect Addressing Example An equivalent example using indirect addressing is shown below In place of using the index register 24 the user can designate any other valid word address as the indirect address Multiple indirect addresses can be used within an instruction The following ADD instruction uses an indirect address in the Source A and Destination addresses If the indirect offset value is 20 stored in N7 3 the controller uses the data stored at the base address plus the indirect offset to perform to instruction Indirect Addresses 7 ADD Working Add Addresses Source A N7 N7 3 Source B 25 Dest N15 1N7 3 ADD Add Source A N7 20 Source B 25 Dest N15 20 In this example the controller uses the following addresses Operand Base Address Offset Value in N7 3 Working Address Source A N7 0 20 N7 20 Destination N7 0 20 N15 20 Chapter 5 Using the High Speed Counter The MicroLogix 1200 has one 20 kHz high speed counter the MicroLogix 1500 has two Functionally the counters are identical Each counter has four dedicated inputs that are isolated from other inputs on the controller HSCO0 utilizes inputs 0 through 3 and HSC1 MicroLogix 1500 only utilizes inputs 4 through 7 Each counter
482. xS scaling allows you to work in engineering units The deadband error and SPV are also displayed in engineering units The process variable PV must be within the range of 0 to 16383 Use of MinS MaxS does not minimize PID PV resolution Scaled errors greater than 32767 or less than 32768 cannot be represented If the scaled error is greater than 32767 it is represented as 32767 If the scaled error is less than 32768 it is represented as 32768 Old Setpoint Value OSP InputParameter Address Data Range Type User Descriptions Format Program Access OSP Old PD10 0 0SP word 32 768 to 432 767 status read only Setpoint Value INT The OSP Old Setpoint Value is substituted for the current setpoint if the current setpoint goes out of range of the setpoint scaling limiting parameters Publication 1762 RM001C EN P 19 6 Process Control Instruction Output Limit OL Output Parameter Address Data Range Type User Program Descriptions Format Access OL Output Limit PD10 0 0L binary 1 enabled control read write 0 disabled An enabled 1 value enables output limiting to the values defined in PD10 0 CVH Control Variable High and PD10 0 CVL Control Variable Low A disabled 0 value disables OL Output Limiting Control Variable High Limit CVH Output Parameter Address Data Format Range Type User Program Descriptions Access
483. y Type Bit Instructions Use relay type bit instructions to monitor and or control bits in a data file or function file such as input bits or timer control word bits The following instructions are described in this chapter Instruction UsdT JPage XIC Examine if Closed ExamineabitforanONcondition MI XIO Examine if Open Examine a bit for an OFF condition 7 1 OTE Output Enable Turn ON or OFF a bit non retentive 7 3 OTL Output Latch Latch a bit ON retentive 7 4 OTU Output Unlatch Unlatch a bit OFF retentive 7 4 ONS One Shot Detect an OFF to ON transition 7 5 OSR One Shot Rising Detect an OFF to ON transition 7 6 OSF One Shot Falling Detect an ON to OFF transition 7 6 These instructions operate on a single bit of data During operation the processor may set or reset the bit based on logical continuity of ladder rungs You can address a bit as many times as your program requires XIC Examine if Closed X10 Examine if Open Instruction Type input B3 0 E Table 7 1 Execution Time for the XIC and XIO Instructions 0 Sr ee ee ee pet Controller When Instruction Is B3 0 True False a Aca MicroLogix 1200 10 9 us 0 8 us MicroLogix 1500 10 9 us 0 7 us Use the XIC instruction to determine if the addressed bit is on Use the XIO instruction to determine if the addressed bit is off When used on a rung the bit address being examined can correspond to

MicroLogix™ 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

MicroLogix&trade; 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

MicroLogix™ 1200 and MicroLogix 1500 Programmable Controllers